You are on page 1of 402
Solutions to LE. Irodov’s Problems in General Physics Volume I Waves . Optics » Modern Physics Second Edition ABHAY KUMAR SINGH Director Abhay’s LA.T. Phy nysics Teaching Centre tna-6 ISBN : 81-239-0486-X First Edition : 1996 Reprint: 1997 Second Edition : 1998 Reprint : 2000 Reprint : 2002 Reprint : 2004 Copyright © Author & Publisher Alll rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording. or any information storage and retrieval system without permission, in writing, from the publisher. Published by S.K. Jain tor CBS Publishers & Distributors, 4506/1A. 11 Darya Ganj, New Delhi - 110 002 (India Printed at : 1S. Offset Printers, Delhi - 110 051 In the memory of Late Shri Arvind Kumar (Ex-Director, The Premier Institute, Patna) The man who taught me how to teach. FOREWORD Science, in general, and physics, in particular, have evolved out of man’s quest to know beyond unknowns. Matter, radiation and their mutual interactions are basically studied in physics. Essentially, this is an experimental science. By observing appropriate phenomena in nature one arrives at a set of rules which goes to establish some basic fundamental concepts. Entire physics rests on them. Mere knowledge of them is however not enough. Ability to apply them to real day-to-day problems is required. Prof. Irodov’s book contains one such set of numerical exercises spread over a wide spectrum of physical disciplines. Some of the problems of the book long appeared to be notorious to pose serious challenges to students as well as to their teachers. This book by Prof. Singh on the solutions of problems of Irodgv’s book, at the outset, seems to remove the sense of awe which at one time prevailed. Traditionally a difficult exercise to solve continues to draw the attention of concerned persons over a sufficiently long time. Once a logical solution for it becomes available, the difficulties associated with its solutions are forgotten very soon. This statement is not only valid for the solutions of simple physical problems but also to various physical phenomena. Nevertheless, Prof. Singh’s attempt to write a book of this magnitude deserves an all out praise. His ways of solving problems are elegant, straight forward, simple and direct. By writing this book he has definitely contributed to the cause of physics education. A word of advice to its users is however necessary. The solution to a particular problem as given in this book is never to be consulted unless an all out effort in solving it independently has been already made. Only by such judicious uses of this book one would be able to reap better benefits out of it. ‘As a teacher who has taught physics and who has been in touch with physics curricula at LLT., Delhi for over thirty years, I earnestly feel that this book will certainly be of benefit io younger siudenis in thei formative years. Dr. Dilip Kumar Roy Professor of Physics Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi New Delhi-110016. FOREWORD A proper understanding of the physical laws and principles that govern nature require solutions of relaied problems which exemplify dhe principic in quesiion and leads iv a better grasp of the principles involved. It is only through experiments or through solutions of multifarious problem-oriented questions can a student master the intricacies and fall outs of a physical Iaw. According to Ira M. Freeman, professor of physics of the state university of new Jersy at Rutgers and author of ‘“‘physic--principles and Insights” -- “In certain situations mathematical formulation actually promotes intuitive understand- ing....... Sometimes a mathematical formulation is not feasible, so that ordinary language rigorous and its concepts more precise than those of language. Any science that is able to make extensive use of mathematical symbolism and procedures is justly called an exact science’’. L.E. Irodov’s problems in General Physics fulfills such a need. This book originally published in Russia contains about 1900 problems on mechanics, thermody- namics, molecular physics, electrodynamics, waves and oscillations, optics, atomic and nuclear physics. The book has survived the test of class room for many years as is evident from its number of reprint editions, which have appeared since the first English edition of 1981, including an Indian Edition at affordable price for Indian students. Abhay Kumar Singh’s present book containing solutions to Dr. LE. Irodov’s Problems in General Physics is a welcome attempt to develop a student’s problem solving skills. The book should be very useful for the students studying a general course in physics and also in developing their skills to answer questions normally encountered in national level entrance examinations conducted each year by various bodies for admissions to profes- sional colleges in science and technology. BP. PAL Professor of Physics LLT., Delhi Preface to the Second Edition Perhaps nothing could be more gratifying for an author than seeing his ‘brainchild’ attain wide acclaim. Fortunately, it happes so with ‘Solutions to I. E. Irodov’s Problems in General Physics (Volume-Il) authored by me. Since inception, it showed signs of excellence amidst its ‘peer-group’, so much so that it fell victim to Piracy-syndrome, The reported on rush of spurious copies of this volume in the market accelerated the pace of our contemplation for this second edition. Taking advantage of this occassion the book has almost been comptelely vetted to cater to the needs of aspiring students. My heart felt thanks are due to all those who have directly or indirectly engineered the cause of its existing status in the book-world. Paina June 1997 Abhay Kumar Singh Preface This is the second volume of my “Solutions to LE. Irodov’s Problems in General Physics.” It contains solutions to the last three chapters of the problem book ‘“Problems in General Physics’’. As in the first volume, in this second one also only standard methods have been used to solve the problems, befitting the standard of the problems solved. Nothing succeeds like success, they say. From the way my earlier books have been received hy physics loving peaple all over the country, Tcan only hope that my present attempt too will be appreciated and made use of at a large scale by the physics fraternity. My special thanks are due to my teacher Dr. (Prof.) J. Thakur, Department of Physics, Patna University, who has been my source of energy and inspiration throughout the preparation of this book. I am also thankful to computer operator Mr. S. Shahab Ahmad and artist Rajeshwar Prasad of my institute (Abhay’s LI.T. Physics Teaching Centre, Mahendru, Patna-6) for their pains-taking efforts. | am also than‘:ful to all my well-wishers, friends and family members for their emotional support. Abhay Kumar Singh Paina July, 1996 CONTENTS Prefacesnaaesaseanses aaccnrssiacecrsetacennsesicecces: vii 4.1 42 4.3 44 S.A 5.2 53 5.4 5.5 5.7 6.1 63 64 65 66 6.7 PART FOUR OSCILLATIONS AND WAVES. Mcchanical Oscillations . Flectric Oscillations . Lee Elastic Waves. Acoustics ..... « Electromagnetic Waves. Radiation . PART FIVE OPTICS Interference of Light Diffraction of Light . . . Polarization of Light . Dispersion and Absorption of Light Thermal Radiation. Quantum Nature of Light PART SIX ATOMIC AND NUCLEAR PHYSICS Scattering of Particles. Rutherford-Bohr Atom Wave Properties of Particles. Schrodinger Equation . . . Properties of Atoms. Spectra .. 5 : 310 Molecules and Crystals 337 Radioactivity . . 360 Nuclear Reactions see sae . Saati Elementary Particles 41 () (b) 42 @) 1 MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS Given, x = aos (o+-4) : (2x) = af) So, v, =x = -a wsin ota and w= xX = - aw cos[orm a] qd) On-the basis of obtained expressions plots x(t), v(t) and w,(1) can be drawn as shown in the answersheet, (of the problem book ). From Eqn (1) ye ~ansin(ot-3) So, v2 = eat sin?( oF) Q) But from the law x = acos(wt-n/4). so.x° = a*cos”(wt-n/4) or, cos*(wt-1/4) = x7/a? or si? (1-n/4) = 1-8 @) Using (3) in (2), aeee(-3] or v= a (ax) 4) Again from Eqn (4),w, = - 40? cos (wt-1/4) = - "x From the motion law of the particle x = asin’ (wt—x/4) fale ax (200-3) 2 2 a_a x a. a. or, x-$0 Gas (200-F) « -Ssin2ar = snore) ; aia. ie. x-$ = Ssin(2or+z). (qy Now compairing this equation with the general equation of harmonic oscillations : X = Asin (atta) Amplitude, A = Zand angular frequency, a = 20. ‘Thus the period of one full oscillation, T= re % o (b) Differentiating Eqn (1) wart. time Vv, =a cos (2@t4) oF via? wo? cos? Qa t+ m) = a? 0? [1 —sin? oe + x)] Q) 2 2 From Eqn (1) (=-5) = Goin? (2oe+n) 2 x axe : 4x()_x or, aut ~ 7] 7sin’ (2at+m) or ree =| 6) From Equs (2) and (3), vy (1 - 3 =40°x(a-x) Plot of v,(x) is as shown in the answersheet. 4.3. Let the general equation of S.H.M. be x = acos(wt+a) @ So, vy = -amsin (ott) Q) Let us assume that ats = 0 ,x=%) and vy = Vy, Thus from Eqns (1) and (2) for ¢ = 0, x9 = acosa, and v, = - awsina {v.,\ | = 35.35 cm Wheretore = tana = ~ Xo Under our assumption Eqns (1) and (2) give the sought x and v, if =240s,a-V S+(%/o) and @ = tan“! CS 0) XQ o 1 1 als Putting all the given numerical values, we get : x= - 29cm and v, =~ 8lem/s 44 From the Eqn, vz= @°(a"-2x") (see Eqn. 4 of 4.1) vi= w?(a?=x7) and v3 = w*(a?-x3) Solving thesc Eqns simultancously, we get @ = V i-vI)/ (3-4), ae V (d-vb8)/(9-¥) 45 (a) When a particle starts from an extreme position, it is useful to write the motion law as x = acoswt (1) (However x is the displacement from the equlibrium position) It f be the time to cover the distence a/2 then from (1) 1 a acest, or cost, = 5 = cost (as 4)< 7/4) ae 2 ny o 2. _..f snus 1°30" 3(2a/T) “6 As X= acoswt, so, v, = -awsinwt Thus vel|y|=-v, = aosinot, forts t= 1/6 Hence sought mean velocity vd 78 =f a(2xDsinorat/ T/6 = 224 05 m/s : (b) In this case, it is easier to write the motion law in the form : x= asinot 2) If t be the time to cover the distance a/2, then from Eqn (2) a _ 2% iS a/2 = asin h or sinh = > = sing (ast) = fa cman { F008 Greds = SF = 1m/s 46 (a) Asx = asinot $0, Vv, = aacoot 3r 3 Sacos(2x/T)t dt Thus = asf dt= 2 2¥ 2.40 x (b) In accordance with the problem Wev,iy so, |] = ]] 2¥2aw|_ 2V¥2ao 3m 3x Hence, using part (a), || = | (©) We have got, v, = awcos wt So, v = |v,] = amcosmt, forts 7/4 = -awcoswt, for T/4sts ar ™ ar J aocoswrdt+f -awcoswtdt ° Pn Hence, ans Using «» = 2x/T, 4.7 From the motion law, x = a cos wt,, it is obvious that the time taken to cover the distance t= nose, where f 0. The equilibrium position can in principle be a maximum but then U" (x9) <0 and the frequency of oscillations about this equilibrium position will be imaginary. The answer given in the book is incorrect both numerically and dimensionally. Let us locate and depict the forces acting on the ball at the position when it is at a distance x down from the undeformed position of the string. At this position, the unbalanced downward force on the ball = mg-2Fsin® By Newton's law, mi’ =mg-2F sin 8 4 = mg-2F0 (when Gis small) A 4F = mg-2F [= mg“ x 4F 4F(._m Thus “She = 55 4F putting x’ = x - mgt , we get xe 42 ml arbitraty angular position 0. (Fig.), relative to equilibrium position were Fg is the force of buoyancy. For the bi from the equation : Nz = Tz, (where we have taken the positive sense of Z axis in the direction of angular velocity i.e. 6 of the bali and passes through the point of suspension of the pendulum O ), we get : -mglsinO+Fylsind = m?O Using m = faro, Fy = far*p and sin @ = @ for small 6, in Eqn (1), we get: 10 4.20 4.21 Thus the sought time period Hence Obviously for small B the ball exccute part of S.H.M. Due to the perfectly clastic collision the velocity of ball simply reversed. As the ball is in S.H.M. (|@| < a on the left)its motion law in differential from can be written as Ze 22 “ay 79 = - o6 Ww If we assume that the ball is released from the extreme position, 8 = B att = 0, the solution of differential equation would be taken in the form Y) ee Ife" be the time taken by the ball to go from the extreme position @ = B to the wall ic. 6 = — a, then Eqn. (2) can be rewritten as -2Vt (Fest , [because sin7!x + cosa = 0/2] s \2 B Let the downward acceleration of the elevator car has continued for time ¢’, then the sought time t= V 2h +t’, where obviously YW 2h is the time of upward acceleration of the elevator. One should slote that if the point of suspension of a mathematical pendulum moves with an acceJeration W , then the time period of the pendulum becomes 2nV (see 4.30) ! wl In this problem the time period of the pendulum while it is moving upward with acceleration w becomes 4.22 re Qn Vv t and its time period while the elevator moves downward with the same gtw Qn V === magnitude of acceleration becomes g w af2h As ihe time uf upward acceleration equais Y “"* , the towai number of osciliations during this time equals 2h/w Qn 1/(g+w) Thus the indicated time = in -anVi/g = V2h/w V (g+w)/¢ Similarly the indicated time for the time interval t' ‘ = a Vg = t' Vg -we aV IM g-w) we demand that V2h/w V(gewy/9e te'V(g-w)/g = V2h/w +e! = Viivw V8tw. -Ve ve -Ve-w Hence the sought time 1V2E, pa V2 Veew-Ve-w ” Ve-Vg-w or, _V 24 Vie B-VI-B a VERNER If the hydromoter were in equlibrium or floating, its weight will be balanced by the buoyancy force acting on it by the fluid. During its small oscillation, let us locate the hydrometer when it is at a vertically downward distance x from its equilibrium position. Obviously the net unbalanced force on the hycrometer is the excess buoyancy force directed upward and equals arxpg. Hence for the hydrometer. ; Where B = w/g a ==7== mi =~ RP pge or, xa- Hence the sought time period — T=20V 3 mr’ pg =25s. 12 4.23 4.24 At first Iet us calculate the stifiness xy and xz of both the parts of the spring. If we subject ngth J, (s2y), ing forces ing forces ing th ng F -F (say) to elongate the spring by the amount x, then Fows a Therefore the elongation per unit length of the spring is x/lp . Now let us subject one of the parts of the spring of natural length 1 /y under the same deforming forces F - F. Then the elongation of the spring will be 2 nl = nx 4 Thus F=«, (nx) (2) Hence from Eqns (1) and (2) K = nk, of Ky = K/q @) Similarly "Toa The position of the block m when both the parts of the spring are non-deformed, is its equilibrium position O. Let us displace the block m towards right or in positive x axis by the small distance x. Let us depict the forces acting on the block when it is at a distance x from its equilibrium position (Fig.). From the second law of motion in projection form i.e. F, = mw, See + Kax Zi k; Kyze. ky 0— Thus -= x mn(m) Hence the sotight time period T= 2nVn(1-n)m/x = 0-138 Similar to the Soln of 4.23, the net unbalanced force on the block m when it is at a small horizontal distance x from the equilibrium position becomes (K, + Kz) x. From F, = mw, for the block : = (Kp 4K, )x = mx (X14 \ -|——}e (fa) Hence the sought time period T = 21 Ky + Ky Alternate : Let us set the block m in motion to perform small oscillation. Let us locate the block when it is at a distance x from its equilibrium position. Thus As the spring force is restoring conservative force and deformation of both the springs are same, so from the conservation of mechanical energy of oscillation of the spring-block system : 425 4.26 4.27 13 ri 121.3 (a) + Buta diegat = Constant Differentiating with respect to time 1 -1 ymrar +7 (Kit ka)2xx = 0 Corte). er) , Hence the sought time period T = 2 xV m Kt During the vertical oscillation let us locate the block at a vertical down distance x from its equilibrium position. At this moment if x, and x, are the additional or further elongation of the upper & lower springs relative to the equilibrium position, then the net unbalanced force on the block will be K2.x, directed in upward direction. Hence KX) = mx @ We also have kenty @ As the springs are massless and initially the net force on the spring is also zero so for the spring Kay = Km e Solving the Eqns (1), (2) and (3) simultaneously, we get Kk Thus tae Hence the sought time period T = 2x ‘The force F, acting on the weight deflected from the position of equilibrium is 2 Ty sin 0. Since the angle 0 is small, the net restoring force, F = 27)* o, Fv kx, where k= 222 <—_—_—__ 2f —____, 1 areca So, by using the formula, w= VE, w= V 22 bo mi If the mercury rises in the left arm by x it must fall by a slanting length equal to x in the other arm. Total pressure difference in the two arms will then be pextpgxcos® = pgx(1+cos0) This will give rise to a restoring force -pgsx(1+0c0s0) This must equal mass times acceleration which can be obtained from work energy principle. 14 4.28 The KE. of the mercury in the tube is clearly : gm So mass times acceleration must be : mx Hence mx +pgS(1+cos0)x =.0 This is SH.M. with a time period — T=20V Te5(i+e080)" In the equilibrium position the C.M. of the rod lies nid way between the two rotating wheels. Let us displace the rod horizontally by some small distance and then release it. Let us depict the forces acting on the rod when its C.M. is at distance x from its equilibrium position (Fig.). Since there is no net vertical force acting on the rod, Newton’s second law gives : Ly—>e—If,— M C Vr. C 1 )EN, * +) Ki Oe eeu N,+Ny = mg q@) For the translational motion of the rod from the Eqn. : F, = m Wey KN,- EN) = mi? Q) As the rod experiences no net torque about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the Fig. through the C.M. of the rod. lex I-x MN ( a) ae 4) @) Solving Eqns. (1), (2) and (3) simultaneously we get v2 ePEy Hence the sought time period 15 429 (a) The only force acting on the ball is the gra tional force F, of magnitude y fe pmr, where y is the gravitational constant p, the density of the Earth and r is the distance of the body from the centre of the Earth. or, so the expression for F can be written as, F ~~ mgZ., here R is the radius of the Earth and the equation of motion in projection But, ¢ form has the form, or, mi + 7B x S (b) The equation, obtained above has the form of an equation of S.H.M. having the time Vk iod, Te2 , peri Ve Hence the body will reach the other end of the shaft in the time, te ten VE = 42 min. 8 2 (©) From the conditions of S.H.M., the speed of the body at the centre of the Earth will be maximum, having the magnitude, v = Roa = RVQR =VQgR = 7-9km/s 430 In the frame of point of suspension the mathematical pendulum of mass m (say) will oscillate. In this frame, the body m will experience the inertial force m (-w*) in addition to the real forces during its oscillations. Therefore in equilibrium position m is deviated by some angle say a. In equilibrium position Tycosa = mg+mwecos(x-B) and Tosina = mwsin(x-B) So, from these two Eqns cos tana = ELMS B wsin B nd con an W Mo? si? Bs (mg = mw cos) w mg —mwoos B 16 431 4.32 Let us displace the bob m from its equilibrium position by some small angle and then release it, Now locate the ball at an angular position (c: + 8) from vertical as shown in the figure. From the Eqn. : No = IB, ~ mg [sin (a + 0) - mw cos (x - ) [sin (a + 0) + m w sin (x - B) [cos (a +6) =m 176 or, g (sin a cos 0 + cos «sin 0) ~ w cos (x - B) (sin cos 0 + cos a sin 6) + w sin B (cos «1 cas 8 = sin at sin 8) =160 But for small ©, sinO w 0 cosO m1 So, = g (sin «+ cos a6) - w cos (x ~ B) (sin a. + cos 01 0) + wsin B (cos a ~ sin a 6) =16 or, (tan c+ 0) (wens B-g)+wein B(1—tanad) = 6 Q) Solving Eqns (1) and (2) simultaneously we get ~(g?-2ZwecosB+w?)O= IV s+ w?-2wecosB O >=, Thus 6- - #1, . . 2n 1 Hence the sought time period T = =22V =a Oy lg-w] Obviously the sleeve performs small oscillations in the frame of rotating rod. In the rod’s frame let us depict the forces acting on the sleeve along the length of the rod while the sleeve is at a small distance x towards right from its equilibrium position. The free body diagram of block does not contain Coriolis force, because it is perpendicualr to the length of the rod. From F, = mw, for the sleeve in the frame of rod -Kxtmorx = mx ea o, x =-(*-o?|x @M ia m Thus the sought time period It is obvious from Eqn (1) that the sleeve will not perform small oscillations if @2z¥V — 10104/s. m When the bar is about to start sliding along the plank, it experiences the maximum restoring force which is being provided by the limiting friction, Thus kN = maga or, kmg = maga 7 2 wpa ot, 4-8 & & 433 The natural angular frequency of a mathematical pendulum equals @) = V g/I (@) We have the solution of S.E.M. equation in angular form ; 8 = 8,,cos(wot+ a) If at the initial moment ic. att = 0, 0 = 0, than a = Thus the above equation takes the form 0 = 6, COS Wf - 2a 3 [98 o,cos /£ « sos V og! Thus @ = 3° cos 35 t (b) The S.H.M. equation in angular form : 0 = 0,,sin(wpt+a) if at the initial moment ¢ = U, 6 = U, then @ = U.Then the above equation takes the form © = 6,,sin wot Let ¥% be the velocity of the lower end of pendulam at 0 = 0, then from conserved of mechanical energy of oscillaton Eneon = Eearene °F Tnean ~ Uccrem on, Smv5 = mgl(1 —c0s 0,) ‘Yuus the sought equation becomes 0 = 0, sinwot = 45° sin35t Let 0g and vo be the angular deviation and linear vclocity at ¢ = 0. As the mechanical energy of oscillation of the mathematical pendulum is conservation © 1 nve4mgl(1 cos 0) = mg! (1-cos O,) 2 Yo or, J 7 BEC COS Op - COS On ) , -1 0 ( y 0 | oot fons ply} «54 18 Then from © = 5.4” sin (3.5t + a), we see that sina = and cos a < 0 because 5. z the velovity is directed towards the centre. Thus a = z + 10 radians and we get the answer. 4.34 While the body A is at its upper extreme position, the spring is obviously elongated by the amount If we indicate y-axis in vertically downward direction, Newton’s second law of motion in projection form i.e. F, = mw, for body A gives : m m mare(e-Tie) = mote ox (e-MAE) « mua) @ (Because at any extreme position the magnitude of acceleration of an oscillating body equals 7a and is restoring in nature.) If N be the normal force exerted by the floor on the body B, while the body A is at its upper extreme position, from Newton's second law for body B ms vofe-5t) me mes 2 a or, N= mg-xja-— >| = mg-m,(w"a—g) ( using Eqn. 1) HenceN = (m,+m,)g-m, 07a When the body A is at its lower extreme position, the spring is compresed by the distance From Newton’s second law in projeciton forin ie. F, = mw, for body A at this state: HS m: m,g-«| a+ - = m,(- 7a) of K{ a+ = m(g+ora) @) In this case if N’' be the normal force exerted by the floor on the body B, From Newton’s sccond law m for body B we get: N’ = foe “E) ems = m,(g+0%a) +g (using Eqn. 3 ) Hence N’ = (m+ m)g+m,o7a From Newton’s third law the magnitude of sought forces arc N' and_N, respectively. 4.35 (a) For the block from Newton’s second law in projection form F, = mw, N-mg=my Q@) But from y = a(1-coswt) 19 We get Q From Eqns (1) and (2) @) From Newtons’s third law the force by which the body m exerts on the block is directed 2 vertically downward and equis_N = mg ( 1 +S cos o ‘) © 4.36 (a) the pl normal reaction is the contact force). Thus from 2 me(1+8 temo) = 0 for some t. Hence Ogun = 8/0" Bem. We ubscive that the suviion takes place about ihe iean po: my = a. Ai ihe i instant y = 0. As shown in (b) the normal reaction vanishes at a height (g/w7) above the position of equilibrium and the body flies off as a free body. The speed of the body at a distance (g/w”) from the equilibrium position is wV a”-(g/w’)’, so that the condition of the problem gives Hence solving the resulting quadratic equation and taking the positive roof, V24E 200m. o Let y(t) = displacement of the body from the end of the unstreched position of the spring (not the equilibrium position). Then my = -Kyt+mg This equation has the solution of the form y = A+Beos (atta) if -mw' Bows (wita) = -n[ArBous(witu)jrmg Then w= and A= TE m Ld we have y= 0 and y=0 at r=0.S0 -wBsina = 0 Since B>0O and A> 0 we must have a = 0 BuAuw @E « 20 4.37 and y= ME(1~ cos wt) (b) Tension in the spring is T= Ky = mg(1-cosdt) so Tmax * 2MR. Tin = O In accordance with the problem Fe-amr So, m(£TR SP) = - am(x7 yj) Thus ¥=-ax and y=-ay Hence the solution of the differential equation X = -ax becomes x = acos(wof+5), where ws = a So, E = — amgsin(imptta) From the initial conditions of the problem, v, = 0 and x = 7g at r= 0 So from Eqn. (2) a = 0, and Eqn takes the form X= 7yCOS Wot $0, COS Wy t = X/ro One of the solution of the other differential Ean j’ = - ay. becomes y = a’sin(@pr+6'), where wp = a From the initial condition, y = 0 at ¢= 0, so 8! = 0 and Eqn (4) becomes : y = a’ sin 9 45) Differentiating w.r.t. time we get Y = a’ Wo COS Wot But from the initial condition of the problem, 7 = vg at ¢ = 0, So, from Eqn (6) Vo = a'@ 0%! = Vo/t Using it in Eqn (5), we get ye <2 sin wt or sinanyt = “2% &% % Squaring and adding Eqns (3) and (7) we get : a? 2 oy 2 sin? woe + cos? ups = “BP 3 0 ry py 2 z = - on (7) +a(2) (28 4, = 43) (1) Q) @) 4 © ” 4.38 (a) As the elevator car is a translating non-inertial frame, therefore the body m will experience an inertial force mw directed downward in addition to the real forces in the elevator’s frame. From the Newton’s second law in projection form F, = mw, for the body in the frame of elevator car: -o( oy) emesme =my @ 0) 21 ( Because the initial elongation in the spring is mg/« ) 50, my = oxyemee oof ye) “ a cacyee ecg C Egn. (1) shows that the motion of the body m is S.H.M. and its solution becomes y-M «asin VE rea] @ Differentiating Eqn (2) wrt. time Using the mitial condition y(U) = U in Eqn (2), we get : A mw asina = -=™ and using the other initial condition (0) = 0 in Eqn (3) we get aV © cosa =0 m Thus a= -o/2 and a= 7™* Hence using these values in Eqn (2), we get mw Ve y4 n( tN ] Proceed up to Eqn.(1). The solution of this differential Eqn be of the form : ay asia(V x 140] y K m or, - Lv asin (VE v9) : » K/m m or, y~ Ew asin (wot +) ES w=V =| (4) 0 m From the initial condition that att= 0, y(0)= 0,s00-asin8 or 8-0 Thus Eqn.(4) takes the from :y- 4 = asin wot ©) Mp a Differentiating Eqn. (5) we get : @ Wg Cos wt (6) 22 4.39 4.40 But from the other initial condition (0) = 0 at t = 0. So, from Eqn.(6) -S,= 0m of a= -a/0} @ Putting the value of a in Eqn. (5), we get the sought y(1). ie. ar ia. a , y- SF = -Ssinegt or y = %(apt-sinwor) 2 4 ©) There is an important difference between a rubber cord or steel coire and a spring. A spring can be pulled or compressed and in both cases, obey’s Hooke’s law. But a rubber cord becomes lodse when one tries to compress it and does not then obey Hooke’s law. Thus if we suspend a body by a rubber cord it stretches by a distance mg/x in reaching the equilibrium configuration. If we further strech it by a distance A A it will execute harmonic oscillations when released if AA s mg/x because only in this case will the cord remain taut and obey Hoake’s law. A Pgax = 8/6 1 2 A még? 26 (Alm Y = 9g As the pan is of negligible mass, there is no lass of kinetic energy even though the collision is inelastic. The mechanical eneigy of the body m in the Geld generated by the juint action of both the gravity force and the elastic force is conserved i.e. AE = 0. During the motion of the body m from the initial to the final (position of maximum compression of the spring) ition AT = 0, and therefore AU = AU,,+AU,, = 0 On solving the quadratic equation : a: 202 xe & * aa 2mgh = « As minus sign is not acceptable rome Ve, 2meh K ee K If the body m were at rest on the spring, the corresponding position of m will be its equilibrium position and at this position the resultant force on the body m will be zero. Therefore the equilibrium compression A.x (say) due to the body m will be given by KAx = mg or Ax = mg/K Therefore seperation between the cquilibrium position and one of the extreme position i.e. the sought amplitude 23 The mechanical energy of oscillation which is conserved equals E = Usireme because at the extreme position kinetic energy becomes zero. Although the weight of body m is a conservative force , it is not restoring in this problem, hence Ugireme is only concerned with the spring force. Therefore a E = Vs = $k a? = mehe ee 44 Unlike the previous (4.40) problem the kinetic energy of body m decreases due tothe perfectly ¢ the pan with velocity vo = V2gh If v be the common velocity of the " body m+ pan " system due to the collision then from the conservation of linear momentum mvy = (M+m)v or va Mo mVo gh » (M+m)— (M+m) At the moment the body m strikes the pan, the spring is compressed due to the weigh! af the pan by the amount M g/k . If 7 be the further compression of the spring due to the \ercily acquired by the "pan — body m" system, then from the conservation of mechanical ene of the said system in the field generatad by the joint action of both the gravity and spring forces 3 z Zxghm m+ Thus As minus sigan is not acceptable p= MBL KK If the oscillating “pan + body m” system were at rest it correspond to their equilbrum position M a ie. the spring were compressed by Cfemig therefore the amplitude of oscillation 4.42 The mechanical energy of oscillation which is only conserved with the restoring forces becomes E = Urirme = EK a? (Because spring force is the only restoring force not the 2 weight of the body) Altemnately E = Tyean = $(M +m) a? 0? ef « \ 1 thus be puteme( a Man Jeane We have F = a(jiz xj’) or, mE TET) = a(yir eT) So, mx = ay and my = -ax qa) From the initial condition,at t= 0, % = 0 and y = 0 So, integrating Eqnymx' = ay we get visay i= Sy (2) Using Eqn (2) in the Eqn mm: = -ayx, we get 2 2 eo a 7 a = == (2 3) my my uy (=) y @) one ot the solution of ditterential Eqn (3) is y =A sin(wgt+ca), where @y = a/m. As att = 0, y = 0, so the solution takes the form y = A sin @of On differentiating w.rt. time y = A to cos Wot From the initial condition of the problem, at ¢ =,0, ) = vo So, Vo = Aw or A = Vo/Wo Thus Y = (Vo/a@) sin ot (4) Thus from (2) x = Vo sin wot so integrating x= B= ~ cosomt (5) Wo a « « »_ YO On using ea0a 1205-0 Hence finally xs an (1 -c0s wy 1) © Hence from Eqns (4) and (6) we get [x= (vo/a9) P + ¥* = (v/a)? which is the equation of a circle of radius (vo/m9) with the centre at the point Xo = Vo/Wo, Yo =U zo 4.43 If water has frozen, the system consisting of the light rod and the frozen water in the hollow sphere constitute a compound (physical) pendulum to a very good approximation because we can take the whole system to be rigid. For such systems the time period is given by lp t-2aVi Vie 5 where k? = 2R? is the radius of gyration of the spherc. g 5 The situation is different when water is unfrozen. When dissipative forces (viscosity) are neglected, we are dealing with ideal fluids. Such fluids instantaneously respond to (unbalanced) internal stresses. Suppose the sphere with liquid water actually executes small rigid oscillations. Then the portion of the fluid above the centre of the sphere will have a greater acceleration than the portion below the centre because the linear acceleration of any element is in this case, equal to angular acceleration of the clement multiplied by the distance of the clement from the centre of suspension (Recall that we are considering small oscillations). Then, as is obvious in a frame moving with the centre of mass, there will appear an unbalanced couple (not negated by any pseudoforces) which will cause the fluid to move rotationally so as to destroy differences in acceleration. Thus for this case of idcal {uids the pendulum must move in.such a way that the elements of the fluid all undergo the same acceleration. This implies that we have a simple (mathematical) pendulum with the time period : T= 22 t Thus T= 1) V1+2(8) e\ey (One expects that a liquid with very small viscosity will have a time period close Ty while one with high viscosity will have a time period closer to T;.) 444 Let us locate the rod at the position when it makes an angle @ from the vertical. In this problem both, the gravity and spring forces are restoring conservative forces, thus from the conservation of mechanical energy of oscillation of the oscillating system : amr (OP +mgh(1—cos8) + 3 14(10) = constant Differentiating w.rt. time, we get : 2 iat 200 + Elsi i 5 7e7200 = 0 Thus for very small 0 aoe ly 21 Hence, & = 26 4.48 (a) Let us locate the system when the threads are deviated through an angle a! < cx, during oes ise is 2 G2 « 2( 8? 4.46 The XE. of the disc is 5/9 2 2 Je the oscillations of the system (Fig.). From the conservation of mechanical energy of the system : ImL? 3 1p Ot mBl(1-cosa’) = constant (1) Where L ip the length of the rod, 0 is the angular deviation of the rod from its equilibrium position i.e. 0=0. Differentiating Eqn. (1) wart. time imL* L? 212 ha 1 ! cl 7206+ mglsina’a’ = 0 L_ 12 But from the Fig. So, @ aie Thus the sought time period T. (b) The sought oscillation energy E = Ucn = mgi(1-cosa) = mgl2sin? > 2 2 a mgl2% = EIS” (pecause for small angle sin @ = @) . 1 , The torsional potential energy is zke. Thus the total energy is: By definition of the amplitude @,, @ = 0 when @ = @, Thus total energy is 27 1 eet Zhen = GR G+ The 2 on Om = 9 V 142K ¥0 2k gh about its one end and perpendicular to its length 4.47 Moment of inertia of the rod equals 3 2). 2 Thus rotational kinetic energy of the rod = 3("-)# ame when the rod is displaced by an angle @ its C.G. goes up by a distance 2 0) = tor 7 (1-008 8) ZF for small 6. Thus the PE, becomes : mg if As the mechanical energy of oscillation of the rod is conserved. 2). ("3 )@+3("F 0? = Constant on differentiating wart. time and for the simplifies we get : = -380 for small 0. we see that the angular frequency « is = V3g/21 we write the general solution of the angular oscillation as : 0 = Acoswr+Bsinwt But Q=0 at t=0, sco A =O and 6 = 0) at t= 0,50 B = Op/o Thus 0 = Ogcos 01+ Yin ot Thus the KE. of the rod = [-oOsinm 1+, cos wtf . by 2 mi?» , ‘ - 75 (65 cos? w t+ 0 05 sin” wf ~ 209 Op Op sin orcos or] On averaging over onc time period the last’ term — vanishes and =< cos? o t> = 1/2. Thus = Fm P Bri mgs? o5 (where ©? = 3/21) 12 26 4.48 4.49 Let | = distance between the C.G. (C) of the pendulum and its point of suspension O Originally the pendulum is in inverted position and its C.G. is above O. When it falls to th normal (stable) position of equilibrium its C.G. has fallen by a distance 2 J. In the equilibriun position the total energy is equal to KE. = jlo and we have from energy conservation : Amgl Lig gla = mg2l or T= 2B Anguiar frequency of osciliation for a physical pendulum is given by wg = mgi/I Thus rear V won V Ameo = mgl Let, moment of inertia of the pendulum, about the axis, concemed is J, then writing N, = [Bp for the pendulum, =mgxsina0=18 ot, 6~- BEX 9 (For small 6) which is the required equation for $.H.M. So, the frequency of oscillation, oe VME og, xe Va? ay i Mg Now, when the mass m is attached to the pendulum, at a distance / below the oscillating axis, -Megxsin0!-mglsinO! = (14m? ee 29 or, ~ eUMes ml) gy 28 (Foy gmat 0) : (i+m1r) dt?’ which is again the equation of S.H.M., So, the new frequency, fo = ¥ eUfeem) Q) (+m?) Soiving Eqns. (i) and (2), V sli/eot +m!) ay (+m?) or op = loitmel , T+mI or, 1(0}- 03) = mgl-modl? and hence, T= ml? (0-8/1) | (oj 3) = 0-8 g-m? 450 When the two pendulums are joined rigidly and sct to oscillate, cach exert wryues on the other, these torques are equal and opposite. We write the Jaw of motion for the two pendulums as 10 = -0ih0+G 0 = -03h0-G where + G is the torque of mutual interactions. We have written the restoring forces on each pendulum in the absence of the other as - w; 1,0 and - w3/J, © respectively, Then 2 2 Aor thm, = -00 hth 2 Hea oe Visit bot +h 4.51 Let us locate the rod when it is at small angular position relative to its equilibrium position. If @ be the sought distance, then from the conservation of mechanical energy of oscillation mga(1~cos0)+ So: (6)? = constant Differentiating wets time we get : mgasin0O+ Flog 200 -0 2 But Too = + ma? and for small 0, sin = 0, we get a - -(84—|o Gee? Hence the time period of one full osscillation becomes i: 2. 4x7 (2? T=2n mre Tal ite ag , d(v For Tin » Obviously 7° | Gy, + @| = 0 2 So, ! a Hence 30 4.52 453 Consider ihe moment of inertia of the triangular plate about AB. 1=ffeam = ffrpaxay . A B 2 EP th_x)dx Thus KE. 2 PE. = mgh (1-050) = Emgh& Here 0 is the angle that the instantaneous plane of the plate makes with the equilibrium position which is vertical. (The plate rotates as a rigid body) Thus g-ime e+ 3 meh 2 2 2g. mgh/ mi Hence ot = FE, mgh/ me So TearV A -nV 24. and Iyeducet = 4/2. Let us go to the rotating frame, in which the disc is stationary. In this frame the rod is subjected to coriolis > and centrifugal forces, Fyy and Fy, where & 7 mur Fae = f 2dm(v'x ab) and Fey = f dade, where F is the position of an elemental mass of the N rod (Fig,) with respect to point © (dise’s centre) and dv v-# As r= OP - OA+AP So, dr d(AP) Ly (as OA is constant) dt dt As the rod is vibrating transversely, so v' is directed perpendicular to the length of the rod. Hence Zn ( v’ x @) for each elemental mass of the rod is directed along PA. Therefore the net torque of coriolis about A becomes zero. The not torque of centrifulgal force about point aA: Now, Tray - f apx dmotr = APx (F)#s8(oa+ar) } 31 «OA ~ f Fasahsasino(-k) ' = FujasinO(-k)f sds = moda sinO(-k) T 2 . a Tepe) * Eepyy k= ~magas sind According to the equation of rotational dynamics : tz) = [4 az or, or, Thus, for small 8, [p25 This implies that the frequency wp of oscillation is w = igt 454 The physical system consists with a pulley and the block. Choosing an intertial frame, let us direct the x-axis as shown in the figure. Initially the system 1s in equilibrium position. Now from the condition of translation equilibrium for the block To= mg () Similarly for the rotational equilibrium of the pulley KA/R= ToR or T= «Al 2) 32 455 from Eqns. (1) and (2) Aln 78 ) Now let us disturb the equilibrium of the system no matter in which way to analyse its motion. At an arbitrary position shown in the figure, from Newton’s second law of motion for the block F,= mw, mg-T=mw= mx (4) Similarly for the pulley Ni= 18, TR-x(Al+x)R=10 (6) But we BR or, #= RO © from (5) and (6) TR-x(Al+)R= Li ro) Solving (4) and (7) using the initial condition of the problem wens (me gl or, ve -(\x [2 2 UR Hence the sought time period, T= ae nV mre Note : we may soive this probiem by using the conservation of mechanicai energy aiso At the equilbrium position, N,, = 0 (Net torque about 0) So, mgR-mgRsina = 0 or m, = msina a) From the equation of rotational dynamics of a solid body about the stationary axis (say z-axis) of rotation 1. trom NW, = 6, when the pulley is rotated by the small angular displacement @ in clockwise sense relative to the eg 7 MULL m,gR-mgRsin(a+0) MR? 2 Using Eqn. (1) mgssin a - mg (sin a.cos 0 + cos asin @) = [uae am (Jeanede |g + mR7+ mun? 2 Alt 4.56 33 But for small 8, we may write cos @ «= 1 and sin@ « 6 Thus we have megsina—mg(sina+cosa6) = MR+2m Jt sine Rie 2mgcos a : ~ [MR+ 2m(14 sina)R] Hence the sought angular frequency > = WV WET ma) Let us locate solid cylinder when it is displaced from its oO stable equilibrium position by the small angle @ during its ( oscillations (Fig.). If v, be the instantaneous speed of the CM. (C) of the solid cylinder which is in pure rolling, then its angular velocity about its own centre C is @ = v/r (1) Since C moves in a circle of radius (R - r), the speed of C at the same moment can be written as Hence, 6 - ve = O(R-r) @ Thus from Eqns (1) and (2) o- R=) 8) As the mechanical energy of oscillation of the solid cylinder is conserved, ie. E = T+U = constant so, tmvi+4,0?+mg(R-r) (1-cos 0) = constant 2 2 (Where m is the mass of solid cylinder and J, is the moment of inertia of the solid cylinder about an axis passing through its C.M. (C) and perpendicular to the plane of Fig. of solid cylinder) 2 on Fmat PLT oo? +m g (R - 7) (1 ~ £08 0) = constant (using Eqn (1) and I= mr 2) - (Rar? 32g Roy +g(R-r)(1—cos 0) = constant, (using Eqn. 3) , Differentiating w.r.t. time 2(R-r)206 +esin06 = 0 6-28 in Om So, 8 3(R-7) 0, (because fer small 0, sinO = 0) Thus oy - V sak 3( 34 457 4.58 Hence the sought time period Tu ee any 32RD) © 26 Let x, and xz be the spring constant of left and right sides springs. As the rolling of th solid cylinder is pure its lowest point becomes the instanteneous centre of rotation. If 6 be the small angular displacement of its upper most point relative to its equilibrium position, the deformation of each spring becomes (2 R @). Since the mechanical energy of oscillation of the solid cylinder is conserved, E = T+U = constant ie. $4 (8P +3 (2R 0)? +4 2(2R0)? = constant Differentianting w.tt. time $1,260 +3 (+42) 427206 =0 or, (@ +ma’)i +4R?x0 =0 mR? (Because Ip = [p+ mR? = at mR?) Hence 6 =~ -8%o 3m Thus @» = ge and sought time period 2 am am 7~= 2am aa In the CM. frame (which is rigidly attached with the centre of mass of the two cubes) the cubes oscillates. We know that the kinetic energy of two body system equals ie vg, where pi is the reduced mass and ¥,., is the modulus of velocity of any one body particle relative to other. From the conservation of mechanical energy of oscillation : pated ater} = constant Here /p is the natural length of the spring. Differenting the above equation w.rt time, we get : dxaried pu2i’ «0 tecomes UG) » | = m Thusi’ = te (vie mn min) m; +m my my m, +m, Hence the natural frequency of oscillation : «> = / © where u = 35 459 Suppose the balls 1 & 2 are displaced by x,, x, from their initial position. Then the energy is: E = km dt me + aad ays dmv Also total momentum.is : m3, + mji2 = m,V1 mM, X, + M, Xx; Define Xe SE ei my + my Then mo X+—% x, ye ¥-—7 m, + my m, +m, 1 mm, 25 Om + mE 4 Eo 3 Hence m1 m, +m, 2.2 1mm a ipa 2 it imivi it mm 2 So Imm? * zk 21-3 mem Dm (2) From the above equation We seco = YE - V4 = 68" nen w= AM 2 ig. (0) The energy of oscillation is 1 mime yp 12 ay 2 48 x 104 = 48 mI 2 m +m, 3 We have x = asin (wt + a) Initially x=O0mt=0s.a=0 Then x =a sin wt. Also x = v, at ¢ = 0. = So wa =v, and hence a =“! = 22 6 2 om, o” 6 4.60 Suppose the disc 1 rotates by angle 0, and the disc 2 by angle Q» in the opposite sense. Then total torsion of the rod = 6; + 02 . 1 2 and torsional PE. = 5 (81+ 6° @ The KE. of the system (neglecting the moment of inertia of the rod) is 1,m 1; phG+dng \ JH) So total energy of the rod Fete (A, +0.) B+ 5K (0, +82) ‘We can put the total angular momentum of the rod equal to zero since the frequency associated with the rigid rotation of the whole system must be zero (and is known). 461 & _a+h fl 6, Thus 1,8; = 0, or Th," /, * 7+ 17, ; ho. : So a= ith 4 (8,46) and 8 = Fy, (H+ ba) and Bat AD 6 sete bk (0,48)) 2 A+e Tee) Th ‘The anguiar osciiiation, frequency corresponding to this is hh 2 it / o -*/7 aR and T= 20 In the first mode the carbon atom remains fixed and the oxygen atoms move in equal & opposite steps. Then total energy is ® 0 ¢ Q < —x 1,0 2.1 z2Mo e+ 72K ae where x is the displacement of one of the 0 atom (say left one). Thus ot = K/m. @) 0 c 0 —_— => — x ¥ x In this mode the oxygen atoms move in equal steps in the same direction but the carbon atom moves in such a way as to keep the centre of mass fixed. Thus 2mox+m.y = 0 ony = - 27 2m KEW b2mi? +h mM, fe Lamited 52mg * my 2m) 9 4 pen Le 1 4222 m2 tdi mo) 2 “Ase las z\ ) 2 {me} aN 2_ K(,, 2m 2m Thus of = leas ) and oy =o V+ V1.2 Vv i Hence, @ = 0, V 145 = 0, V > = 1910, 37 4.62 Let, us displace the piston through small distance x, towards right, then from F, = mw, Bs 1 bs tex: or, (py -P,)S = mx () But, the process is adiabatic, so from PV" = const. PoVS 4 PoVg = et and py = Oe _, fA a (VgsSx Ji senses (Vga Sx) as the new volumes of the left and the right parts are now (Vo + S x) and (Vo - S x) respectively. So, the Eqn (1) becomes. PMS (1 1 | iy {easy (Vo+Sx) } PoVAS = oe mm | (veoS?x2)) L m (Ve-S?7x7)" PoVdS ™ or, 252 Neglecting the term we in the denominator, as it is very small, we get, a 2 gn 2 POSE mVy which is the equation for S.H.M. and hence the oscillating frequency. ty = SV 2Pot mVo 4.63 In the absence of the charge, the oscillation period of the ball T=2nVig when we impart the charge q to the ball, it will be influenced by the induced charges on the conducting plane. From the electric image method the electric force on the ball by the plane 2 equals ——4___, and is directed downward. Thus in this case the effective acceleration 489 (2h) ol the ball 4.64 4.65 2 s'=gt— 4 _, eat and the corresponding time period rn2eV Ew agV 1 = reer From the conditon of the problem T= yT' ge oT 1 \ So, Tean?T® of den? eat 16 X€gmh Thus on solving q- 4hVxegmg(n2- 1) =2nc In a magnetic field of induction B the couple on the magnet is - MB sin @ = - MB 6 equating this to J we get 2, MB ~ ony or oo T or T=2n MBS Given = Tn ° vi ct ,i dt BY B, By B, We or Ben "1 The induction of the field increased 17 times. We have in the circuit at a certain instant of time (¢ ), from Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction : di ad Lo 7 BIG ot Ldi= Bide . ._ Bl As at 650,450, so Lim Blx or i= Sxl) For the rod from the second law of motion F, = mw. -i1B = mi : es PB? 2 Using Eqn. (1), we get : Fm -| |e = er (2) where oy = 1B/ Vm The solution of the above differential equation is of the form 4.67 39 x = asin(apt+ a) From the initial condition, at f= 0, x = 0, soa =0 Hence, X= asinagt @) Differentiating w.rt. time, X = a Wp Cos Wot But fom the initial condition of the problem at ¢ = 0, x = vo Thus Vo = ai OF a = Vo/ig (4) Putting the value of a from Eqn. (4) into Eqn. (3), we obtained IB Yo x = ~2 sincopt (where oy = Wo As the connector moves, an emf is set up in the circuit and a current flows, since the emf is = —BIi, we must have : -B1x+L 4! = 0 dt so, I= BIx/L provided x is measured from the initial position. We then have mx =- -B.1+mg Bix E for by Lenz’s law the induced current will oppose || lI downward sliding. Finally II Il eat ,, bie Free 8 ‘on putting Wo = AE Heals eg Asolution of this equation is x= -&+A cos (iot+a) 9 But x= 0 and x = 0 at ¢ = 0. This gives x = (1-cos wot). @ We are given x = aye7*" sinwt (@) The velocity of the point at ¢ = 0 is obtained from vo = (x),.9 = ay The term “oscillation amplitude at the moment ¢ = 0” is meaningless. Probably the im- 1 6 plication is the amplitude for ¢ <<. Then x » dg sin wf and amplitude is a. (b) & = (-Bagsinwt+ waycoswt)eF = 0 40 when the displacement is an extremum. Then ® tanot= > 8 or oem tan Benn, m= 051,20 4.68 Given @ = qe?! coswt we have @ = -Bp-aqoe*'sinwrt © =- POtBPagMe "'sinwt-w7 ge”! cos wt =P pt2Bage sinwr-w'p so (®) ()o = - Bao» (F')o = (B= 07) Go (b) @ = -qoe7*!(Pcos t+ sin wr) becomes maximum (or minimum) when @ = Go(B- we’ cosmt+2Boqoe *'sinwt = 0 or and t= + T tan-? to 4.69 We write x = age~*' cos(wr+a.). I @) x(0)=03a=+ pa =F ae sinwt 3(0) = (Z)pn0 = ¥ Wa Since ay is + ve, we must choose the upper sign if x(@) <0 and the lower sign if X(0)>0. Thus ag = ECOL and a = [+ if 3(0)<0 -F if x(0)>0 (b) we write x = Re A e7Pt##! 4 aw aye? Then dav, = Re (-B+iw)Ae ftir! From v, (0) = 0 we get Re (-B+iw)A = 0 This implies A = + i($+iw)B where B is real and positive. Also xy = ReA=F OB lo] o Thus SU with + signinA if xp <0 4.70 471 41 = signin A if xp >0 So Aw si EZ lola (F1+ 2B)! o 0 Finally a Vi4(8) Ixol tana - Bog - an () ° ° @ is in the 4 quadrant (-3<«<0} if.zg>0 and ais in the 2” quadrant (x oes] if ay <8. x = ape *'cos(mt+a) Then (4), 20 = ~Bagcosa-wapsina = 0 or tana = - & o a Also (2)r-0 = dgcosa = > seca = 7, wna =-V7-1 ‘Thus Be oVry-1 (We have taken the amplitude at f = U to be ap ). We write x = age~®! cos(wtta) = Re Ae BIO! 4 ow ayelt k= Re A(-Briw)ePttiot Velocity amplitude as a function of time is defined in the following manner. Put f= f) +7, then x = Re Ae Plott) giolgtt) m= Re Ae P84 ciMetioty Red e-Blogivt i B we can say that the displacement amplitude at time ¢ is ay e7'. Similarly for the velocity amplitude. Clearly (a) Velocity amplitude at time t = ay V 6? +a" e~** Since A(-B+io) = ae’ (-B+io) fort << =. This means that the displacement amplitude around the time fo is age~°" and 42 = aV Pro et where y is anotner constant. (bo) x(0) = 0 => ReA=0 or A= + ity where dg is real and positive. Also v¥,(0) = x9 = Re * iag(-Btiw) =F way Thus ay = Lol and we take - (+) sign if xo is negative (positive). Finally the velocity amplitude is obtained as i lol Vproe™ 4.72 The first oscillation decays faster in time. But if one takes the natural time scale, the period T for cach oscillation, the second oscillation attenuates faster during that period. 4.73. By definition of the logarithemic decrement ( A=8 22) we get for the original decrement do and finally 4 = 2228 Vase e Ag/? Now . Q°——S V do 2 M20 so > x 1+(35) a Hence -- 2x Vv 7 1-(r?-1) For critical damping ) - 1B 18 do/2 Vv mu Vaquy or n= It ) 4.74 The Eqn of the dead weight is 43 so Now =2xV a V (35) -V Sawer) = 0.10 sec. 4.75 The displacement amplitude decrease 1) times every n oscillations. Thus i 2278 inn of B= BD o o or : 2a wo an So O- sein” 4.76 From x = uy e7*' cos (wt+&), we get using (x),-0 = 1 = agcos.a 0 = (%),29 = -Bagcosa-wagsina l Vo +B 1V «+ B* oe ) \t o Then una = -£ or cosa = * cos or-tnt B and x = xa0 ace (naete an") @ 2 o Total distance travelled in the first 1a i ‘ To get the maximum displacement in tht second lap we note that x= [-eoe(or—tm-1B) sin (ort) VE aos @ =0 when wre x, 2n,3m,.. ec. 44 4.77 Thus Xmax = — age" ™® cos, = - 1e7*8 for ¢ = x/o so, distance traversed in the 2" lap = 2/e7**/” Continuing total distance traversed = 1+21e7*)/ 4.2 Je72*0/@ 4 21e*ho 20 Sees ae ef et | lee? Boy eM? 4 =l e where 4 = anf is the logarithemic decrement. Substitution gives 2 metres. For an undamped oscillator the mechanical energy E = imi+hm 03x? Is conserved, For a damped oscillator. x= ae*'cos(wt+a), w = Vor-B* 12,1 op and E(t) zyme ty mage = 5m age™?¥* (6? cos? (wt + a) +28 w eos (wt+a)x sin(wt+a)+0°sin® (or + 0)] +m adage?! cos (wr+a) jm dagen?! +5 map pte”? cos (2w1+2a) +5 maBoe?'sin(201+2a) 2 If B <<«, then the average of the last two terms over many oscillations about the time ¢ will vanish and « Lmaaber?* and this is the relevant mechanical energy. In time + this decreases by a factor i so etal oe n p-Bn and 2B 2k te since «8 = &. BV poy age, Up) ot 7 ta Leek 7 g= ta V Set 130. 1 xX 2 Un 45 4.78 The restoring couple is T =-mgRsing « -mgRq The moment of inertia is K 12 mR 2 Thus for undamped oscillations 2 ptmgRg=0 i) 2_2¢ A so, = OO" SR | Ting ‘Also n= 228, 228 _ 7 Hence —b_ 4+ Toe (4) Hence finally the period. T of small oscillation comes to 2 7 = 28 2e, Oo __ 9 gV 3R(, (A @ 00 Va p 2g Qn Vy ik 2) 7g (amen ) = 0.90 sec. 4.79 Let us calculate the moment G; of all the resistive forces on the disc. When the disc rotates an element (7 dd ) with coordinates (r , 6) has a velocity r @, where @ is the instantaneous angle of rotation from the equilibrium position and r is measured from the centre. Then 2x kK Gy =fd0f drr-(Fyxr) of R ‘ = fnrerdyx2x = ask 5 0 Also moment of inertia = mee - mR?.. ann’; 5 Thus at pray sd on oo2mak’ 2 Sie = 0 > 2a ay? Hence = aa and B Pn 480 421 and angular frequency Note :- normally by frequency we mean an : From the law of viscosity, force per unit area = 7 # so when the disc executes torsional oscillations the resistive couple on it is R = fn tw Borde 2 1a, 0 (factor 2 for the two sides of the disc; see the figure-in the book) where 9 is torsion. The equation of motion is 4 19 24k seq -0 Comparing with G+ 2BH+ asm = 0 we get B= nnR*/2hI Now the logarithmic decrement ) is given by X = BT, T = time period Thus N= 2AAI/nR‘T If p = angle of deviation of the frame from its normal position, then an e.m-f. e=Bagp a. is induced in the frame in the displaced position and a current R - oe flows in it. A couple Bag Bat. R Beaa= Rr? then acts on the frame in addition to any elastic restoring couple cp. We write the equation of the frame as 2 4 19 Fore =0 Th Bat A . us B = S 7g where B is defined in the book. Amplitude of oscillation die out according to e~*! so time required for the oscillations to 1 decrease to — of its value is j i as 47 482 We shall denote the stiffness constant by x. Suppose the spring is stretched by xp . The bar in then subject to two horizontal forces (1) restoring force - x x and (2) friction kmg opposing motion. If ry> ERE = the bar will come back. r>, (lf xs A, the bar will stay put.) The equation of the bar when it is t moving to the left is mx = -Kxt+kmg x= A+(x-A) cosy = where we have used x = X,X = 0 at ¢ = 0. This solution is only valid till the bar comes to rest. This happens at to the right .(if A kmg ie, > 3.4 In this case the solution is x= -A+(%-3A) cos Since re2A-mandi-Oarenaa/Ve. The rod will next come to rest at te gean/ YE and at that instant x = x5 = x9-4 A. However the rod will stay put unless xp >5 A. ‘Thus (@) time period of one full oscillation = 2/7 z. (b) There is no oscillation if 00 subject to x(0) = (0) = 0 where F is constant. The solution of this equation will be sought in the form xe F A.cos(opt+a), Ostet xX = Boos (wo (t-1)+B), f>t A and @ will be determined from the boundary condition at ¢ = 0. 0 - =v Acosa k 0 = -apAsina Thus a= Oand A ~ -% and x= E(1- cos eye) Os ect. B and B will be determined by the continuity of x and Fat = t. Thus G1 ~c0s at) = Boos B and bo F sino = - bo Bsin B a9 2 FY Thus le 2 eae) F | ci, 20% or | B= 27 | sin | xt) ey I 1 1 /\ t 485 Fo. she spring mg = «x Al where kK is its stifness coefficient. Thus 222 o eS 0 in ~ BT The equation of motion of the ball is - - 2. Fo #4 2Pe+ujx = Pooswe Here 4 2B BL ve Voi-p? Vit (A207 To find the solution of the above equation we lovk for the solution of the auxiliary equation ior . : F F+2Ps+opze > Clearly we can take Rez = x . Now we look for a particular integral for 2 of the form z=Aei*! Thus, substitution gives A and we get (Fo/m yer?! Oo +2ipo so taking the real part (Fo/m)[ (05 - 0?) cos. w #42 Besin or] a2 (ajo y+4pu Fo cos(wt -@) Soo 280 = wo -a* V (03-07)? +4 po? ° The amplitude of this oscillation is maximum when the denominator is minimum. Tihis happens when 50 4.86 4.87 w*-205 0 +4 Bw +09 = (w?-09+287)+4B203-46* is minimum. ie for o? = of -2 6? ‘Thus and Since a = —= —— V (w"- 05 + 2B")? +4 B°( 05 - B*) we must have ~ 2-03 +2B? = - (03-03 +27) 2 ao? @) + W: or 3-28" = “5 2 = wi, . Fy (wg- 0") coswt+2Bosinat m V (0? 08)? + 4p 0? Then ,_ Foo 2Bwcoswt+(@*- 2) sinwt (03 - wo)? + 4B? wo” Thus the velocity amplitude is Foo mV (0p - 0? +4 Pw? Fo = re ®o 12 Ona] a4 nV (So) 248 This is maximum when wo = of = 0, Y= and then Voge 2 . @ 2 Now at half maximum ro] = 128 or wt 2V3 Bw-p = 0 =F BVS +Vag 3B where we have rejected a solution with ~ ve sign before there dical. Writing @, = Voa+3 Bp +BV3 , w = Vor+3 6° -BV3 we get (4) W,<, = @p = Vw, 2 ( Velocity resonance frequency) Jo; =o | ®) Ba and damped oscillation frequency (@, - a) BF = V oye, eed 488 In general for displacement amplitude tm pee 0 0} us nee .- — 2 fine VAR (op-B) 2BV wp -B ae 8 Man bu a a oO Vis(n2ny 2% Vor-p? 2 Hence ne A " oS a Fy a(- cos wtsin wt cos @ + cos? wt sin p) dt 1 RIPeSs Fowud sing = naFosing 52 4.90 4.91 In the formula x = acos(wt-@) (Se we have a= MV (wp- 0 P+ 4B wo 28 tang = 0 - (og - @”) tan p Thus be oT Hence = VK7m = 20s. and (a) the quality factor a) for 2 27 Q= (0) - @? ? tan? @ (b) work done is A = a Fysinp = ama V (0; yea = ama’ (m-m*)tang = 6mi. sing = xma*x2po 2po 3 a - © Here as usual tan @ 'y where @p is the phase lag of the displacement Fo 1 ™ V(ap- 0)? +4 Bo (@) Mean power developed by the force over one oscillation period x = acos(wt-@), a= xFoasing zy Lp = FFoaasing ~ on 2 Hw] +4 7 6 (b) Mean power < P > is maximum when co = io (for the denominator i§ then minimum Also 53 At displacement resonance w = V «3-2 B* while Thus + . Ny, cos ot 493 The equation of the disc is @ +2PQ+uzQ = =a Then as betore © = On cos (wt-a) where ® Nn una = 2h2 im = 53 at 3? =z os T[(a- 0) +4 Ba] @- w (2) Work performed by frictional forces r = -[N.deq where N, = -218@ = ~f 2B 1q7 de = -20Ral ay, ° = - 11 93[(@3- 07) +48? wo] sina = -1Nq, Pq Sino The quality factor q 'y ae x _Vop-8 wo Vop-6* 1 | 4a? wp 4p? | ® 9-5" BT" ZB * (omso?)ana Zana |(we—a?) (ogo? 54 4.2 ELECTRIC OSCILLATIONS 4.94 4.95 If the electron (charge of each electron = -¢ ) are shifted by a smau distance x, a net + ve charge density (per unit area) is induced on the surface. This will result in an electric field E = nex/tg in the direction of x and a restoring force on an ciectron of nex & ” Thus or This gives o, as the plasma frequency for the problem. Since there are no sources of emf in the circuit, Ohm’s 1 law reads c The solution fo this equation is ] = Im 60s (wot +a) From the problem Vq = 2 . Then T= ~ aC V, sin (gt +a) 2 or 2 By energy conservation $L P+ Ae = constant ‘When the PD. across the capacitor takes its maximum valuc V,, the current J must be zero. Thus “constant” = te v V? = V2 once again. Hence i + 55 496 After the switch was closed, the circuit satisfies aig ge or £4 ahq=0= 9 = C¥acosant where we have used the fact that when the switch is closed we must have -4. aie - Vm bn Vy t= Gm Oat = 0. Thus (a) 1 = GEC Vy cin wt =- VV § sin Wot () The electrical energy of the capacitor is £ 1.008” yt and of the inductor is iL P asin’ wor. The two are equal when x togt = 5 At that instant the emf of the self-inductance is di ~ LE = Vn c08 toot = Val V2 497 In the oscillating circuit, iet 7 = ImCOS wt be the change on the condenser where a= jem C is the instantaneous capacity of the-condenser (S = area of plates) 20S y y = distance between the plates. Since the oscillation frequency increases 7 fold, the quantity 2 2 oF SL changes 1 foid and so does y ie, changes irom yo initially to 1 yp dinally. Now the FD. across the condenser is Gm Yn Vx Geos wr = TE coswr and hence the electric field between the plates is Thus, the charge on the plate being q,, cos w f, the force on the plate is Fe cog? Fo sour Since this force is always positive and the plate is pulled slowly we can use the average force oY nw 2e5 7 20 = W the initial stored energy. Thus. A= (1-1). 4.98 The equations of the L -C circuit are Te CV-fhde OV-fha athe "SG, Differentiating again L(hth) =- A Be eA 2 Then hee so L(C,+Cz)I4T = 0 or = Ipsin(apt+a) Oy 5 =] ‘Sw tT CG Tl Cy where oy = y (Pata) 1 L(G+G 2x lence T ~ —— = 0.7 ms) @ 7 ) At teO0,FeO0sa=0 I= Ipsinaot The peak value of the current is Jy and it is related to the voltage V by the first equation Li=V-~fldtKC,+C2) fie or +1 @plo008 Oot = V- eG, Sf losin wor at (The PD. across the inductance is V at t = 0) Hence 87 499 Initially q, = C Vp and qp = 0. After the switch is closed change flows and we get N+ = CV a Cc @ Also I rivteo Hence 7 +u3/ = 0 a=, th +4, The soloution of this equation subject to “4, ~G T=Oatt=0 is I= Ipsinagt. to Integrating qi =A- os COS WF % Finally substituting in (1) 2 Asf. at FG 008 Wot +L Ip Wp COS wot = CV Thus A-B--— and 2 oe 2 ta"? CY, so n- 7 (1 +608 194) CV 92 = (1 - cos wot) 4.100 The flux in the coil is @(1)=f(@ 1 <0 0 1>0 : Sita . . dI_o The equation of the current is Lae Q@) This mean that or with @2 = ie 2 tettareo dt I = Ipsin(wpt+ @) 58 4.101 4.102 Putting in (1) -L I wp cos (wo t+a) = - I — ~~ [cos (wpt +a) cosa] oe This implies cosa = 0 +. J = # Ipcosingt . From Faraday’s law do dl een a or integrating from f= -e to-e where e + 0 ® = Lp with + sign in $0, T= 2 cost , ToS Mot - Given V = V_ e7*! coswt (a) The phrase ‘peak values’ is not clear. The answer is obtained on taking |cos wt| = 1 . mn ie te dV (&) For extrema = 0 - Pooswi- wsinwt = 0 or tant = - B/o ie. or=nn+ tan”! The equation of the circuit is 122,242.24 dt e ade. where Q = charge on the capacitor, This has the solution Q =, e*' sin(wt+ a) x Vo_p,o--k where B= 57,0-V0o-B, 0 =75- Now r= 9220 arH0 dt so, One®! (- Bsin(wr+ a)+mcos(wr+a)) = 0 att=0 ‘Thus @cosa = Bsina or anunt = fee _ _ Qm Now Vo = BD. aur = 0 = “sina ©. Vin preg -Vi1- RE @ 4L? 59 4103 We write -2 =[=1,e7*' sinwt -Br+ ior = gm lye (gm means imaginary part) en Bitter -B+io Q- Emly -Bie ior Q= emi, os aL (B+ iw) e7 Bt iat B+ ow eft Bsinwt+ wm cosmt p+ w ~ pr sin(wit d) aly , tnd = 2, Y p? + wt B ( An arbitrary constant of integration has been put equal to zero.) Thus = Ine BF sin (wet 8) V(0) = Iq V& sind = 1, VE — 4 __ C(1+ B/a*) gn ; =I, 4104 7 = J, 7 * sinwt I--qq- eet Then qm ty en LOH 8) ng 2 2, V w+ B° 8 Thus Wy = du Few 7 sin? we 2 9280 gig? LE Wp = 3 oe poe 7 F sin? (wee B) ot 60 4.105 4.106 4.107 4.108 Current is maximum when oem sinwt = 0 Thus - Bsinwl+ cosas = 0 or tn of = 2 = tand B ic. weesantd Ww, a2 a2 and hence gee poetics 22e c= et =ce We sin*(wt+ 5) sin°28 — 4cos*d 1 op 1 -1,-3-1.4-4- 4670p 4p? LCR? CR (Wy is the magnetic energy of the inductance coil and We is the electric enemy of 1 capacitor) Clearly L=L,+1,,R=R,+ Ry x x Ongr « Broz Now Bre=iny sore #2or - 2101 _ os me RY soa= =e Current decreases ¢ fold in time rng sec = 2% oscillations 22k R 2x L aru oy 4L = "aR \ LC” 4p? "2x 7g 7 1 = 15.9 oscillations x _@ O- br" 268 © o= 289, B=39° a op = oVie+ sy of oe wo ** Gg? 100% =» 45x 100% = 0.5% 8Q |" s 4.109 £ Att = 0 current through the coil = Rer PD. across the condenser = =~ Rer (a) Att = 0, energy stored = Wo : 2 io = hal gt) +bc( eh) -be EAR). 20m (Rar) 72 Re ry (m+ ry 1K <1 The current and the change stored decrease as e~'””?" so energy decreases as & ig re! 6 WeWoe™ = 0.10 mI. 4110 Now W= Wye 7F! Thus energy decreases tines in SA sec. Visio? 1+ 49? ginn 2a 2 Va . = 1.033 ms. =Inn 4.111 In a leaky condenser 44 ly 7 av 7 J-I' where I R Jeak current Now Vv p+ f2,1,. r T*RO a: *ic4"° Then qd - Ime *'sin(we+ a) 62 4.112 Given V = V,e"*! sinwt, @ = w BT <<1 Energy loss per cycle Power loss = T «tevin 26 (energy decreases as Woe~ *** so loss per cycle is Wox 2BT) Thus P>=icvixt or RS i4/t a/c Ve . Hence g-ive = VE zepp 7 100 on putting the vales. 4.113. Energy is lost across the resistance and the mean power lass is

= Rel?> = ER IZ = 02 mW. This power should be fed to the circuit to maintain undamped oscillations. RCV,2 4114

= as in (4.112). We get

= 5 mW. 2L 4.115 Given g = q+ % I hte h--dh=-h =Rh=t Lh=Rh=%. 2 R c Thus CL g'} + (qi+ qo) = 0 3 u | ROR nt H=e L Putting gq) = Ae!®! gq, = Betio! (1-@°LC)A+B=0 A+(1+ iwRC)B = 0 A solution exists only if (1- &LC)(14 ioRC) = 1 eed Qe ns Sr nnd o ox iwRC- wi C-iwLRC? = 6 or LRCw-iwLC-RC =0 Thus 4 = (A, cos wot +47 sin wot) e~*! etc. tap is the oscillation frequency. Oscillations are possible only if w} > 0 . 1 .¢ ie. TL 4416 We have . Ly I+ Ryl, = Ly n+ Roh fia c Raylt Il=h+h Then differentiating we have the equations L,C1,+R,Ch, + (h+h) =0 1,C 1p4 RyChy + (+h) =0 Look for a solution Ty =A; e*', Ib = Ay e** Then (14+ © L,C+aR,C)A,+ A, =0 Ay + (14 0° L,C+aR,C) A, =0 This set of simultaneous equations has a nontrivial solution only if (1+ a7L,C+ aR, C)(1+ @7L,C+ aC) =1 ate o? Rot LoRs, Lit Lot RRC, Rit Ro LyLz LyL,C Ty This cubic equation has one zeal root which we ignore and two complex conjugate roots. We require the condition that this pair of complex conjugate roots is identical with the roots of the equation or a?LC+aRC+1=0 64 4.117 The general solution of this problem is not easy.We look for special cascs. If Ry = Ry = 0, tha Llp R=0 and tT ely . If Ly=L)=0, then L=0 and R =R,R,/(R,+R,) These are the quoted solution but they are misleading. We shall give the solution for small R, ,R; . Then we put a = -B +iw when B is small We get (1-071, C-2iB@1,C-BAC+i@R,C) (1-?L,C- 2iBpoL,c- Boc+ i@R,C)=1 (we neglect B’ & BR,, BR, ). Then L,+ L. 2 2 2 4it lr (1- @L,C)(1-07L,C) = 1 > 0 = whe Lil, L,+L,° also (2BL,- Ry) (1- wL,C)+ (2BL2- 22) (1- wL,C) = 0 ‘seh R __RiLl?+ RL? RiL}+ RoLi Thi -=- - : is sives B= 7” TTTa(at la) ~*~ (Ee LF 4,,41 =+% on Ctl a+ Rit=+F CooL X “ts VL For the critical case R ~ 2V & - . Sw Thus LC q+ 2VIC q+q=0 Look for a solution with q a e%! . 5 a1 This is identical with Ie if L 1 as Vic An independent solution is te°* . Thus qe (As Bry eo /VE , At t=0q=CVo thus A =CV Also at t=0g=J=0 o-B-A ea - VE vIC L 4118 ‘Thus finally ew T . viele wVE tle “INTE M0, le ‘The current has been defined to increase the charge. Hence the minus sign. ‘The current is maximum when a __Yo wit t der |e Ie) This gives t = VLC and the magnitude of the maximum current is Vo Mast = BYE. ‘The equation of the circuit is (I is the current) L a + RI = Va cost From the theory of differential equations I= Iptle where Jp is a particular integral and J; is the complementary function (Solution of the differential equation with the RHS = 6 ). Now Tc = Ico and for Ip we write Ip = I, cos (wt-@) Substituting we get Vn -10i Sees Von - 1R/L Thus n> Fp areg cos (at 9) + leo’ Now in an inductive circuit] = 0 att= 0 because a current cannot change suddenly. ‘Thus Ico = - and so RL ] Vie Se [0s (oe - @)- cos pe 66 4.119 Here the equation is (Q is charge, on the capacitor) 2,r42. ct R ‘dt Vy cos wt A solution subject to Q = 0 at t = 0 is of the form (as in the previous problem) Q = Qn 005 (wt- F)- cose" *°] Substituting back 20 cos (1 F)- ORQ, sin(@t- F) = Vi, cos wt = V,,(cosGcos(mt- G) - sinG@sin(wt- G)} so Qn = CV,,cos @ oRQ,, = V,,sin® This leads to On = tan F = WRE Vi+(@RC) Hence za a «si ow) a 28°F -wre dt = [ sin(or- G)+ sin e VR? R's fe ) The solution given in the book satisfies J = 0 at ¢ = 0. Then Q = 0 at f= 0 but this will not satisfy the equation at ¢ = 0. Thus J « 0, ( Equation will be satistied with J = 0 only if Q« 0 at t = 0) With our J, Hem 0) = 4.120 The current lags behind the voltage by the phase angle 2 ina? _y Mon? Ina?- 2a 1 Then prt —Stxanl xa tann} Hom AY 4pn 4121 4122 67 HereV = V,,cos ot I =1,,cos(mt+ p) where Now -1_1 p= tan ' fia 0 Here Ve IR+ c or Ris Era ¥ =~ vsino Ignoring transients, a solution has the form I= Ipsin(@t- a) I OR Ip cos(@t- a) + 7 sin(@t- a) = = WV sinwt = - @V[sin(ot- a)cosa+ cos(wt- a)sina} 50 Rhy = - Vosina Io “1 oo77 Vocosa a= x+ tan (WRC) I = Ipsin(wt- tan”! @RC-m) = - Iysin(wr- tan”? wRC) ‘ = I, 1 Then Q = JI dt = O+ cos (wt-tan”* ORC) ° It satisfies Vo(1+ coswr) = RIL» @ aS sesdee 68 if Vo(1+ coswt) = - Riysin(wt- tn-*oRC) cw (wt tan *wRC) oc Thus Qo = CV and at H/Vi+ (ory check: Rly = oo ecks Vis(@RCP Hence vi = Savor cos (wr) Vit (wRCy Ve Vo © >- i Vi1+ (@RC)Y or n- 1 = 0 (RCP or RC #Vi- 1/0 = 22 ms. 4123 Va__ Ma Voltage M () as 4124 (a) I, = (b) tng = 2", 9 w - 60° Current lags behind the voltage V by @ © Ve- oa 0-65 kV Vir = IgV R24 oP L? = O-SKV y, (8 0) Ve 56 VR? -+ R + (oe ea) —____h. —___ Vin V(oRCY + (wLC-17 V a , (5-1 + 48? w7/e0§ \@o a Vig 12) ag? ag! 4 - + 2 7 oe op 9 © This is maximum when @” = w3- 2p = 1 - a 70 4126. y 1, VR? + ol? Vm V R24 w*L? 7 Ve 1 Rs (ee oc) for a given @,1,R, this is maximum when 1 ao Ok © C= a = 282 UF. vVR?2s wL2 For that C, Vy ae VV1+ (@L/RY = 0540 kV LL At this C = 509 kV 4.127 oco°o 020::0:0 @ Poor Condo ]|— ©0006 0000 I We use the complex voltage V = V,, e'”'. Then the voltage across the capacitor is ryt U- PYG and that across the resistance RI’ and both equal V. Thus Ve gio beg ioe age ' I-I' =iwCV,y e€ Hence A ° ier T= (1+ ioRC) e The actual voltage is obtained by taking the real part. Then Vn I= V1+ (@RC} cos(wrt @) Where tang = @RC Note —> A condenser with poorly conducting material (dielectric of high resistance) be the plates is equvalent to an an ideal condenser with a high resistance joined in p between its plates. 4.128 144 4129 41900 n wits dh t Z at Sn la2 a F Ze dl, dl, Poca ten Pa S : at " a ¢ 2 Be | from the second equation Inh = -Lyh Ihe Then Ly- Z| te Thus the current oscillates with frequency 1 sd 7 o(u.- ) Given V = V_ cos wt I= [,,cos(wt-) where “Yeu R *+(ot-Zo] Sid I,sin(wt-@) € Then, Ve= oc V, = tin (at- 9) V(1- wLCPs (@RCY arse As resonance the voltage amplitude across the capacitor Vo vil. y toe tare RC vic So Lon CR? Now -V4-1- Viet CR 4 For maximum current amplitude Now g g -i 2 a aei_il low n-1y¥ 4 and Now ay @C} Then (assuming «2 >, ) or oo or + @) = (@1+ @2) = @ = Vo, a, 1 & R d - oe V1 = an 02 - , = Va L o> and o-V 1 LV GP- Doe 1 = Sleyp 4 ap 4 (a - 017 73 4132 Q = Sw So ing. O = 35 ~ Fp for low damping Rip In ——————— ow 5 , } 2 R + (24- ge » Ip= Current amplitude at resouance 2 9. R or o- Trea 226 Thus @ w a +B % So Aw = 26 and Q= 70. 4133 At resonance @ = ap Then I, (map) = T= I) V2 sinwt Then D.C. component of the rectified current is 17? <> 95 J V2 sinwtdt = ~WV2 5, J snoae V2 “R Since the charge deposited must be the same Into = sav? or r= 22 x v2 The answer is incorrect. 74 4135 (a) I(t) = hy Ost = Ih. Now mean square current <7 > _ 21s ale =a at =F 2M so effective current = ; (b) In this case J = J, |sin wt] Tr and T,|sinwet | dt 2s x 1 i Ay 2h = staf Isinojao 4 f sinoao “4 0 0 nly So n= 2,2 ces Then, mean square current = = Tr J sin? w t dt 0 Qe wig - ee a Ig so effective current = Ve 4136 P, -# VR 4 aL? VRP 4 wl? 1(92) 1 R 4.137 4138 75 Thus bw Vq=i R or =F Vq=1 R ZVn=1 = 2 KH of on putting the values. Z = VR?4x? ot Ry = V2 x? The tan@ = So cos @ = 2 p= cos! V +) =37. The current lags by @ behind the voltage. y2 also P= VI cosp = — ZB? - X? = 160 kW. z v?(R+r) Pree wL (RiryPa oh This is maximum when R+ r = wL for Pe P- vy? v2 (oly L R+ r+ OLY VR+r-— Rer "- Tha ve Thus R = @L- r for maximum power and Pras = 517 - Substituting the values, we get R = 200 and Pyar = .114 kW. v?R "aly Ly Res (X,- Xe Varying the capacitor does not change R so if P increases n times Z = VR?+ (X,- Xc)’ must decreases Vn times Thus cos = g increases Vin times % increase in cos p = (vn- 1)x 100 % = 30.4%. P 4.141 At resonance X, = X_ => Wo vic” Power generated will decrease n times when 2 or re =. 2Va-i Ra eVnnt 28. Thus o F 2Vn- 1 po- 0 =0 (oF Van- TB) = wr (n- 1)? or ay 7 V1 + (n= 1) B08 # VAT Bie ea a o (aking only the positive sign in the first term to ensure positive value for —- .) 0 2 Now cae NER) =~V1+49? Thus -Vi = #Vn-1 /V1i+ 49? 407) For large Q oreo] Lena 4k Yet i00% = 05% ®o oa 20 We have y= VR y= VV Ri+ xX? V(R+ Ri + Xe V(R+ Ri) + XP : VaR\ so (R+ Ri + XZ = (5). R?+X2 = ye Hence R74 2RR, = e (V?- V2) R 2 2 2 R,~. (v2-v2- y, or 1 2vz2 | 2- Vr) 77 V?R ve Vi R? Heat generated in the coil = ————3—_, = x R, = x v?- v2- v2 (Rit Ry + Xp” RR? RR?” 22 ( v- Va) vie vee v2 - — TR =30W v ; 4142 Here Ip - 5» Vi-_ effective voltage r Rg I 4, -—h— VR? + x? R 2 Vv oa 1 CRRA Ve LR RVR? + XP Reg lp q; Regis the impedance of the coil & the resistance in ae ' ie ee tas Ris 2RRy 2RR, Now = * 2 2 BE “Rie Xe +X? Pp aRR, Ee” R74 xP Now mean power consumed in the coil Vv? R, P-H-B 1 = RR = - BR, -ir(P-i-)-25w. PR = og 8 oF ZRU?-B- 2) 43.121, 1 11, yc. LH i@Re ZR 1 R R i@C |2 |= 4.144 (a) For the resistance, the voltage and the current are in phase. For the coil the voltage is abead of the current by less than 90°, The current is obtained by addition because the clements are in wae axis of Voltage To qr 78 (>) Ie is ahead of the voltage by 90°. (©) The coil has no resistance so I, is 90° behind the voltage. Ir g ! NL I —— I, © 4.145 When the coil and the condenser are in parallel, the equation is al, ha oN I Teh+h LR oF] Using complex voltages V=Vin currént Vy eit ; . 1" ReToL 27 iwCVme and . 1 . ior _ [R-iwL+ iwC(R*+ wL?) jet '=(artart ioe) Mae -| Res wh? Vn € y, Thus, taking real parts 1- Troy cos (@t- p) where 1 | [R24 (00(R?+ wl?) wh )?] 2 (@yT (R74 @° Ly? ‘pes w@L? and tang = 222 eC(R +o?) (a) To get the frequency of resonance we must define what we mean by resouance. One definition requires the extremum (inaximum or minimum) of current amplitude. The other definition requires rapid change of phase with ~ passing through zero at resonance. For the scries circuit. and tang = 4.146 79. the present cave ihe iwo definitions do boi definitions give w? = [gt souanee, not agree (except when R = 0 ). The definition that has been adopted in the answer given in the book is the vanishing of phase. This requires C(R?+ WL?) = L 2 2 5 = OR,, Opes = 31.6 x 10? rad/s. or oe Le Note that for small R, @ rapidly changes from = — 3 to +5 aS @ passes through res OM < Wye, 10 > Wey. x Ey : m. « CR L (B) Ai resonance In Tg = Ym so J = effective value of total current = V sa = 3.1 mA. mi v_ywWe similarly Ln pe NE ~ 08a / 202 Ig=oCV=V c_Rxe = 0.98 A. L Note :- The vanishing of phase (its passing through zero) is considered a more basic definition of resonance. We use the method of complex voltage ZR Va Vem ° ior To Then [pe 2 | acy, c lc T 0 Vv LR Tat Yoel . 222) « Tm Tot hp = Vo Stone OC A tet deiwe Then taking the real part Vo VR? +(@C(R?+07L?)- ol? R 407k? wLl-wC(R?2+07L?) R I- cos(wt-@p) where tang 80 4.147 From the previous problem Zz -—> —— VR74 {oc(R?+ w7L7)- ot} 2,2 Rs V (R74 2h?) (1- 207LC)+ 2C?(R24 W717)? VR*+ 071? VR?+ 0 Va- 2m?LC)+ m?C?(R74 w?L7) Va- «7 LC)?+4 (RC)? 4.148 (a) We have coe a = odysinot =Li+ RI Put I =1,,sin(wt-@). Then @ dpsin at = @%o{sin(wt—- @) cos + cos(wt-@) sing} = LI,,«cos (it~ )+ RI,sin(wt- p) so RI, = o@ycos@ and LI, = Oosing, Pq or and tang =“ (b) Mean mechanical power required to maintain rotation = energy loss per unit time r 262 1 2 1p2_1_ 9 PR =i -igp ltr. rfRie 2 aR 07k? 4.149 We consider the force Fiz that a circuit 1 exerts on another closed circuit 2 :- FP nated, Here By = magnetic field at the site of the current element d J due to the current / flowing int. wo [i hdiix A “an 3 M2 > where 73) = 73- 7; = vector, from current element df; to the current element d /z Now esp dh x(dix tp) to diy (dly- m™m)- (dhe db) Pe a fan a "4x Sf Lh ; = ra In the first term, we carry out the integration over d/, first. Then Thus van- lt fun diy dip 2 Th The integral involved will depend on the vector a’that defines the separation of the (suitably chosen centre of the coils. Let C, and C, be the centres of the two coil suitably defined. Write eH Bee o> os = where p; ( pz) is the distance of dl, (di) from C, (C2) and @’stands for the vector C; C2 . ™ = = Then ml iyt > oS didi, and Fy = V,|hh sof cues The bracket defines the mutual inductance Ly). Thus noting the definition of x dLy = SE cy h> where < > denotes time average. Now I, = [pcos wt = Real part of Ip e ah al, The current in the coil 2 satisfies Rip + 2" = - Ly Ze violy | ios or I, = —— ye!" ( in the complex case ) 2" Rtiol, ° taking the real part oly L b= - FB, (@Lzcoswt-R sinot ) = - = yeos (weg) Ros why VR +0 iy Where tang = & . Taking time average, we get 2 1 i PLolylh dlp 1 7 2 Sy Eyre ax VR? + w'l2 2 2(R +0°L}) ax The repulsive nature of the force is also consistent with Lenz’s law, assuming, of comse, that Lyp decreases with x. 4.3 ELASTIC WAVES. ACOUSTICS 4.150 Since the temperature varies linearly we can write the temperature as a function of x, which 4.151 is, the distance from the point A towards 5. or, t= Hence the sought time t = a(nevE) Equation of plane wave is given by &(1,t) = acos(wt-K°7"), where Baoan called the wave vector and 7 is the unit vector normal to the wave surface in the direction of the propagation of wave. ay RON P(oy.z) af LZ > Q x 4.152 4.153 4.154 83 of, E(x,y,2) = acos(mt-hx-ky-kz) = acos (t= kx cos a - ky cos B- kz cosy) Thus E(21.¥1.21.0) = acos(wt-kx, cos a- ky, cos B- kz, cosy) and (x2, ¥2,%,t) = acos(wt-kx,cos a-ky2c0s B - kz cosy) Hence the sought wave phase difference G-O1 = Kk [ (x, x2) cos ao + (1-2) cos B + (2-2) Cosy or Ap = |e2- oi] = & | [ (11-2) 008 a + (91 Ya) C08 B + (2-20) 008] | =F | [22 #2) 008.4 + (1 ~y2) 005 B + (4-22) 2087] | The phase of the oscillation can be written as O=wt-kr When the wave moves along the x © = wt—k,x (On putting ky = k, = 0). Since the velocity associated with this wave is v, We have kw? Vy Similarly k= = and k, = 2 The wave equation propagating in the direction of +ve x axis in medium K is give as & = acas(mt-kx) So, § = acosk(ve-x), where k= © and, v is the wave velocity In the refrence frame K’ , the wave velocity will be (v - V) propagating in the direction of 4ve x axis and x will be x’. Thus the sought wave equation. & = acosk{(v-V)jr-x'j ie ca ade This follows on actually putting B= f(t+ax) . FE_17E th tic = in the wave equation eat (We have written the one dimensionai form of the wave equation.) Then ES" (eax) = off" (t+ax) 84 4.155 4.156 so the wave equation is satisfied if ‘That is the physical meaning of the constant « . The given wave equation & = 60 cos(1800r- 53x) is of the type & = acos(wt- kx), where a = 60x10~-°m @ = 1800 per sec and k = 5-3 per metre 2x 2m As ke x? 9 re k and also k=, so v= 2 = 340 m/s v k ga k os @) Sought ratio = 5 = $= = 51x10 () Since & = acos(wt-kx) a8 = -aasin(wt-kx) So velocity oscillation amplitude (3) or vy = a@ = 0-1 m/s (0) and the sought ratio of velocity oscillation amplitude to the wave propagation velocity Ven _ OL -4 *7"h0" 32x10 (c) Relative deformation = 3 = ak sin(wt-kx) ox So, relative deformation amplitude - (3) = ak = (60x107°x5:3)m = 32x 10-4 m Q From Eans (1) and (2) viar (8) (a) The given equation is, § = acos(wt—kx) 4.157 4.158 85 So at t=o, & = acoskx Now, 35 | -aasin(wt-kx) and 28. gwsinkx, at r= 0. dt ae, i - Also, az t+aksin(wt-kx) and at r=0, 28 aksinkx. dx Hence all the graphs are similar having different amplitudes, as shown in the answer- sheet of the problem book. (b) At the points, where & ~ 0, the velocity direction is positive, ie., along + ve x - axis in the case of iongirudinai and + ve y-axis in the case of wansverse waves, where 25 is positive and vice versa. For sought plots see the answer-sheet of the problem book. In the given wave equation the particle’s displacement amplitude = a e~’* Let two points x, and x, , between which the displacement amplitude differ by n = 1% So, ae™ — ge = nae ™ = eA (tan) eo or In (1-9))- yx = - 7) on nom Baa) So path difference = — nr ae and phase differenci = 2n path difference Qnin(1-n) Inn — St, A 2 3 ad n Y hy Let S be the source whose position vector relative to the reference point O is 7 Since intensities are inversely proportional to the square of distances, Intensity at P(I,) & Intensity at OC)” # where d, = PS and d, = YS. But intensity is proportional to the square of amplitude. 2 a So. = & or a1; = aydy = k (say) _ dq Thus a, =F and d= P 8 a =a aq 2 Let 7 be the unit vector along PQ directed from P to Q. > aehen > adnetn af <7 Then PS wna on Fy r T% => n Oka and 52 -an- on “vb ° From the triangle law of vector addition. ecb ice oe a OP +PS =OS or Ht+ona? 1 or ayFtkn = ar 0) Similarly mea aif ot ait-kn=a,F" Q 2 Adding (1) and (2), 4, 7+ a7 = (a,~a))7” o> N+ Bry Hence r= a+ a, 4.159 (a) We know that the equation of a spherical wave in a homogeneous absorbing medium of wave damping coefficient y is : = aye Thus particle’s displacement amplitude equals -y <—— cos (ot kr) aye" 7 According to the conditions of the problem, aye" ar ro, ay = @ " toyr a a and when r=-r, SS Q nr (b) 4.160 (a) or, 37 Thus from Eqns (1) and (2) etlr= = 2 or, y(r-n) = In(yr)=Inr Inn +In 79-1 - a y= Matinro=Inr _ n3+In5 ~1010 | gg yy-1 7% 5 AsE=* woos (wt - kr) Wentt So, ag wsin(@t-kr) at a8) aoe” ae % aye!” = 3 - so, (25) . 0% _ 402% | sox10"* x 2x 2 x 1-45 x10? = 15 m/s ary, om n 3 Equation of the resultant wave, Ee E4m= 2acost{ *5#) sf wr Eee] E(xty)} 5) 2 J «ene for- ; t Now, the equation of wave pattem is, x+y =k, (a Const.) For sought plots see the answer-sheet of the problem book. » where a’ “aecat'( \ For antinodes, ic. maximum intensity k x cos 42-2) = 21 cosnx or, a (x-y) = 2B end or, yextnh,n=0,1,2 Hence, the particles of the medium at the points, lying on the solid straight lines (y = x4 2), oscillate with maximum amplitude. For nodes, i.e. minimum intensity, vin or, yuxs (2n+1)2, and hence the particles at the points, lying on dotted lines do not oscillate. (b) When the waves are longitudinal, For sought plots see the answer-sheet of the problem book. k(y-x) = cos Bt con or, Be ewe {eOr- vet] - cos k(y x) - sin k(y x) sin (= @) * Beas k(y-x)-sink(y-2) from (1), if sink(y-x) = 0 sin(nx) B= & C1" thus, the particles of the medium at the points lying on the straight lines, y = x + mm will oscillate along those lines (even n), or at right angles to them (odd n). Also from (1), if eer u 25 = 1-82/0", a circle. Thus the particles, at the points, where y = x (nm 1/4) A, will oscillate along circles. In general, all other particles will move along ellipses. 4.161 The displacement of oscillations is given by § = a cos (wt-kx) Without loss of generality, we confine ourselves to x = 0. Then the displacement maxima occur at of = mx. Concentrate at wt = 0. Now the energy density is given by 7/6 time later (where T = aa is the time period) than t = 0. we pare? sin? = - Zeatot = % 2m Thus .= featur - >= 4.162 4.163 4.164 89 The power output of the source much be 4nPIy = Q Watt The required flux of accoustic power is then : Q = £ R ba = —_ oO s Where & is the solid angle subtended by the disc enclosed hy the ring at S. Thi Q = 2n (1 - cosa) I So flux ® =I hy {1 - 2nP Substitution gives ® = 211 x 30 (1-—— UW = 1.99 pw. ret 4 Eqn. (1) is a well known result stich is derived as follows; Let SO be the polar axis. Then the required solid angle is the area of that part of the surface a sphere of much radius whose colatitude is < a. a Thus a= f 2x snoae = 2% 0 - casa), 0 From the result of 4.162 power flowing out through anyone of the opening (. A/2 \ “20° VR? (H/2) | = ?(;. 4 2 VaR+h AS total power output equals P, so the power reaching the lateral surface must be. -P- 23 (1 Vaan | - —PA__ -o.0w V4R?+h?} VaR?+h? whe We are given & = acoskxwr ag , so = -aksinkxcosmt and = -awcoskxsinwr ox or Thus (Bao = acoskx, (§),- 22 = -acoskx ax t= 0 (3 ~ aksings, (32) = -aksinkx a t= T/2 (a) The graphs of (&) and (33) are as shown in Fig. (35) of the book (p.332). (b) We can calculate the density as follows : Take @ parallelopiped of cross section unity and length dr with its edges at x and xtdx, After the oscillation the edge at x goes to x+§(x) and the edge at x+dx goes to x+dx+&(x+ae) = xtdx+E(x)+ Bae. ‘Thus the volume of the element (originally dr) becomes ( 1+ 3) dx and hence the density becomes p = —2 1425" ax ' On substituting we get for the density p(x) the curves shown in Fig.(35). referred to above. (©) The velocity v(x) at time t = T/4 is (i 3 = -aecoskx heres On plotting we get the figure (36). 4.165 Given § = acoskxcoswt (a) The potential energy density (per unit volume) is the energy of longitudinal strain. This is > [Zesrsexstnin) = 3 -te (33), 2 in? 2 w= fed B sin? kx cos’ wt (as. wae + ( 52 i the longitudinal strain (b) The kinetic energy density is 14 (28 = $0(25) = Sp atatcostkxsin’or. 91 On plotting we get Fig. 37 given in the book (p. 332). For example at ¢ = 0 1 : Wm Wty = zea or sin’ kx 4.166 Let us denote the displacement of the elements of the string by § = asinkx coswt since the string is 120 cm long we must have £120 = nx If x; is the distance at which the displacement amplitude first equals 3-5 mm then asinkx, - 3-5 = asin(kx,+15k) Then kx,+1Sk a n-kx, or kx, = HB One can convince ourself that the string has the form shown below It shows that kx120= 4x, so k= Zon- Thus we are dealing with the third overtone Also kxy= Fo a= 35V2 mm ~ 4949 mm. 4.167 We haven = 2 vi = yi Where M = total mass of the wire. When the wire 21“ m 21° M is stretched, total mass of the wire remains constant. For the first wire the new length = [+ iI and for the record wire, the length is 1 + nol. Also T, = c(m;/) where ais a constant and Tj = ot (7/). Substituting in the above formula. 1 viem) Gem) “= em! M we 1 V lem) Crm!) 2" 2Teml M va Lem afm Lem vo l+m m itm uly ™mU+ m) Vv O-04(1+ 0-02) _ 4.4 v1 m+ m) ~ * 0-02(1+ 0-04) ~ 92 4.168 4.169 4.170 Let initial length and tension be / and T respectively. tft Se. “rai VG, In accordance with the problem, the new length 135 100 =1:7T vel Tx70 = 0651 and new tension, 7’ = T+ 100 Thus ihe new frequency Hence Obviously in this case the velocityof sound propagation v= 2v(b-h) where Jy and J; arc consecutive lengths at which resonance occur In our problem, (h-h) = 7 So v = 2vl = 2x 2000x 8-5 cm/s = 0-34 km/s. (a) When the tube is closed at one end vie Gy (2m41), where n= 0,1,2,... 340 = pops (2041) = 100(2041) Thus for n= 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,..., we get m = 1001H,, m = 3001H,, ms = SO01H,, m = 7001H,, ns = 9001H,, ne = 11001H,, my = 13001 H, Since v should be < vo = 12501 H,, we need not go beyond tg. Thus 6 natural oscillations are possible. (b) Organ pipe opened from both ends vibrates with all harmonics of the fundamental frequency. Now, the fundamental mode frequency is given as vew/h or, vev/21 Here, also, end correction has been neglected. So, the frequencies of higher modes of vibrations are given by ve n(v/2D @) 93 or, vy v/21, v2 2(w/2D, va= 3(v/2D It may be checked by putting the values of n in the equation (1) that below 1285 Hz, there are a total of six possible natural oscillation frequencies of air column in the open pipe. 4.471 Since the copper rod is clamped at mid point, it becomes a mode and the two free ends will be anitinodes. Thus the fundamental mode formed in the rod is as shown in the Fig. (a). 4.171 (a) 4.171 (b) In this case, 1 a 2 5 v 1VyEveE ° vo 27-21 p Ye where E = Young’s modules and p is the density of the copper Similarly the second mode or the first overtone in the rod is as shown above in Fig. (b). Vee FESS 3yv 3 E Hence wet eZv ; where n = 0,1,2... Putting the given values of E and p in the general equation v = 38(2n+1)kHz Hence vp = 3°8 kHz, v, = (38x3) kHz, v2 = (38)x5 = 19 kHz, vs = (38%7) = 266 kHz, vy = (38%9) = 342 kHz, vs = (38x11) = 418KHz, vo = (38)x 13k Hz= 49-4k Hz and vy = (3:8) x 14k Hz > 50 k Hz. Hence the sought number of frequencies between 20 lo 50 k Hz equals 4. 4.172 Let two waves &, = acos(at-kx) and & = acos(wt+kx), superpose and as a result, we have a standing wave (the resultant wave ) in the string of the form § = 2acos kx cost. According to the problem Z@ = dy. 94 4.173 Hence the standing wave excited in the string is § = a,,cos kx cost ay ae or, OF 7 Oy COs kx sin wt @ So the kinetic energy confined in the string clement of length dr, is given by : 2 dT= 2(7# ) (3) t ar oe aT= 3( 74) abe? costs sin? mano 22" or, a7 = MEO sin? ot cos? 2x ae Hence the kinetic energy confined in the string corresponding to the fundamental tone at f se Because, for the fundamental tone, length of the string = x Integrating we get, : Tx tm 2,0 sin? wt Hence the sought maximum kinetic energy equals, Tras = jm ao, because for Trax , Sit? wt = 1 Gi) Mean kinetic energy averaged over one oscillation period Ine S sin’ wt de fT@ 10, % = = {Md TI Sa 0 or, =hmaiar. ‘We have a standing wave given by the equation & = asinkx coswt So, a = = awsinkx sinwt 0) 3 and | » akcoskx cost @ ot 95 ‘The kinetic energy confined in an element of length dx of the rod 2 dT= pcesax)( FF) 7 3 psa? o? sin” ot sin? kx dx So total kinetic energy confined into rod va T -fa - $00? asin? oo ft? xde 0 z= ESa°o" psin’ ot oT, 4k @) The potential energy in the above rod element 1 z du~fou-~- [Fat where Fy = (p Sax) 2§ Jove frute omer = cose ®§ or, Fy = - (pSdc)or’ 5 80, aU = w?pSae f $e 0 or, a -£ . Bae pots a cos’ ot sin’kx de Thus the total potential energy stored in the rod U = f au mw on Ue pos deodor fsa? 2% ede 0 2? cos? . xpSa?w*cos*wt So, U- a To find the potent that the potential energy density confined in a rod under elastic force equals : energy stored in the rod element we may adopt an easier way. We know 1 . 1 1 7 Up = 5 (stress xstrain) = 508 = 7¥e 96 4.174 4.175 Hence the total potential energy stored in the rod ars 1 U=fUpdv=-f 2 paw cos*wt cos*kx S dx o = EpSa*w' cos wt 4k @ Hence the sought mechanical energy confined in the rod between the two adjacent nodes 2 42 = _ mpwra’s E=T+u = 7Oo Receiver R, registers the beating, due to the sound waves reaching directly to it from source and the other due to the reflection from the wall. Frequency ot sound reaching directly trom Sto Ky v Yoon Yor e when $ moves towards R, and v's+a, = Yo when S- moves towards the wall veu Now frequency reaching to R, after reflection from wall Vwoer, * Yor ey » When 5 moves towards Ry wn eee ee RQ ¢ R, and Vive, = Yo J When S moves towards the wali 4 ve Thus the sought beat frequency AV = (Veen. Ywoe,) Of (Voor, Yeon, | Vv 2vovu -2uy vo eo a I veu vie ut v Let the velocity of tuning fork is u. Thus frequency reaching to the observer due to the tuning fork that approaches the observer v vey °v-u [v = velocity of sound } Frequency reaching the observer due to the tuning fork that recedes from the observer vl" = vo veu So, Beat frequency v-v" = v = vov[ 1) pe 2vovu or, ve van So, vu+(2vvp)u-v?v =0 4.176 4177 97 Vavy savy? -Zvvp z¥ dvevitdvy Hence u= 2 Hence the sought value of u, on simplifying and noting that u > 0 7 eet ey -] v Yo Obviously the maximum frequency will be heard when the source is moving with maximum velocity towards the recciver and minimum frequency will be heard when the source recedes with maximum velocity. As the source swing harmonically its maximum velocity equals a. Hence and pig = Yo vt+ao So the frequency band width AV = Vmax Ymin = (are) va tw 2) 2 2 or, (Ava’)o'+ (2vpva)o- Avv =0 ~2vovaz V4vev7a2+ Aviary? So, ye 2Ava On simplifying (and taking + sign as @ > 0 if Av > 0) Wey Om 0 It should be noted that the frequency emitted by the source at time f could not be received at the same moment by the receiver, becouse till that time the source will cover the distance dw 1? and the sound wave will take the further time dw 1?/w to reach the receiver. Therefore the frequency noted by the receiver at time ¢ should be emitted by the source at the time t0-63 km no sound will be héard. We treat the fork as a point source. In the absence of damping the oscillation has the form Const. cos (w1- kr) Because of the damping of the fork the amplitude of oscillation decreases exponentially with the retarded time (i.e. the time at which the wave started from the source.). Thus we write for the wave amplitude. This means that 101 " ™% 7 a ‘Thus A orp =——4_ = 0.12. st 's Ya-ta v4 BoA v 4.185 (a) Let us consider the motion of an element of the medium of thickness dr and unit area of cross-section. Let § = displacement of the particles of the medium at location x. Then by the equation of motion pdx& = -dp where dp is the pressure increment over the length dr Recalling the wave equation 2 g-0%t ax’ we can write the foregoing equation as 2 pv {Sar = -dp ax Integrating this equation, we get Ap = surplus pressure = - ovdk, Const. In the absence of a deformation (a wave), the surplus pressure is Ap = 0. So ’Const? = O and = -pv28 Ap =-pv'Se. (b) We have found earlier that W = W,t Wy = lolal energy density 2 1 (a5 m= 50( ge) Me ey to see that the space-t (AP Yn Using < (AvP > =F (aph west I= eee 102 4.186 4.187 4.188 The intensity of the sound wave is CAP Im , (AP Ym > $)- ----- 7° 2pv ~2pvd Using v = vA, p is the density of air. ‘Thus the mean energy flow reaching the hall is = 2(APm ART = Ree = aR? being the effective area (area of cross section) of the ball. Substitution gives 10.9 mW. Po (Ap We have x 7 intensity = TO P Ap) af OE or (AP) ane 1 of £28 kg/m 340 m/s x 080 W | 4/1293 340x 8 [setemsm ms"'}? Qn 15x 15 m? V Faxtsxis ( } = 49877 (kem7ts 2 5Pa. (AP )m 51075 P (b) We have Ap = -pv2e (AP )m = PV KEq = pv 2EVEy (AD mn s Eamon 2mpvy ~ Dmx 1295x340 x 600 = 34m & 3x107F 180) -6 7 3407600 ~ gy ~ 00° = 5x10 Express L in bels. (ie. L = 5 bels). Then the intensity at the relevant point (at a distance r from the source) is: Jo:10" Now this must equal the quantity : P =» Where P = sonic power of the source. ur P 2 Thus ——, =e?" Ip? 4ar ° or P= 4mr7e7"" p10" = 1.39 W. 103 4.189 The velocity of light in a medium of relative permittivity © is F . Thus the change in e wavelength of light (from its value in vaccum to its value in the medium) is clive -2 ate v "An= 4.190 From the data of the problem the relative permittivity of the medium varies as e(x) = epee Heuce ihe focal velocity of light 4.191 Conduction current density = 0 E = . 1 aD a ee Displacement current density = “> = veg T= iweeoe TE Ratio of magnitudes = ae = 2,0n puting the values. = > 4a SL 28 aH = V cos(wt-E°F)x E, = EXE, sin(at-k°F") At rs r=0 aH KE, ~—=- sinwt ar So integrating (ignoring a constant) and using c = + Vea bo -—er ~ PE RrEm 0 EKEn Vo i Vo cos cktx 77 cosckt 104 4.193 As in the previous problem, oe kx Ea He Thus cos (wt-k th = G08 ( kx ~ wt) ts = V 2 E_e cos (kx-w2) Py (@) ar-o-V 2 Eq & coskx (batt =), = 2 Em e COs (KX~0 fp) save ba =f E- dl"= Eyl (cos. wt cos (wt- kl) = 2 tsin snl s 2! =~ 2Eql sin 24 sin(ws- $2) Putting the values E,, = 50m V/m,'l = $ metre x fay = 50. mv{ sind) sin(or-§) = -25sin (r+%-%) = 25 c05(w1-2\mv 62 er 3y 4195 EB =f E(1,x) a BekB(1yx) and cui B= 22. _ 2B. _g a8 x OL t . QE 0B ‘ =e: 0b > aE 1 aF Also Cut B= cot SE 2 ns aB a 1 aE and cut B= - 7 22 50 Pt ot 4.196 E = E., cos(wt-K7r) then as before = ty kx En : He aE cos (w1-Kk* 7} 4.197 4.198 4.199 105 Ps To Fe Be VE Ex Eyed (or -FF fa ak. - = EE Ecos? (wt-F°F3 Sel fape 2 Ho En k E = E,,cos(2xvt-kx) @) Jas = on = - 2meqvE_sin(wr-kx) Thus Gidis me =< ide >”? = V2 megvE,, = 0.20 mA/m*. (b) <5, > = iV 2 Ez as in (196). Thus = 3.3 » W/m? For the Poynting vector we can derive as in (196) ¢ = ; V <2 2 along the direction of propagation. Hence in time ¢ (which is much longer than the time period 7 of the wave), the energy reaching the ball is aR?x ivf pre pisig 2¥ wy “™ Here E = E,, cos kx cost From div E = 0 we get Ep; = 0 so Ey is in the y~z plane, SF TB a — VeaskexE, cos ot = EE, sin kx cos wt eR Bigs so Be sinkxsinwt = B, sinkxsinwt Where | Bm = ™ and By, 1 Ey in the y-z plane. At t=0,B=0,E = E,coskx At t= 7/4 E=0,B = Bysinkx 4.201 E- E, coskxot op XE, . H- sinkxsin@t (exactly as in 199) He > EK Se Ex 2 EXER 1 soy sin 204 wo 4 Thus S,- 2 egck2 sin2kxsin2wt (as 1 ~ ee GCE Gee <5,> = 0 Inside the condenser the peak electrical energy W, = ; cv2 equ? a (d = separation between the plates, a = area of each plate.). aA V = V,, sino t, V,, is the maximum voltage Changing electric field causes a displacement current aD Jaw * Fy = FOL mo C08 £9 © Vy -oeen t > This gives rise to a magnetic field B (r) (at a radial distance r from the centre of the plate) B(r)-27 = WX? jay = Wot? 22 cos wt B= J eotlgo FV q cos or Energy associated with this field is ; 82 ft ; = fore = 5 xf FP rdrx dx Vjz cos’ wt gt ok 16° ovo" | ‘Thus the maximum magnetic energy Vj2 cos* wt 2 2 w, = 2! (mR Per 10 a We a_i foR) | as Hence Wwe omloRY = § (SF) #5 x10 The approximation are valid only if oR <"— (for r>R) Thus 2 s sia V 52iz muially outward from the axis ear This is the Poynting vector. Within the solenoid B = gnJ and the rate of change of magnetic energy dt where R = radius of cross section of the solenoid / = length. Also H = B/jjp = nJ along the axis within the solenoid. By Faraday’s law, the induced electric field is =W, = (Zvorans) = Won? RUT Eq 2ur = nr? B= ar? pond or Ey= Fuonir 4.207 4.208, 109 so at the edge Ey (R) = Spy x IR (citcuital) Then S, = Eg H, (radially inward) and Wy = Suon? LTR 20R1 = yr a R71T as before. Given 92> 0; The electric field is as shown by the dashed lines (—~ ). TTT The magnetic field is as shown Oo O Oo (©) emerging out of the paper. S = E’x His parallel to the wires ~ and towards right, Hence source must be on the left. The electric field (----—>) and the magnetic field (H —>) are as shown. The electric field by Gauss’s theorem is like a r Integrating o-Ain oO so Ae (n>) Ve ~ n in 2 7 Then e-—+ Y 2 rine nm Magnetic field is Hy = st em °" Oar The Poynting vector $ is along the Z axis and non zero between the two wires (n< r< rp) . The total power flux is IV. onrdr=1V * Qn in , zn Vocos wt Incos (wt-9) y= 2 and Ha = oer 110 4.210 4.211 4.213 214 On using = Fe0s 9 « Let 2” be along the z axis. Then Sin = Ere Hiy-Ety Hie and San = Enz Hay -Eny Hoe Using the boundary condition E,, = E>, ,H,, = Ho, at the boundary (t = x or y) we see that Sin = San- P- a |p’ whea if But & Zm;77 = 0 for a closed system Hence P-0. pet 20 Anty 30 IPI? = (ea%a)? cos’ we 24,2 Thus

@ t- 2 (eatax be £2 4 ~ 51x 10 Ww. 4me9 3¢ 2” Tange Here 2, <5 -~4 1 ? force - te yy Thus p-—i_,(£4) 2. (4c)? |mR4) 3c Most of the radiation occurs when the moving particle is closest to the stationary particle. In that region, we can write R= b2 4 v7? and apply the previous problem’s formula 1 2 “lq dt Th AW ~ — 3 ms aearird m avery? (the integral can be taken between + with little error.) 4.216 lll dt 1 dx x Now aoe IP oS J (pave VS (b 4x7 2vb> ve ve 4 Hence, AW - aa (4x89)? 3c°m'*vb>- For ihe semicircuiar path on ihe right 2 mV" Bev or v= BER. R m x xX X x 22 p2 Thus KE, = T= dmy? = 2 eR x x x\x 1 2 ay xxx : ev Power radiated = 7 55 (Sr) Ny Hence cnergy radiated = AW X X XX 203 p\” 3,5 p2 12 (Bre?R) aR BeetR Gxt 303\ m? | Be Gegmc? 3 So aw Be. 2.06 x 10°. Zee m (neglecting the change in v due to radiation, correct if AW/T << 1). Ra BL eB” Then This is the radiated power so 4 ar Bre dt ~~ 3xegme? Integrating, T = Ty e7'* 3xeqm'c? . Bre + is (1836 )* =~ 10° times Jess for an electron than for a proton so electrons radiate away their energy much faster in a magnetic field. 112 4.217 P is a fixed point at a distance / from the equilibrium position of the particle. Because 4.218 I> a, to first order in Fae distance between P and the instantancous position of the particle is still 1. For the first case y= 0 so t= 7/4 ‘The corresponding retarded time is ¢’ = Zt Now y(t" )+ = Feomalj- a = - otasin For the second case y = a at f = 0 so at the retarded time t’ = - at a. 2 al Thus F(t) = = 2a 008 ‘The radiation fluxcs in the two cascs are proportional to (j"(t') )* so S, So tan? 2! 2 3.06 on substitution. S, c Note : The radiation received at P at time t depends on the acceleration of the charge at the retarded time. Along the circle x = Rsinwt, y = Rooswt where @ = 5 . If tis the parameter in x(¢),y(¢) and t’ is the observer time then pete EW c where we have neglected the effect of the y—-cardinate which is of second order. The observed cordinate are “U x'(t')= x(t), y'(t') = y(t) ‘Then dy' dy | dtidy | -oRsinot | _-ox dt!" dt’ ” dt’ dt oR 1-“coswt 1- and diye dtd (avx/R This is the observed acceleration. 4219 4.220 4.221 4.222 113 (b) Energy flow density of EM radiation S is proportional to the square of the y- projection ar? af) Cedy tos), “Uy (ep 21 of the observed accéleration of the particle ('« a) : Thus 1 We know that Sp (7) & r At other angles $(r,0) « sin? 6=%M Thus S(7,8) = Sy(r)sin’@ = Sysin?@ So Average power radiated 2.8 - Sox dr? xs - F5or? (averse of sin?0 over whole sphere is 3] From the previous problem. Pe SxSpr? 3 or 5) = 222 0” Bar Thus eis te © &mer™ oynting Mux vector is the enemy contained is a box of unit cross section and length c). The rotating dispole has moments Px = pcosot, p, = psinot 2 of Thus 2 pe 4%& 3c 6mEQc If the electric field of the wave is Es E, cost then this induces a dipole moment whose second derivative is Hence radiated mean power

= ——— 114 4.223 4.224 On the other hand the mean Poynting flux of the incident radiation is fo 1,2 Snr V rare P 1 2 ay He ™ ~ 1.2 y2( 27). y/o "s Sad” Taey 3 (toto) (s * £0 -H (2) ox\m For the elastically bound electron x 2 o> m3+magF= eEcoswt This equation has the particular integral (ie. neglecting the part which does not have the frequency of the impressed force) z 2 ot => €£o coswt ms e7 Eo Pra 0 SEZ soand p= -—— cos wr ™ oo (@3- 0") m Hence P = mean radiated power 2 1 2 27a 1p "ane. 2 3% 4me 3c*\ m(w-a) The mean incident poynting flux is 2 Thus Fi. w Let r = radius of the ball R= distance between the ball & the Sun (r< = yho- t (b) The sphere subtends a solid angle P_R* 2n(1-cosa) = 2x|1-—— at the point source and therefore reccives @ total flux of ( Vee) QnI {" -—— 90-« ‘The arca irradiated is : oak’ f sinoao = 2nR?(1-sina) = rar = i) ° 7 1-V1-(R/1P Thus 6 “TT Substituting we get = SO lux. 5-4 Luminance Z is the light energy emitted per unit area of the emitting surface in a given direction per unit solid angle divided by cos 0. Luminosity M is simply energy emitted per unit area, Thus M~ fi-coso-aa Where the integration must be in the forward hemisphere of the emitting surface (assuming Tight is being emitted in only one direction say outward direction of the surface.) But L = Locos 0 Thus 5.5 (a) For a Lambert source L = Const The flux cmitted into the cone is ® = LAS cosadQ =Lasf 2ncosasinada 0 = LAS x(1~ cos’) © xLAS sin? (>) The luminosity is obtained from the previous formula for @ = 90° M = 2 = 90 =_L AS 5.6 The equivalent luminous intensity in the direction OP is LScos® 0 and the illuminance at P is LS 0088 og, LSI aR” Rae 6 LS Ls = 72 \2 = poe h (+) [(e-*) v2] o| " | I I Ip R 118 5.7 58 This is maximum when R=h and the maximum illuminance is LS _ 16x10? aR a7 MO lux The ilisminance at P is = 2) cog = LO) cos? 0 ee Wah) e since this is constant at all x, we must have 0 1 (8) cos? @ = const = Ip orl (0) = Io/cos* 0 h ‘The luminous flux reaching the table is | 9 ly 2 ® = wR’ x = 314 lumen . Pp The illuminated area acts as a Lambert source of luminosity M = 11 where MS = pES = total reflected light Thus, the luminance 7 ee x The equivalent luminous intensity in the direction R making an angle 0 from the vertical is -- @P LS cos 0 = 2=* cos 8 * 9 and the illuminance at the point P is PES cos O sin 0/R? cosec”0 ~ PES cos 0 sin? 0 x xR 90-0 This is maximum when P Koos 0 sin® 0) = - sin‘ @ +3 sin” 0 cos”0 = 0 or tan’@ = 3 => nO = V3 Then the maximum illuminance is 3V3 pES Ton Re This illuminance is obtained at a distance Rcot 0 = R/V3 from the ceiling. Substitution gives the value 0-21 lux 119 5.9 From the definition of luminance, the energy emitted in the radial direction by an clement dS of the surface of the dome is d@=jLdSdQ @ Here L = constant. The solid angle dQ is given by dA cos 0 dg = GAcos8 R 0 where dA is the area of an element on the plane illuminated by the radial light. Then dod= LdSdA cos 0 R The illuminance at 0 is then E- tS per sin 0d cos 0 = vet fs = aL 5.1 Consider an element of area dS at point P. h It emits light of flux dA db ~ LdSdQcos0 ‘ 0 2 a = Las t8 cos sec” 8 _LdSdA 4 0 ee P in the direction of the surface element dA at O. The total illuminance at O is then Bf EAScsto But dS = 2nrdr = 2ahtan Od (h tan 6) = Ink’ sec? Otan0d0 12 ‘Substitution gives E= anLf sindcosoao = nL 5.11 Consider an angular clement of area 2uxdx = 2nF tanOsec’Od0 ed from this ring is d® = LdQ(2x/ tan Osec* 0d 8) -cos @ \ 120 5.12 Now dQqu oe W sec’6 where dA = an clement of area of the table just below the untre of the illuminant. Then the illuminance at the element dA will be Ona Ey ~ f rxtsincesoa0 ono where . Finally using luminosity M = 1 or Sce the figure below. The light emitted by an element of the illuminant towards the point O under consideration is d® = LdSdQ0oos (a+) The element dS has the arca dS = 2xRsinada The distance 2 OA = [+8 -2hR eos a] we also have OA h R IS sina sin(a+B) sinB [ From the diagram = \ cos (a+ p) = "eesa=R i fp h-Reosa OA If we imagine a small area d= at O then dees B Lao OA Hence, the illuminance at O is fs = fL2nk sinada AS-D Revs) a (OAy “> 4 \ cos B = 121 The limit of a is a = 0 to that value for which a+8 = 90°, for then light is emitted tangentially. Thus = cos"? Osan h AR 2k Thus e-f L2nR sina da C=Reasa) (eos a -R) (i? +R? -2AR cos a) we put y= P+ R-2hReosa So, dy = 2hRsinada Rok w+ Re- n- a tee c 2h - | cone 4X + E J Lan (h-Ry RoR L2nR® WR tage R’-y) 3 R 2 eeRy “i aS 1 3L [went (i? - RY) - (1? - RY) + (h- Ry] Rk (WeRY a a « nL Wry Ry ~»| ar y la -Ry 2 aL 2 2 2 2 auLR - Tel?" +2R-28 42K] = So Substitution gives : E = -1lux 5.13 We see from the diagram that because of the law of reflection, the component of the incident unit vector é"along - changes sign on reflection while > the component || to the mirror remains unchanged. n Writing = eft et e Ks winere = WER) é ef = e-Wer) x we see that the reflected unit vector is en q-er = ener) 122 5.14 5.15 5.16 We choose the unit vectors perpendicular to the mirror as the x, yz axes in space. Then after reflection from the mirror with normal along x axis 2 = 2-212) = -Z ise, j+ek where 1, j, & are the basic unit vectors. After a second reflection from the 2nd mirror say along y axis. ee -25 (5) Finally after the third refiection Let PQ be the surface of water and n be the RI. of water. Let AO is the shaft of light with incident angle ©, andOB and OC are the reflected and refracted light rays at angles ©, and Q, respectively (Fig.). From the figure 0) = 3 ® From the law of refraction at the interface PQ sin 0; sin Q, n= 28 __sin sin 0, «in($-01} Hence 0, = tan-'n Let two optical mediums of RI. m and 1 respectively be such that n, >m, . In the case when angle of incidence is N ©, (Fig), from the law of refraction 1 Sin Oey =m ® Ne In the case , when the angle of incidence is ®,, from the P Ty Q law of refraction at the interface of mediums 1 and 2 . im; sin 0, = ny sin 05 ‘Grop But in accordance with the problem 0, = (x/2-0;) “ | so, ny sin 8, = nz cos 0, (2) Dividing Eqn (1) by (2) sin, 1 sin®; cos 0 1 L . Vay a eo = 3 or, 1 Gos0,7 * a, and sin 0; (3) ny cos Oy mm sind, S17 Sui 123 So, a (Using 3) Thus From the Fig. the sought lateral shift x = OM sin(8-B) =dsec B sin (0-8) = d sec B (sin 0 cos B - cos @ sin B) = d(sin - cos @ tan B ) But from the law of refraction sinO = nsinB or, sinB = ee Vine sin? 0 sinO Se ———__ and = oe 0, cosB = 7 and tan B FS * ' - dono From the Fig. nda « MP. _MNeosa Sin@Q = OM * hsec(atda) VA As da is very small, so uA - MNowsa _ MNoos’a DAN . rr h @ | |. x fi Similarly h Lay ae 2 {= To d0= Mees’? 8 @ Q —— From Eqns (1) and (2) da h'costa ) _ heost0 da dO" heote ~ “costa dO From the law of refraction @) nsina = sinO (A) 124 sing = S28, $0, cosa = ®) Differentiating Eqn.(A) neosada = cos6d@ or, oe, et O) ‘Using (4) in (3), we get ©) 3 Hence f= Bos @__, _w hoos 0 1 Using Eqn.(B) } (=) (n? sin?) cn 5.19 The figure shows the passage of a monochromatic ray through the given prism, placed in air medium. From the figure, we have 6 = fi +P, (A) and a = (a4, +02)~( Bi, +B2) a = (a +02)-0 Oo) sina, = sin By or 4, = mB; (for small angles) Q) and sina, = nsinB, or, c, = ”B; (for small angles) 8 From Eqns (1), (2) and (3), we get a = (8, +B,)-8 So, a = n(8)-8 = (n-1)0 [Using Eqn.A] 5.20 (a) In the general case, for the passage of a monochromatic ray through a prism as shown in the figure of the soln. of 5.19, @ = (a, +02)-0 «@ And from the Snell’s law, sinoy = nsinB, or oy = sin7?(nsin B,) sic Similarly a= sin~*(nsin B,) = sin” * [nsin (8 - B,)] (As @= By + By) Using (2) in (1) a= [ sin? Cnsin By )+ sin“! (msin(@-B1)) ]~6 5.21 125 For @ to be minimum, 22 = 0 4B, ncos By or, —_—_—_—_—. - —__—__—*— -0 Vi-n?sin?B, V1- n?sin?(0- fy) or cos"Bi cos? (0B) : (1-n’sin?B,) — 1-n?sin?(6-B;) or, cos? By (1-7 sin?(@- Bi) = cos?(O—-B1) (1 -m? sin” Bs) or, (1 ~ sin? B,) (1 ~n? sin? (0 -B,)) - (1 -sin? (0-B,)) (1-7 sin? By ) or, 1-n? sin? (0 - B, ) - sin” B, + sin” B, m7 sin” (0 - f, ) = 1-n?sin® B, - sin’ (0 - B,) + sin” By n” sin” (6 - B, ) or, sin? (0 - B,)-n?sin?(0-B,) = sin? B, (1-77) or, sin’ (@-B,)(1-n7) = sin’B,(1-n") or, 0-B, =; or fy; = 0/2 But Bi+B2= 0, so, B, = 0/2 = By which is the casc of symmetric passage of ray. ps “~ In the case of symmetric passage of ray L£ a, = Gy = a’ (say) and B, = B) = B = 0/2 Thus the total deviation a = (a;to,)-0 a=20'-8 of a’= 2 QQ) But from the Snell’s law sina = n sin B oor 6 So, sin 25° ~ nsin 5 In this case we have 2 nsin$ (ee soln. of 5.20) In our problem a = 0 So, sin® = nsin(@/2) or 2sin (8/2) cos (0/2) = nsin (0/2) Hence cos (0/2) = 3 or 0 = 2cos~!(n/2) = 83°, where n= 15 126 5.22 5.23 5.24 In the case of minimum deviation a+0 a , sin = = nsin 5 / So, = 2sin“![nsin2 | 0 = 37°, for n= 15 ¢ Soa 26m! nsin | 00 9, fr wot A Passage of ray for grazing incidence and grazing imergence is the condition for maximum deviation (Fig.). From Fig. is " a= n-0= 2-20, Sats (where 0,, is the critical angle) a Ser So, a = -Zsm(i/n) = 58°, for n = 15 = RI. of glass. b———————————*" The least deflection angle is given by the formula, / \ & = 2-8, where ais the angle of incidence at first surface and @ is the prism angle. Also from Snell’s law, m sin a = m sin (0/2), as the angle of refraction at first surface is equal to half the angle of prism for least deflection so, sina = “sin (0/2) - 43 sin 30° - 5639 = ny 1:33 or, a = sin~ 1 (5639) = 34:3259° Substituting in the above (1), we get, 5 = 865° From the Cauchy’s formula, and also experimentally the R.I. of a medium depends upon the wavelength of the mochromatic ray ie. n = f(A). In the case of least deviation of a monochromatic ray the passage a prism, we have: - a) . at nsin> = sin 2 2 @ The above equation tales us that we have n = n(a.), so we may write dn An= faa Q) From Eqn. (1) ansin® = Leos tt8 aq [Nt my = 2S 9 £ cos 449 5 dn 2 ZANT: o, dane 9 2sin 5 From Eqns (2) and (3) aro cos SF An= Aa 5.25 127 Fermat’s principle : “ The actual path of propagation of light (trajectory of a light ray ) is the path which can be followed by light with in the lest time, in comparison with all other hypothetical paths between the same two points. ” “Above statement is the original wordings of Fermat ( A famous French scientist of 17th century)” Deduction of the law of refraction from Fermat’s principle : Let the plane S be the interface between medium 1 and medium 2 with the refractive indices my = ¢/v, and m, = c/v, Fig. (a). Assume, as usual, that 7 —— = sinB, lage Vay t(l-xy Consequently, sina. _sinB _ 9 or sina _ Vi V. Vz , sinB vy, = sina _ ¢/m _ Me sinB ~ ¢7m ~ my Note : Fermat himself could not use Eqn. 2. as mathematical analysis was developed later by Newton and Leibniz. To deduce the law of the refraction of light, Fermat used his own maximum and minimum method of calculus, which, in fact, corresponded to the subsequently developed method of finding the minimum (maximum) of a function by differentiating it and equating the derivative to zero. 5.26 (a) Look for a point O’ on the axis such that O’ P’ and O' P make equal angles with o'o. This determines the position of the mirror. Draw a ray from P parallel to the axis. This must on reflection pass through /’. The intersection of the reflected ray with principal axis determines the focus. 129 (b) Suppose P is the object and P’ is the image. Then the mirror is convex because the image is virtual, crect & diminished. Look for a point X (between P & P’) on the axis such that PX and PX make equal angle with the axis. 2 p! % Pp. Se Ge Da~~ pi 0 E 0 a: F P Q) . ) @) e) 5.27 (a) From the mirror formula, 1101 ss ete p weet fe @ In accordance with the problem s-s' = / . = 6, 11 1 s s (©) Again we have, ete gO FF Lis, sf ot, 2 .S4. = Bf f or, a= @ Now, it is clear from the above equation, that for smaller B, s must be large, so the object is displaced away from the mirror in second position. ie. B= @) pee sl-f Eliminating s from the Eqn. (2) and (3), we get, 130 5.28 5.29 7 1 1 ‘ For a concave mirror as usual ¥ = , so s' = (In coordinate convention s = —s is negative & f = —|f| is also negative.) If A is the area of the mirror (assumed small) and the object is on the principal axis, then the light incident on the mirror per second is Iy 4 s This follows from the definition of luminous intensity as light emitted per second per unit ind the fact that 4 ic the calid angle subtended by the mirror 4 act that Si s at the source. Of this a fraction p is reflected so if J is the luminous intensity of the image, A A then J > = ph= Fit obs Ifl-s (Because our convention makes f~ ve for a concave mirror, we have to write | f|.) Substitution gives T= 2.0 x 10°cd. Hence iaph ( For O, to be the image, the optical paths of all rays OAO, must be equal upto terms of leading order in A. Thus nA + ny AQ, = constant But, OP = |s|, OP =| | and so OA = ViP + (s[+8) = [5] ++ Is B = ViF Tey Fis |-64+— OA = VIE + UST = 8 B18] -8 + 57 (neglecting products A” 8). Then BR ny[s| + mls'| + md -md+ > Now (r-oy +h =? o W=278 of b= > Here r = CP. + + \ = Constant isl * isi Since this must hoid for ali, we have i my fea ie eos 131 From our sign convention, s’ > 0, s < 0 so we get mm mam ss r 3.36 Ail rays focusing at a point must have traversed the same optical path. ‘Lhus PN xenV Pa (f-x = nf or (nf-x? - Par (f-xP or, 2? = (nf-1)-[nf-aP = (nf-xtnf-nx) (nf-x-nftnx) = a(n-1)(2nf-(nt 1a) = 2n(n-lfx-(ntD(n-Ixe Thus, (n+ 1)(n-1)x7-2n(n-I fre’? = 0 n(n-D ft Vr o-1pf-wPmtl)(n-1) So ** (+1)@-1) - 28 1zV 1-22] nt f Ray must move forward so x < f, for + sign x >f for small r, so -sign. (Also x > 0 as r + 0) (x>f means ray turning back in the direction of incidence. (sec Fig.) ap! +f mei? | Hence ee TEV For the maximum value of r, n+ir Vi-ttir . (A) mae 7° “ because the expression under the radical sign must he non-negative, which gives the maximum value of r. Hence from Eqn. (A), rae = f V (n= 1)/(n + 1) On simplifying we get, s! = 30cm. Thus the image J‘ produced by the front surface behaves as a virtual source for the rear surface at distance 25 cm from it, because the thickness of the lense is 5 cm. Again from the refraction formula at cerve surface non n=n ~ ra at i 0 ! sv 8 -5 : I On simplifying, s’ = + 6-25 cm Thus we get a real image J. at a distance 6-25 cm beyond the rear surface (Fig.). 5.32 (a) The formation | of the image of a source S, placed at a di of the co: planovconver I lens of thickness d is shown in the fig- ure. On applying the formula for refraction through spheri- cal surface, we get =(n-1)/R, (here n= and n=1) a > da But in this case opti is v/n, so the magnification produced will be, p= - 8 [2 =i) ld [n_ “ns” n)d R. n\d Substituting the values, we get magnification B = ~ 0-20. (>) If the transverse area of the object is A (assumed small), the area of the image is B°A. xD°/4 st xD? We shall assume that a> A. Then light falling on the Jens is : LA 133 from the definition of luminance (See Eqn. (5.1c) of the book; here aD/4 cos @ ~ 1 if D? << s* and dQ = )). Then the illuminance of the image is LA 4 / BPA = Ltn Dad? Substitution gives 42 1x. 5.33 (a) Optical power of a thin lens of RI. 7 in a medium with RI. 7 is given by : 1 @D =(n- — (A) ( (x 7 -m) (a) From Eqn.(A), when the lens is placed in air : 1 0, = (n- O(k -m) @) Similarly from Eqn.(A), when the lens is placed in liquid : einem fh 2) > ( OLR” R| @ Sn Thus from Eqas (1) and (2) © =" 6, 22D m-1 °° The second focal length, is given by f= e where 7! is the RI. of the medium in which it is placed. toe f= B 7 em (b) Optical power of a thin lens of RI. m placed in a medium of RL. rg is given by : 1 61 © = (n=m) (> @) (Mt 2) For a biconvex lens placed in air‘medium from Eqn. (A) : Plat) ) = (m=) R- Se] * ® where R is the radius of each curve surface of the lens Optical power of a spherical refractive surface is given by : n-n oe." ®) For the rear surface of the lens which divides air and glass medium = 24 ere n is te RI. 2) of glass) 134 5.34 (a) (a) Convex lens (b) Figure 5.5 (a) & (b) with lens Similarly for the front surface which divides wate -nd glass medium n= 4 ® ‘Hence the opticai power of the given optical system n-1 n-M — 2n-Mo-1 zt RR @ b= O,+9, = From Eqns (1) and (4) & 2noma1 og (ammm-1) D " ZWn-1) “"“3t-1) °° Focal length in air, f = + = 15cm and focal length in water = 72 = 20cm for My = 4. Clearly the media on the sides are different. The front focus F is the position of the object (virtual or real) for which the image is formated at infinity. The rear focus F’ is the position of the image (virtual or real) of the object at infinity. (a) Figures 5.7 (a) & (b). This geometrical construction ensines that the second of the equations (5.1g) is obeyed. (a) Convex tens (b) Concave lens (P is the object) 5.35 5.36 138 (©) Figure (5.8) (a) & (b). Clearly, the important case is that when the rays ) £Q axis, otherwise the figure can be completed by reflection in the principal axis. Knowing one path we know the path of all rays connecting the two points. For a different object. We proceed as shown below, we use the fact that a ray incident at a given height ahove the aptic centre suffers a7 definite deviation. The concave lens can be discussed similarly. Since the image is formed on the screen, it is real, so for a conversing lens object is in the incident side, Let s, ands, be the magnitudes of the object distance in the first and second case respectively. We have ihe ieus formula oO In the first case from Eqn. (1) fe. = 26- 31cm. i GD” Gs)" F oP OF Similarly from Eqgn.(1) in the second case —i__t Ll tf (-Al) (-s) f (I-Al)-f Thus the sought distance Ax = s)- 5, = 0-5mm = Alf?/(I-f?) oF, 5) = = 26-36cm. The distance between the object and the image is |. Let x = distance between the object and the fens. Then, since tie image is real, we have in ur convention, « = ~4, ¥ = 7-4 so 1,11 eoalowedh or x(l-x)=If ox -xl+f=0 Solving we get the roots (We must have J > 4f for real roots.) (a) If the distance between the two positions of the lens is AJ, then clearly Al = x)-x, = difference between roots = VP - 4if rae : pe 136 (b) The two roots are conjugate in the sense that if one gives the object distance the other gives the corresponding image distance (in both cases). Thus the magnifications are L+ VF — 4 Leveeay - == enlarged) and - = (diminished). pov oag CmMEe Teva an (iminished), The raiiv of these magnification being 1 we have 1-WPr=4p Waar 1- VP - 4if 2 ! _# (fa-y 1) y (8'B" = 1). If Ais the size of the object then f= fh and HK = BA Hence ha VR. 5.38 Refer to problem 5.32 (b). If A is the area of the object, then provided the angular diameter “ D of the object at the lens is much smaller than other relevant angles like = we calculate the f y2 light falling on the lens as LA ae where u? is the object distance squarcd. If B is the transverse magnification [B = = then the area of the image is B*A. Hence the illuminance of the image (also taking account of the light lost in the lens) aD? 1 | (l-a)aDL 49 FA 4f? since s' = f for a distant object. Substitution gives E = 15 1x. =(1- @lAZ 5.39 (a) If s = object distance, s’= average distance, L = luminance of the sounce, AS = area of the source as- sumed to be a plane surface held normal to the prin- cipal axis, then we find for the flux A ® incident on the lens A= fLAScos0dQ 2 = LAS fcos02nsin0d0=LASasin®a Lasse 5 0 137 Here we arc assuming D << s, and ignoring the variation of L since a is small ad Then if L’ is the luminance of the image, and AS' = (5) AS is the area of the image then similarly a q Ye $s s' zmaLAS L'AS'SH=L' AS 8 4 4s or L! = L irrespective of D. (b) In this case the image on the white scrcen from a Lambert source. Then if its luminance is Lo its luminosity will be the mL and 2 2 s D nly "5 AS = LAS=5n °F 4s or Lg « D* since s' depends on f, s but not on D. 5.40 Focal length of the converging lens, when it is submerged in water of RI. no (say) : 1_(m 1 1), 2 (m -™) t.2(%_,)/£_2 L hi (2 i) ( Rl mR @ Vie MEN; Similarly, the focal length of diverging lens in water. 1_(m 1 =2 (m- No) se lS-1 — 2) > (t)(Cana) Now, when they are put together in the water, the focal length of the system, = + - f fh = 2am) _2 (m=) | 20 =m) mR mR nmyR or, fe RL asem 2(m,-m) 5.41 C is the centre of curvature of the silvered surface and O is the effective centre of the equivalent mirror in the LS sence that an object at O forms 2 Fron the figure, using the formula for retraction at a spherical surface, we have Cc 0 (In our convention f is - ve). Substitution gives f = - 10 cm. 138 5.42 (a) Path of a ray, as it passes through the ens system is as shown below. Focal length of all the three lenses, , re Applying lens formula for the first lens, le Sem phe Sem PE Sem A considering a ray coming from infinity, poate or, s' = f= 10cm, @) and so the position of the image is 5 cm to the right of the second lens, when only the first one is present, but the ray again gets refracted while passing through the second, so, Pit ys" F720 or, s’ = 10 cm, which is now 5 cm left to the third lens so for this lens, 1 3 or = 46 or, s” = 10/3 = 3-33 cm. from the last lens. (b) This means that if the object is x cm to be Teft of the Listens on the axis OO" then the image lenses 1,2,3 from the left and let O be the object, O, its image by the first lens, O, the image of O, by the 2nd lens and Os, the image of O, by the third lens. O, and O, must be symmetrically located with respect to the lens L, and since this lens is concave, O; must be at a distance 2 | f, | to be the right of Lz and O, must be 2|f,| to be the left of L,, One can check that this satisfies lens equation for the third lens L3 u = -(2|f| +5) = -25 cm. s'=x, fs; = 10 cm. 1 1 1 Hence x * 25 ~ 10 so x = 16.67 cm. 5.43 (a) Angular magnification for Galilean telescope in normal adjustment is given as. T = f/f. or, 10 = fife oF fy = 10f, @ 5.44 5.45 139 The length of the telescope in this case. l= f,-f. = 45cm. given, So, using (1), we get, fe = +5 and f, = +50cm. (b) Using lens formula for the objective, ALL oy 2 Selo so 5 fo 7 8 Soth From the figure, it is clear that, = ovScm s',=1'+ f, where I’ is the new tube length. or, I = vy-f, = 505-5 = 45-5 cm. So, the displacement of ocular is, Al= T= 455-45 = 05cm In the Keplerian telescope, in normal adjustment, the distance between the objective and eyepiece is fy + f.. The image of the mounting produced by the eyepiece is formed at a distance v to the right where G2 1=21 ist ace lg But s=-(o + fd, esa Us eres eee eee eee Sf hth fho+f The linear magnification produced by the eyepiece of the mounting is, in magnitude, It is clear from the figure that a parallel beam of light, originally of intensity Jy has, on emerging from the telescope, an intensity. fo)” Ea, |e i because it is concentrated over a section whose diameter is f-/fy of the diameter of the cross section of the incident beam. 140 5.46 5.47 Thus Hence Y = ¥'/V7 = 0.6" on substitution. When a glass lens is immersed in water its focal length increases approximately four times. We check this as follows as : al) R n-% n P(e (1) m1 i Ie Giles Gaa fa” ma -1) fa Now back to the problem. Originally in air pred r- Bas sol=fy+f-f£0+1) no (n ~ 1) In water, ge fe and the focal length of the replaced objective is given by the condition fitiiate@+Dh or Weed h- a nm 7a (+) yr1 no! et Substitution gives (n = 1.5, my = 1.33), I” = 3.09 Hence TfL is the luminance of the object, A is its area, s = distance of the object then light falling on the objective is LxD Dy 4s ‘The area of the image formed by the telescope (assuming that the image coincides with the object) is T? A and the area of the final image on the retina is 2 - PA s Where f = focal length of the eye lens. Thus the illuminance of the image on the retin (when the object is observed through the telescope) is 5.48 5.49 141 LuDA LxD? z "appr apr ae ra “f When the object is viewed directly, the illuminance is, similarly, 4 ‘2 2 Lind We want Exp, -7% apr af So, T s a = 20 on substitution of the values. Obviously, f, = +1cm and f= +5om Now, we know that, magnification of a microscope, r- (:- il. for distinct vision or, 50 = (22-1) on ve = tem. (tJ? Since disiaice Deiween vijeciive and vcula bas imacased by Z cn, beave it will Cause ihe increase of tube length by 2cm. s0, S92 S42 = 13 S'o_,\D and hence, : r= {=2-1|2 = 60 fj le It is implied in the problem that final image of the object is at infinity (otherwise light coming out of the eyepiece will not have a definite diameter). (a) We see that s’g2B = |s9|2c, then Then, from the figure a= 27,8 = 2h0 / 7 Bui when the final image is ai infinity, the maguifivation Pin a micsuscope is given by fae) fe Sod = dy when =Ty = ze = 15 on putting the values. lo 142 (b) IfT is the magnification produced by the microscope, then the area of the image produced 2 on the retina (when we observe an object through a microscope) is : I? () A Where u = distance of the image produced by the microscope from the eye lens, f = focal length of the eye lens and A = area of the object. If ® = luminous flux reaching the objective from the object and d dp so that the entire flux is admitted into the eye), then the illuminance of the final image"on the retina ® “TP WsPA But if d > d, then only a fraction (dy | d)° of light is admitted into the eye and the illuminance becomes e (ay oh nr la} ~ 2 aff pi } a (4 (210)? ef: VI independent of I. The condition for this is then dzdy or Pom and the distance of secondary principal plane from the vertex of second concave surface, pL \(2\g 2 oot es. x --(al(>- - St 2 250m 5.56 The optical power of the system of two thin lenses placed in air is given as, ® = 0, +0,-do,, or, : - , where f is the equivalent focal length So, i = fithi-d -d f hh or, f[- Q@) This equivalent focal length of the’system of two lenses is measured from the primary principal plane. As clear from the figure, the distance of the primary principal plane from the optical centre of the first is O;H= x = +(0/®)(d/n') dQ aa & ., =—p ts nan’ =i, for air. af “ht _ (4) (_ fife Bia) - th ith-d Now, if we place the equivalent lens at the primary principal plane of the lens system, it will provide the same transverse magnification as the system. So, the distance of equivalent lens from the vertex of the first lens is, ah *" fth-d 146 5.57 The plane mirror forms the image of the lens, and water, flied in dhe spave Leiween the iwo, behind the mirror, as shown in the figure. So, the whole optical system is equivalent to two similar lenses, seperated by a distance 2/ and thus, the power of this system, d®, &, O=0,+4,- 7 2 where ®, =) =0', = optical power of individual lens and my = RL of water. L Now, ®' = optical power of first convex surface + eptical power of second concave surface. - een + oe nis the refractive index of glass. (Qn—m-1) : @ and so, the optical power of whole system, 24%” b= 20'- = 3.0 D, substituting the values. )) A telescope in normai adjustment is a zero power conbination of ienses. Thus we require @-0-%+0)-40,% n-l But &, = Power of the convex surface = 5 ae %) = Power of the concave surface = z 0 2 a on wa AR dn - 1) Ro Rp + AR) * m Ry (Ry + AR) nAR So d= 7 745 om. on putting the values. @) Hee, o--1-5- 4 4 5x5 5 “1x 075 w5- 0, dx2, 5x _ 5, 200d 3° 3 3 3* 9 _ 200d _ 2 ps 8 d= 3/100)m = 3 cm. 3 5.59 (a) The power of the lens is (as in the previous problem) “EAE . dena, o, nR 147 The principal planes are located on the side of the convex surface at a distance d from each other, with the front principal plane being removed from the convex surface of the on — 1), tpt Ry - Ri (n - 17 n RyRy _ (= 1) @-R) 3 alana Rr n-1/1 --% (e- a) <° B Both principal planes pass through the common centre of curvature of the Surfaces of the lens. 5.60 Let the optical powers of the first and second surfaces of the ball of radius Ry be @ and &, then ® = (n-1)/R, and G’ =(1-n)/ (-R) = This ball may be treated as a thick spherical lens of thickness 2 R,. So the optical power of this sphere is, oe» R o-a- 28 a a’ Similarly, the optical power of second ball, ®) = 2(n-1)/nR, If the distance between the centres of these balls be d. Then the optical power of whole = 2(n-1)/mR, a system, = 0 +%,-d%,% ~ 2-1), 2 =) datv=af y aRi Ro PR _ 2@-1) 2d 1) "RyRy (Ry + Ry) - Now, since this system serves as telescope, the optical power of the system must be equal to zero. tray « 24-1) 2-1), ray 7m ® oR, Te n (Ri +R) or, d= 2@=1) = 9cm. Since the diameter D of the objective is 2R, and that of the eye-piece is d = 2Ry So, the magnification, 2R T-D/d-5-RR=5. 2R, 701% 148 5.61 5.62 5.63 Optical powers of the two surfaces of the lens arc n-1 , = (n-1)/R and @, = (1-n)/-R = 2 So, the power of the lens of thickness d, d%d, _ n- _d(n-1)/R? | ” RR and optical power of the combination of these two thick lenses, 2 © = 4a = 20 = 2D OW - Oe 2 So, power of this system in air is, @y = 2 = 2 37D. ” We consider a ray QPR in a medium of gradually varying refractive index n. At P, the gradient of is a vector with the given direction while is nearly the same at neighbouring points Q, R. The arc length QR is ds. We apply Sncll’s formula nsin @ = constant where @ is to be measured from the direction Vn. The refractive indices at Q.R whose mid point is P are ned |vnlao cos 8 so (n - £1 Vn ]d0 cos 6) (sind + 5 cos 8 dd) =m@+ 3 |'V n|d0 cos @) (sin ® - 5 ons dO) or ncosO dO = |Vn|ds cos@ sinO (we have used here sin (0 = 540) = sin0 + i cos 0 dO) Now using the definition of the radius of curvature ; = a Livaj sme n ela The quantity | Vn|sin0 can be called a ive. the derivative of n along the normal N to 1, id. the ray. Then eau From the above problem io pV n» Vn = [Vel 3x1078 m7! (since p|| Vn both being vertical ). So p = 33x 107m For the ray of light to propagate all the way round the earth we must have p = R = 6400km = 64x 10°m Thus |Vn| = 16x1077m7! 149 5.2 INTERFERENCE OF LIGHT 5.64 (a) In this case the net vibration is given by ¥ m azcosetsazcns (mts) where 6 is the phase difference between the two vibrations which varies rapidly and ( (Thi . Then x = (a, +4, 0085) coswt + a,sindsinwt The total energy will be taken to be proportional to the time average of the square of the displacement. Thus E = < (a,+a,cosd)+a3sin'b > = a+ae as = O and we have put = = dang has been absorbed in the overall constant of proportionality. In the same units the energies of the two oscillations are a and a3 respectively so the proposition is proved. (b) Here 7 a, cos wti+ a, cos (wt+8)} a ‘ 2 and the mcan square displacement is a a} + a3 if 8 is fixed but arbitrary. Then as in (a) we sce that F = E, +E. 5.65 It is easier to do it analytically. & = acoswt, & = 2asinwt & = 2a cos Zoos ws—sin Zsin ws 3 2 3 3 Resultant vibration is g- Teosora2—?¥ snes This has an amplitude = av 49+(8-3V3)? = 1890 5.66 We use the method of complex amplitudes. Then the amplitudes are i(N-1)@ Ay = 4, Ap = ae!®, .. Ay = ae and the resultant complex amplitude it Am Ay +Agt...tAy = a(14e'P ee Fe... + el(-D9) 1-eiNe =41—— 1-e'? 150 The corresponding ordinary amplitude is 1-¢!¥9 iAl=a 5.67 (8) With dipole moment 1” to plane there is no variation with 6 of individual radiation amplitude. Then the in- 2 P tensity variation is due to interference only. In the direction given by angle 9 the phase difference | Qn 2% (dcos)+ = 2kx for maxima AN x 4 S400 Thus dos @= («-s} |7 2x hn 0,218 2,0: 2 We have added g to 2E devs © because the extra path that the wave from 2 has to travel in going to P (as compared to 1) makes it lag more than it already is (due to ). (&) Maximum for © = x gives -d= (e-&)a \ J Minimum for @ = 0 gives d = e-2+h n 2x Adding we get (tee-Zea}a-e This can be true only if K=-k,o => since O c h " Ze(n-n'y *° 5.76 Extra phase difference introduced by the glass plate is so Ax -2 mm . This will cause a shift equal to (n-ay8 fringe widths Ath DA oy, The fringes move down if the lower slit is covered by the plate to compensate for the extra phase shift introduced by the plate. ive. by (n-1 5.77 No. of fringes shifted = (v-nyt =N so n= nN » 1.000377. 5.78 (a) Suppose the vector E, E’, E” correspond to the incident, reflected and the transmitted wave. Due to the continuity of the tangential component of the electric field across the interface, it follows that E+E, = @ where the subscript + means tangential. —~ The energy Hux density is ExH = S. Since HV ity = EVee mE, = mET+mE,” @ or m (Eq-E2) = mE,” so a (E,-E) = mE," @ ° B= ne Since E,” and E, have the same sign, there is no phase change involved in this case. © From (1) & (3) (m+n )El+(m-m)E, = 0 or Ef = ML” m+ fe Ey. 155 If m>m,, then E,' & E, have opposite signs. Thus the reflected wave has an abrupt change of phase by x if n2>m, ie. on reflection from the interface between two media when light is incident from the rarer to denser medium. 5.79 Path difference between (1) & (2) is 2nd sec 0, -2d tan, sin 0, in? 0, nit = 2¢d———"* —_ = 2aV¥ in” 0, Vv 1- sin’, w For bright fringes this must equal (e 2) 2 where ; comes from the phase change of x for @). Here ke O12. ‘Thus 4dV n?—sin20, = (2k+1)% or d= AU+24) orgs 20am. 4V WP sin?0, 5.80 Given 2aVn-1/4= (+5) 064mm ¢ orien fringe) 2dVn-1/4=Kx0-40um (dark fringe) where k, k’ arc integers. Thus 64 bp} 08 or 4(2k+1) = 5K Thic means, for the smallest intege: fans ka2,ka4 4x 0-40 Hence d = 065m. 2Vn-1/4 156 5.81 When the glass surface is coated with a material of RI. n’ = Vin (n= RI. of glass) of appropriate thickness, reflection is zero because of interference between various multiply reflected waves. We show this below. Let a wave of unit amplitude be normally incident from the left. The reflected amplitude is -r where Yn-1 "Vat Its phase is -ve so we write the reflected wave as -r. The transmitted wave has amplitude ¢ r Incident =1 oh ~tth ‘7 | “tee y +th3 Vy tes The emergent wave has amplitude — ¢’ r. 2 We prove below that -f/ =1-r trr'=—tr?, where r’ is the reflection coefficient for a ray incident from the coating towards air. After reflection from the second face a wave of amplitude tee =e(1-r7)r? emerges. Let 8 be the phase of the wave after traversing the coating both ways. . There is also a reflected part of emplitude Then the complete reflected wave is -r-(1-r?)re®4+(1-r?)re -(l-r?) re? 2i8 = -r-(1-r?)re®_—, lee’? 1 = nrfterre®s(1—r? ye? ; [rere Tan pire’? lere™ This vanishes if 8 = (2k+1) x. But 3 = 22 aVadso a 4 Tp kt) 5.82 5.83 We now deduce (= i-r? and r= +r. This ioiiows from the principle of reversibility of light path as shown in the figure below. thant ad -rt+rt=0 2 tt = 1ar? eects (Cr is the reflection ratio for the wave cntcring a denser medium ). ‘We have the condition for maxima 2dV n?-sin? 0, ater This must hold for angle 0 + 58 with successive values of k. Thus a? ant 0) _(, 1 2d n?-sat(0+5) (« 2) 2_in?(9 52) - (ead 2d sia? 0-5?) (+3 n Thus n= 24{ n?— sin’ +8 0sin 0 cos 0 -v = sin? 0-6 Osin 8 cos 8 } = 24 28sin 8 cos 8 Vn? - sin? 0 V n?-sin?0 Thus a= 00 7 2am For small angles 6 we write for dark fringes 2dV n’-sin’O = 2a{n- » For the first dark fringe © = 0 and 2dn m= (bg O)2 2 2n = (k+0)2 For the i dark fringe g 158 oo na,. Te Finally pink) = d(r-re) " 4ln(i-k) so : dark Here Ay = distance of the fringe from top fy@ w dy = thickness of the film > Thus on the screen placed at right angles to the reflected light hk lL Ax = (hy~hy_1) 008 8 cos 8, TL 2aV i? sin? Oy 5.85 (a) For normal incidence we have using the above formula » at" Tha so a= gc = 3! on putting the values 2nd (b) In a distance / on the wedge there are N = a; finges. If the fringes disappear there, it must be due to the fact that the maxima due to the component of wavelength 2 coincide with the mainima due to the component of wavelength A+ 2. Thus a 1 a= (W-Z)O%4m or Ane -i.4 O2i 2N 30 The answer given in the book is off by a factor 2. so, = 0-007. > ax 2i 5.86 5.87 5.88 5.89 5.90 159 ‘We have rw haar So for k differing by 1(Ak = 1) 2rAre dakar 7 iar aR or Ar-= ap The path traveresed in air film of the wave constituting the Kk Ting is 2 r 1 R72k* when the lens is moved a distance Ah the ring radius changes to 7’ and the path length becomes a T+2ah= tka Thus P= VP-2Rbh = 15mm, 2 Piz In this case the path difference is —- * for r>rq and zero for r< ro. ‘This must equals (k- 1/2) (where k = 6 for the six” bright ring.) Thusr = V reg AR = 38mm 2 From the formula for Newton’s rings we derive for dark rings ae a 77 HRA, = RA a? -d? 4(-k,)R Substituting the values, A = OS um. so Path difference between waves reflected by the two convex surfaces is a( Lyd r (am) Taking account of the phase change at the 2™ surface we write the condition of bright rings as ™~ am a{h 2). 2ket , nm) * Se YN k = 4 for the fifth bright ring. 160 5.9) z 1a Th a,4L us atk Ne 1. ay = ow Re DE RT ne DE 111 18% 5 PRR Dr ee ‘0 foe (n-1) 240D Here n = RI of glass = 15. Here ® = (n- Dm 4 se 7 "R, ” Tn-1)" As in the previous example, for the dark rings we have r2(L-+).—2_ *1R, Ra] 2(m-1) k = 0 is dark spot; excluding it, we take k = 10 hre. Then re V2AGHD L349 mm. (b) Path difference in water film will be n7?{t-b or [Ry Re where F = new radius of the ring. Thus re = kh nor? = r? or F=r/V¥ ng = 303mm. Where np = RI. of water = 1-33. 5.92 The condition for minima arc om = ke} a, (There occur phase changes at both surfaces on reflection, hence minima when path difference is half integer multiple of A). In this case k = 4 for the fifth dark ring (Counting from & = 0 for the first dark ring). Thus, we can write p= VQ@Kci)I Rm, K=5 Substituting we get r = 117mm. 5.93. Sharpness of the fringe pattem is the worst when the maxima and minima intermingle :- mh (m-3) 5.94 5.95 5.96 161 or putting yaa, aga AeAd we get mana a AL * = 140. = JAX ~ 20,-a) Interference pattern vanishes wnen the maxima due to one wavelength mingle with the minima due to the other. Thus 2Ah= ky = (kt1)y where Ah = displacement of the mirror between the sharpest pattems of rings Thus kQa-h) = Ma or bao 2 So Ah Ma x ~ 29mm. ~ 2e-m) * 2AX The path difference between (1) & (2) can be seen to be A = 2dsec6-2dtanOsin® = 2dcos0 = kh for maxima. Here k = half-integer. The order of interference decreases as @ increases i.e. as the radius of the rings increases. (>) Differentiating 2dsin080 =A on putting 5k = -1. Thus x 80 = Fi sind 80 decreases as © increases. (@) We have kz 24+ for @ = 0.= 10% (b) We must have 2dvos0 = kA = (k-1)(A+AR) nw and AX = * = * ~ Spm. on putting the values. 1 Thus "2d" k 2d 162 5.3 DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT 5.97 The radius of the periphery of the N“ Fresnel zone is 3.58 ty = VNbR Then by conservation of energy rot VERY a fonedetlr) Ign (VNEXY =f tarar tr) 0 Here r is the distance from the point P. oS Thus lo= xx J rarl(r) By definition abi nok ey for the periphery of the k" zone. Then arn+br = kabp So beh et kah-r kad-r’ on putting the values. (It is given that = r,) for k = 3). = 2metre 5.99 Suppose maximum intensity is obtained when the aperture contains k zones. Then a minimum will be obtained for k + 1 zones. Another maximum will be obtained for k +2 zones. Hence ab. ne bh ab ne (e+ 2) 00 th n= 8B) = vows us zap (2-1) bm On putting the values. 5.100 (a) When the aperture is equal to the first Fresnel Zone :- The amplitude is A, and should be compared with the amplitude 4 when the aperture is very wide. If Ip is the intensity in the second case the intensity in the first case will be 41 When the aperture is equal to the internal half of the first zone :- Suppose Aj, and Aggy are the amplitudes due to the two halves of the first Fresnel zone. Clearly A,, and A, differ in phase by * because only half the Fresnel zone in involved. Also in magnitude lil = [Aou |. Then 163 a At= 2]4gP so 4g? =F Hence following the argument of the first case. Ii, = 2 Jy (b) The aperture was made equal to the first Fresnel zone and then half of it was closed along a diameter. In this case the amplitude of vibration is & Thus I=h. 5.101 (a) Suppose the disc does not obstruct light at all. Then Ase + Aranantr = 5 Asse (because the disc covers the first Fresnel zone only). Scbymcinde * ~ Adie Hence the amplitude when half of the disc is removed along a diameter 1 1 1 @ FAudse + Aromsinder * Aste ~ F Adie * 0 Hence I = 0. (b) In this case 7s FA een + Anat = Assam ~ 4 Ade We write Sein = Aint Aon where Ai (Ags) stands for Apuepat (Aeaonat) The factor i takes account of the * phase difference between two halves of the first Fresnel zone. Thus 1 142 A=-3A, and I= 34; On the other hand Tg = 5 (AR + Abe) = 5AR 1 so = 3h. 5.102 Waren the screen is fully transparent, the amplitude of vibrations is At (with intensity 1 In ~ At). (a) (1) In this case A = \ . 9 41] so squaring I = Jp 164 5.103, (2) In this case 4 of the plane is blacked out so az A= 3(34) and T= th (3) In this case A = 2A?) and J = ah. : afi A 1 I 4) In th fifth -4 i (4) In this case A 2( 241) sera and 7 ge 2h 5 2 In general’we get I(p) = (2 : (#]} where @ is the total angle blocked out by the screen. 3(1L 1 ) (Hea = FFA) by ‘A, being the contribution of the first Fresnel zone. 3 Thus An ZA and J - Rh 2 In 5 to 8 the first term in the expression for the amplitude is the contribution of the plane part and the second term gives the expression for the Fresnel zone part. In general in (5) to (8) A= 3(74:) +34 - Bar and T= 2h (he = Ie) 2 @)I=h ( 1+ ( |) when @ is the angle covered by the screen. ‘We would require the contribution to the amplitude of a wave at a point from half a Fresnel zone. For this we Pp proceed directly from the Fresnel Huyghens principle. The complex amplitude is written as E=fK(o) Beas b Here K(p) is a factor which depends on the angle p V between a normal n’%ta the area dS and the direction fram dS to the point P and r is the distance from the element dS to P. ‘We see that for the first Fresnal zone 165 (ung rw 09 5 (0 Vorwe)) Von Bett ff cme rapa (K(@) #1) 0 For the first Fresnel zone r = b+4/2 so? w b+ bd and p? = bA Thus For the next half zone = oni cH (414i) k If we calculate the contribution of the full 2 Fresnel zone we will get — A). If we take account of the factors K (q) and + which decrease monotonically we expect the contribution r to change to - A>. Thus we write for the contribution of the half zones in the 2 Fresnel zone as . f(r and - &U-) The part lying in the recess has an extra phase difference equal to - 5 = 2m (n- 1)h. Thus the full amplitude is (note that the correct form is e~‘*") A A (4-Fa viajes - Fi i) +43-Ayt ae Ay -\) ,+i8_ Aa .), As ~(Fa-o}e -yu-o+3 166 - (Fu-o)e 18D (as dy = Ay = Ay) and Ag Ag+ As. -4. The corresponding intensity is 2 re Blane ett sei = In[3-2c0s8+2sind] soeapeasel - 3) Ve or 0-5 2kxe5, b= 01,2... ala (a) For maximum intensity cals 3x 2x B= kes AF = SE (n-1)h d 3 : be Be(eed) (b) For minimum intensity sin (8 - i) “1 3x 7x Fn2kae or 8 2kn et x 1” *° -ah(+ 7) (©) For I = Ig, cos & = 0) or { sind =0 sin 8 = 1 cos 8 = +1 Thus = 2kx he a 3x or B= 2kae 32 rhe a(t 5.104 The contribution to the wave amplitude of the inner half-zone is ap VOM? 2nagem! wing? we fot oap 0 ile 2mage ite OM eas -_—>— fe 2mayei** . (eM 1 yx 5.105 167 2miae'*” At k -1) s+ Fe With phase factor this becomes SCs ive where a= 25 (n-1)h. The contribution of the remaining aperture is fa-1 (so that the sum of the two parts when 5 = O is A; ) Thus the complete amplitude is Busnes Bai and the intensity is : Te h[(isi)els(1-i)][(1-i)e+(14i)] = Ig(24+24+(1-iP e+ (1+: Pel] = g[4-2ie + 2ie'*] = 19(4-4sind) 2 A; Here Jo = is the intensity of the incident light which is the same as the intensity due to an aperture of infinite extent (and no recess). Now J is maximum when sin 8 = -1 or d= 2kn+3% so hey ad bar ) and (6) Imax = 81y. We follow the argument of 5.103. we find that the contribution of the first Fresnel zone is A= ~ 4m en itd A; For the next half zone it is - FH 1+i) A (The. contribution of the remaining part of the 2™ Fresnel zone will be - Fa -i) If the disc has a thickness h, the extra phase difference suffered by the light wave in passing through the disc will be b= an (n-1)h. Thus the amplitude at P will be [Ay \\ -i0 Az Ep = [a-7a ee Uni) HAs Aan Ast (A= 8)) ni AL \ 2 7 = Bie +i] 168 5.107 The corresponding intensity will be I = Ig(3-20058-2sin8) = to(3-2¥2 sin( 5 +7) The intensity will be a maximum when : «in(5+3) =-1 3x or 845 -2kne ie. a \ i,.8 so he meena Note :- It is not clear why k = 2 for fgjyThe normal choice will be k = 0. If we take k = 0 we get Ayig = 059m. Here the focai point acts as a virtai source of iig means that we can take spherical waves converging towards F. Let us divide these waves into Fresnel zones just after they emerge from the stop. We write 7? =f? -(f-hY = (b- m)/2¥ - (b-hY 7 MIA Here r is the radius of the m'™ fresnel zone and h is the P distance to the left of the foot of the perpendicular. Thus h F Pw 2fh = -bmrh+2bh | So h = bmd/2(b-f) and P= fom/(b-f). The intensity maxima are observed when an odd number of Fresnel zones are exposed by the stop. Thus no gan where k = 1,3,5,... For the radius of the periphery of the k” zone we have 7 ante 2 VERD ita. a+b If the aperture diameter is reduced 1 times it will produce a similar deffraction pattem (reduced 1 times) if the radii of the Fresnel zones are also 7 times less. Thus re =e This requires b’ = b/n?. ce is placecd before an opaque ball, the side a dark disc followed by fringes. The the point source and the centre of the hall When the object is a finite source of transverse 169 diamension y, every point of the source has its corresponding image on the line joining that point and the centre of the ball. Thus the transverse dimension of the image is given by a y= 2y= 9mm. (b) ‘The minimum height of the irregularities covering the surface of the ball at random, at which the ball obstructs light is, according to the note at the end of the problem, com- parable with the width of the Fresnel zone along which the edge of opaque screen passes. So Vmin ~ AP To find Ar we note that 2 _ khab rte) or 2rdr=DAre= dab ay Where D = diameter of the disc (= diameter of the last Fresnel zone) and Ak = 1 Thus figig = =A 22 = 0.099 mm. Diarby 5.109 Ina zone plate an undarkened circular disc is followed by a number of alternately undarkened and darkened rings, For the proper case, these correspond to 1*, 2, 3%... Fresnel zones. Let r, = radius of the central undarkened circle. Then for this to be first Fresnel zone in the present case, we must have SL+LI-SI =2/2 Thus if r, is the radius of the periphery of the first zone Vera eVirea (arb) = iL Ss A(t,1)_ 2 1 1 -% aL a or 3 (3 3) bo ioe ; eT It is clear that the plate is acting as a lens of focal length Hab fin B= SE = Gmetre. ‘This is the principle focal length. Other maxima are obtained when SL+LI-SI= ak, a 3K’ These focal lengths are also Aly Pe 170 5.110 Just below the edge the amplitude of the wave is given by { | { a t | A= OA ~AntAg~Agt...)en?® 1 +7 (Ar~A2 + Ag—Aat -..) Here the quantity in the brackets is the contribution of various Fresnel zunes; the factor + is to take account of the division of the plate into two parts by the ledge; the phase factor 5 is given by 2n b= SB h(n-1) and takes into account the extra length traversed by the waves on the left. Using Ay~Ag+A3—Agt A ‘i we get Aa Fuse) and the corresponding intensity is (@) This is minimum when cos = -1 So b= (2k+1)x a and hm (2k) Ty Ee O12 using n = 15, = 060m h = 060(2k+1) um. (&) I = Jo/2 when cos8 - 0 or 8 = kaeF = (2k+1)F Thus in this case h = 0:30(2k+1) pm. 5.111 (a) From the Cornu’s spiral, the intensity of the first maximum is given as Trax, = 137 Ty and the intensity of the first minimum is given by Tein = 0-78 Ty so the required ratio is ui 1-76 Trin 171 (b) The value of the distance x is related to the parameter v in Fresnel’s integral by bn For the first two maxima the distances x,, x2 are related to the parameters v,, v2 by br br a=VyuR VT» Thus On -¥)V es = X_-Xy, = AX or nw 2f{ Any blu-v) From the Comu’s spiral the positions of the maxima are ¥, = 122, v2 = 234, v3 = 3-08 etc Ax 112 72 2 Thus n=5/ ) = 063 ym. 5.112 We shall use the equation written down in 5.103, the Fresnel-Huyghens formula. Suppose we want to find the intensity at P which is such that the coordinates of the edges (%-coordinates) with respect to P are x, and -x;. Then, the amplitude at P is ikrag E-fK(@) “ e We write dS = dxdy, y is to integrated from - © + 0+ c .We write reheat a) 2b (r is the distance of the t approximately (1)). We then get a ; inst ak E = 49(b) en ike 2b axe f ike 2b gy a ne ay = Al(b) j Fave f . 2. 2 2 The intensity is the square of the amplitude. In our case, at the centre yene Yo -t-V a? no Yo bA 2 " Obk ~ (a = width of the strip = 0-7 mm, b = 100cm, = 0:60pm) At, say, the lower edge v= 0, v= 128 Thus ° 22 ~06 ined 1 7 1 2 Sei ?aus f ei*?du 5-C(064)) + 775(064)) Teentre | 064 Sn 2 2 Tage |” (1-C (128) +(1-S (8) ‘ee i eA ayy f eo itteg [is mens where sv) = f sin au ° Rough evaluation of the integrals using cornu’s spiral gives destin 3g Teage (We have we feos du = fointEau - 5 C (0-64) = 0-62, $ (0-64) = 0-15 C (1-28) = 0-65 S (1-28) = 0-67 173 5.113 If the aperture has width h then the parameters (v, - v) associated with (#2. -3)e given by j vet VX -aivaer me The intensity of light at O on the screen is obtained as the b square of the amplitude A of the wave at O which is y f 4-4, Aa T= 2h((C(v) P+(S(v)) where C(v) and S(v) have been defined above and Ip is the intensity at O due to an infinitety wide (v = © ) aperture for then 2 12(() By definition v corresponds to the first minimum of the intensity. This means v=, #90 2 1 1 +t )= 20x50. h+hh when we increase h to h+Ah, the corresponding v, = relates to the second minimum of intensity, From the comu’s spiral v. = 2-75 Thus Ah =V2b% (v-v4) = O85V2bK 2 2 Ah 1 0-70 1 a= (35) 26 - (53) Txoghm 7 0565 um 5.114 Let a = width of the recess and a a 06 vaty -—26__ 2 NOR V2bR V2x077x 065 be the parameter along Cornu’s spiral corresponding to the half-width of the recess. The amplitude of the diffracted wave is given by = 0:60 [ ae sua? edna fen!” cu | ele fet’? dusf ei? dusfe “| where 6 = 22 (n-ija yan) is the extra phase due to the recess. (Actually an extra | le phase e~!® appears outside the recess. When we take it A 0 out and absorb it in the constant we get the expression written). a Thus the amplitude is Vv 174 const |(C (v) - iS (uv) e! + t-cw -i $-50 From the Cornu’s spiral, the coordinates corresponding to the parameter v = 0-60 arc C(v) = 057, S(v) = 013 so the intensity at O is proportional to ay pie . 2 | [(057-0:13i)e 7 0.07 - 1037] | = (057° +0-137) +007 +037 + (0:57 - 0-13 1) (-0-07 + 037i) e!* + (0-57 + 0-13 1) (- 0-07 - 1037i)e7!® ‘We write 0-57 F013 im 0-585 27% op = 17:89 - 0:07 # 0:37i= 6377 e*!? B = 100-7° Thus the cross term is 2x UD89 x S77 cos (0 + 88°) ~ 2x 0585 x 0377 om (845) For maximum intensity deF 2 2ka, b= 1,234... = 2(k+1)m, k= 0,1,2,3, 0 or b= 2kxe dt a 3 : n= Ay #3) SAMS a ear ! | bt t t t t 1 ! t 1 2 Using the method of problem 5.103 we can immediately write down the amplitudes at 1 and 2. We get : 0 2 * 2A Atl amplitude A, _ const | fecitt? dure if eine au ce 7 | 176 7 ae At2 amplitude Ay, const | f e~'**? dure" f e'**7 du -o 0 where veay bx is the parameter of Cornu’s spiral and constant factor is common to 1 and 2. ‘With the usual notation v 2 Ca Cly) =f cost ay 4 2 ¥ S =S(v) free nue 1 and the result feos 38 a au = finfau "2 ‘We find the ratio of imensities as (The. constants in A, and A, must he the same hy symmetry) In our case, a = 030mm, 2 = 065 um, b= 11m v = 0:30x = 050 €(050)=048 5 (050) = 0-06 : 2 02 -0-44iee 7 A -t te (2 I, | [OM TOM Et TS 14 (002-0441) V2 e!** 4 | 151 ei 002-0.48: 1+( 002-0441) V2 eH But 0-02 -0-44i = 0-44 e!*, a = 1525 rad (~ 87-4°) 2 Fy _ | A+ 0-44 xV2 xei-9%™) | 142(0-44)?+2V2 x 0-44 cos (d - 0-740) 1,” | 40-44 V2 xe OOH) | 142 (0.44) + 202 x 0-44 cos (5 + 0-740) J; is maximum when 3-0-740 = 0( modulo 2) £. 1-387 + 1.245 _ 2632 dy, 1387 + 1-245 cos (1-48 ) 15 Thus in that case = 1-75 176 5.116 We apply the formula of problem 5.103 and calculate fren ff Sf Semicinele Slit The contribution of the full 1* Fresnel zone has been evaluated in 5.103. The contribution of ‘the semi-circle is one half of it and is ~ 2B igye-it® w -iaghenit? The contribution of the slit is o90Vbx _ s 20 b Vv oh fei au ~ Vox ei Thus the contribution of the slit is 09x Soy BR e-ith-in f ein’ gf BX 0 127 = aghenikb- ins a | ett? ay = v2 Thus the intensity at the obscrvation point P on the screci is 2 ar | i+ (€ (1.27) -i8(127))| = 222 = a2? | 0-01 - 1-66 i |” = 2-76 aan? Now aj A? is the intensity due to half of 1” Fresnel zone and is therefore equal to J. (It can also be obtained by doing the x-integral over- to + « ). Thus T= 2-6 Ip. 177 $.117 From the statement of the problem we know that the width of the slit = diameter of the first Fresnel zone = 2V bA where b is the distance of the observation point from the slit. ‘We calculate the amplitudes by SLL TY evaluating the integral of problem 5.103 i We get 2 A, = 22 “f ain oie af ete dy 0 “a -Beu on f ol tau fom nan NE - Shane (c(V2)-is(v2)) Vox 4% ah aeF f e ee Meas f ene dy, VbR 24; AC L- i. Ay = ~iayreni#? 4 B®A=D (C/V) ~is(VZ)\ eH ZACK?) ES (V2 )) where the contribution of the 1™ half Fresnel zone (in A3, first term) has been obtained from the last problem. ov] Thus ina 2 (on using c(v2) = 053, s = 0-72 = a2? | -0.095 - 0-625 i |” = 0:3996 a2 12 hh-4h Is = a2 2? | - 0-095 - 0-625 i-i |” = a3? | -0.095 - 1-625 |” = 26496 a3 0? So b= 661; Thus Iythpth = 1:4:7 178 5.118 The radius of the first half Fresnel zone is Vb A/2 and the amplitude at P is obtained using problem 5.103. -WVbW o ks #| J. f ee ay dx P nvVbr~?2 o VbM2 Fie aae y se ° -nVbM2 ‘We use Je ikeb gy | avon 2 4 : al cinta ue du-V be (j -j| eit? ay. ” \ / VF ((}-2} [3-209 Ae wogxt (Lien [(2-e} -i(3-sen) | rac onthe where we have used vbw Se 0 Thus the intensity is -i) = Ab(1-i) 2 ref airtva| a7- ecm) + *(2-s~) ] 179 From Cornu’s Spiral, C(m) = C(107) = 0-76 S() = S(107) = 050 T= aN x2x(074) = 1094507 As before Ip= a3? so Im Ip. it racted wave is observed at a large distance, the resulting pattern is called Fraunhofer diffraction. The condition for this is b’« 1 where | is the distance between the slit and the screen. In practice light may be focussed on the screen with the help of a : lens (or a telescope). A=xsin¥ Consider an element of the slit which is an infinite strip of width dx. We use the formula of problem 5.103 with the following modifications. The factor . characteristic of spherical waves will be omitted. The factor K ( @) will also be dropped if we confine overselves to not too large p. In the direction defined by the angle @ the extra path difference of the wave emitted from the element at x relative to the wave emitted from the centre is A= -xsing Thus the amplitude of the wave is given by +b/2 iksing itkpsing -itebsing) J ip a dx «(ed ~e7'2 / iksing -b/2 mb. sin{ 5 8N@ "RB in x P sin? Thus [hoe o xb. where a = ** sin and Ip is a constant Minima are observed for sina = 0 but a# 0 Thus we find minima at angles given by bsing = kh, k= + 1,2 2,23,... 180 5.120 Since (a) is +ve and vanishes for bsinp = kA ic for a = kx, we expect maxin T(a) between a = +2 & a = +27, etc. We can get these values by. d sina d sina da L(8)) = eT aa 7% cos asin a =0 or tnasa ao Solutions of this transcendental equation can be obtained graphically. The first three solutions are Gy = 143-m, a) = on the +ve side. (On the negative side the solution are - a, - az, ~ a, ...) %, 03 = 3 Thus bsing, = 1-432 bsin gy = 246% bsings = 3-472 Asymptotically the solutions are Dsingn © (+2) » The relation bsin® = kA for minima (when light is incident normally on the slit ) has a simple interpretation: b sin @ is the path difference between extreme wave normals emitted at angle 0 — | When light is incident at an angle @) the path difference is b (sin O- sin Q)) and the condition of minima is b(sin@-sin0)) =kA For the first minima b(sinO-sind)) = A or sin@ = sin = * Putting in numbers 8) = 30°, A = 0-50nm b = 10um poets oe 2* 20 0,, = 33°-20' and 0., = 26°44" 181 5.122 (a) This case is analogous to the previous one except that the incident wave moves in glass of RT n. Thus the expression for the path difference for light diffracted at angle @ from the normal to the hypotenuse of the wedge is (sin 0 - nsin ©) we write @=O0+A0 3 Then for the direction of principal Fraunhofer maximum a 6 b(sin(@+A6 )-nsin®@) = 0 or AO = sin“'(nsin©)-0© Using © = 15°, n = 15 we get AO = 7:84° (0) The width of the central maximum is obtained from (A = 0°60. m, b= 10 pm) Thus ®1= sin" (nsin +5 ) = 663° a-" (mein o® . 0, = sin"! (nsino® | ~ 19416 00 =6,,;-6., = 747 $123 The path difference between waves reflected at A and B is d (cos tp - cos a) and for maxima d(cos d9-cosa) = kA, k= 0,2 12 2, In our case, k = 2 and oo, a are small in radiaus. Then a2 ot a5 rae a( 35) 2 od ~o8)d ‘Thus a - Fa | ost um 3x x -3 for @ = Te9> % iso? @ 10-°m 182 5.124 The general formula for diffraction from N slits is 5.125 a) Taf, Se NB oa sin’B where sasind p= tietbysing and N = 3 in the cases here. (a) In this case a+b = 2a so B- 2a and 1 = 48,8 (3-420? On plotting we get a curve that qualitatively looks like the one below (b) In this case a+b = 3a so B=30 a and T= 19,2 (2-4sin? 3.0)? 7 This has 3 minima between the principal maxima From the formula dsin@ = mA we have dsin 45° = 22, = 2x065 pm or d=2V2x065 pm Then for 4; = 0-50 in the third order 2V2 x 0-65 sind = 3x050 sind = —>_ ~ 0.81602 13xvV2 This gives 0 = 54-68° ~ 55° 5.126 5.127 5.128 183 The diffraction formula is din @) = mh where 0p = 35° is the angle of diffraction corresponding to order 7p (which is not yet known), Thi d= 70h 09327 us = Gre, 7% um on using A = 0535 um For the n" order we get sin® = “sin 0) = (0573576 ) nm no If m = 1, then n> no is at least 2 and sin @ >1 so n = 1 is the highest order of diffraction. It my = Z then n = 3,4,but sin U> 1 for m = 4 thus the highest order of diffraction is 3. If m = 3, then n= 45,6. For n = 6,sin@ = 2x 0:57> 1, so not allowed while for n= 5, sinO = 50573576 <1 is allowed. Thus in this case the highest order of diffraction is five as given. Hence — and d = 3x09327 = 2.7981 ~ 28um. Given that dsin 0, = dsin Q) = dsin(0, +40) = 22 Thus sin ;'c0s A 0 + cos 0, sin AO = 2sin 0; or sin 0; (2-005 A@) = cos 0; sin AO sind 0 — an 1 = J cos AO or sin 0, = ————-Sin 40__ V sin?A0+(2-cosA0)* _ sina V5~ 400s 40 Finally a = iene. V5~4cos AO ee Rw 0534 —m (a) Here the simple formula dsin® = m,2 holds. mx 0/530 Thus 15 sin = mx 0-530 sin® = 1S 184 Highest permissible m is m = 2 because sin 0>1 if m = 3. Thus sin@ = is for m = 2, This gives @ = 45° nearby. (b) Here d(sin @)-sin®) = nd Thus sin ® = sin )- 2 «cng O53 = sin 60° - nx = 086602 - n x 0-353333 . For n = 5, sin® = - 0-900645 fbr n= 6, sinO<-1. ‘Thus the highest order is = S and we get © = sin~' (- 0:900645 ) = - 64° 5.129 For the lens 1 R Fra 3) ° faa For the grating dsinO, = 4 or sin0, = cosec 0, = g, cot; = tan0, = —————— Hence the distance between the two symmetrically placed first order maxima = 2ftand, = 2R (n-1)V (4 x 1 On putting R = 20,1 = 15, d = 60pm 2 = 060m we get 8-04 cm. 5.130 The diffraction formula is easily obtained on taking account of the fact that the optical path in the glass wedge acquires a factor n (refractive index). We get 4(nsin © ~sin(©O,)) = kA Since n>0, @- Qy>@ and so Oy must be negative. We get, using @ = 30° 301 3% z 7 sin (30° - 0) = sin 486° 5.131 185 Thus Gp = - 18:6° Also for k = 1 3 gn(30° aL OS 1 p20 ge Thus 0, = 0° ‘We calculate 6, for various k by the above formula. For k = 6. —->— sin (0,-30°) = 3a 6, = 786° Fork = 7 sin (0, - 30°) = + 1=> & = 120° This is in admissible. Thus the highest order that can be observed is k=6 corresponding to O, = 786° (for k = 7 the diffracted ray will be grazing the wedge). ‘The intensity of the central Fraunhofer maximum will be zero if the waves from successive grooves (not in the same planc) differ in phase by an odd multiple of x. Then since the phase difference is :2n b= = (n-1)h 7 (an) for the central ray we have 2R (na 1)h = (#-z)2s #-na3.-- or he (4-1), ma"? } The path difference between the rays 1 & 2 is approximately (neglecting terms of order 6 ) asinOt+a-na = asin@-(n-1)a Thus for a maximum asino-(¥+5)2 - mh or asin® = (mee e3)s k=0,1,2.. \ \ . m= 0,#1,22,. The first maximum after the central minimum is obtained when m+k = 0 We'get' asin ®, -d. 186 5.132 51M When standing ultra sonic waves are sustained in the tank it behaves like a grating whose grating element is d= = = wavelength of the ultrasonic v = velocity of ultrasonic. Thus for maxima ve Y sin Oy = md On the other hand ftan6,, = mAx Assuming @,, to be small {secause aec® ) we get ay = fit dy finn Ave m — ~ sind, . ge or v= Ree Putting the values A = 0-55 um, v = 4-7 MHz f = 035m and Ax = 0-60 1073 m we easily get v = 151 km/sec. Each siar produces iis own diffraciion paiiern in ihe focai plane of the objective and these patterns are separated by angle y. As the distance d decreases the angle @ between | the -neighbouring maxima in either diffraction pattern increases (sin 0 = 4/d ). When @ becomes equal to 2 1p the first deterioration of visibility occurs because the maxima of one system of fringes coincide with the minima of the other system. Thus from —the_—condition @ = 2y and sind = Awe ger 1 a y= 30 = 37 (radians) Es Putting the values we get y = 0-06” (a) For normal incidence, the maxima are given by dsinO = nh s in ® = so sin n “Ts00 Clearly ns 2as sinO>1 forn = Thus the highest order is n = 2, Then Putting k = 2,4 = US3nm,d= 15pm = bam 1 180 we get D = 32 5 x60 = 647 ang. min/nm. 500 a (b) We write the diffraction formula as d(sin )+sin@) = kX so sinOp+ sino = k* @ = 45° Qy = 45 so sin Op + si a _ 053 G7 Te 7 0353333, we see that ks4 Thus highest order corresponds to k = 4. Now as before D = a8 50 p->& devs 8 = 12-948 ang. min/nm, 5.135 We have dsin® = kd dip k tan 0 an ax dcos@ ~ % 5.136 For the second order principal maximum. dsin@, = 2K =k or NY asin 0, =2Nn minima adjacent to this maximum occur at NM asin(0,2.40) = (2Nz1)a a or dcos 040 = 5: 188 3.137 5.138 5.139 5.140 Finally angular width of the 2° principal maximum is ~ Wdeos A, ~ yg faevay ‘On putting the values we get 11-019” of arc Using x Navin Ro Seen = Tee ~ fsind SL Dstsaehe For the just resolved waves the frequency difference ove OAL ee VROR RR” REN “ Wasin® ~ 3¢ since N d sin 0 is the path difference between waves emitted by the extremitics of the grating. 8A = -050nm a. 600 R= 5y = Gy 7 12000 (nearly) =kN On the other hand dsinO = kA [ee Thus zw sind = where / = 107? metre is the width of the grating Hence sin®@ = 12000x 2 = ae “7072 or 6 = 46". (a) We see that N = 65x 10x 200 = 13000 Now to resolve lines with 64 = 0-015 nm and A ~ 670-8 nm we must have Since 3N ) we have d = 7. = Spm so sing « KA. kx0670 d 5 189 since jsin@|s1 we must have ks 7-46 da so Kevax = 7 ~ x Nd_l Thus Roar * kya N= 91000 = 5% = > where | = 65cm is the grating width. : a 670 x Finally B dma = R= Sq0g 7 O7HM = 7pm mT. 5.141 Here A. 5893 Ae Oke 06e . -2 so Ne 5993 = 1b 3g9g 7 ~ 0509: mm (b) To resolve a doublet with A = 460-0nm and 6A = 0-13 nm in the third order we must have R_ 460 N= 3" 3x003 7” This means that the grating is Nd = 1179 x0-0509 = 60-03 mm wide = 6 cm wide. $.142 (a) From dsin@ = kr we get o0= Aah On the other hand x= fsind so dx = feos050 = Lay For f = 080m, 02 = 003 nmr and 1 4 = 535mm 6um ifk=1 we get ox {hin ifk=2 (b) Here N = 25% 250 = 6250 a _ 310-169 and Fe AS - 10330 >.0 and so to resolve we need k = 2 For k = 1 gives an R.P. of only 6250. 190 5.143 AYES Suppose the incident light consists of two wavelengths 4 and 4+ which are just resolved by the prism. Then by Rayleigh’s criterion, the maximum of the line of wavelength > must coincide with the first minimum of the line of wavelength 2 + 6 2. Let us write both conditions in terms of the optical path differences for the extreme rays : For the light of wavelength bn-(DC+CE) =0 For the light of wavelength 4 +82 b(n+dn)-(DC+CE) = A+8K because the path difference between extreme rays equals for the first minimum in a single slit diffraction (from the formula asin® = A). Hence binmwd dn and Reded ae =b sx| - an 5.144 (a) erR-> = 2Bo/sS For b= sa. B=00ium? 2, = 0-434um = 5x104um R, = 1-223 x 10* for dy = 0656 pm Ry = 0-3542 x 104 (b) To resolve the D-lines we require 5893 Re- =egees =: 982 Thus 982 = — ( p = 982% (05893 = Bm = 1005 x 10' wm = 1-005 cm 5.145 b dn Sy | 7 EN = 2% 10,000 bx010nm™* = 2x 10° b = 2x10°um = 02m = 20cm. 191 5.146 Resolving power of the objective D 5x10"? = 2-2 122% 122x055 x10 Let (AY mun be the minimum distance between two points at a distance of 3-0 km which the = 7-45 x 10° (AY wan | 1-22 1 3x10" D 7-45 x 10° 3x10 7-45 x 10° = 004026 m = 4-03 cm. x or (AY on = 5.147 The limit of resolution of a reflecting telescope is determined by diffraction from the mirror and obeys a formula similar to that from a refracting telescope. The limit of resolution is 11222 | (AY) RR" D "TL where L = distance between the earth and the moon = 384000 km Then putting the values 4 = 0-55 um, D = 5m we get (AY am = 51-6 metre 5.148 By definition, the magnification rp _ angie subtended by the image at tie eye y’ * ™ angle subtended by the object at the eye At the limit of resolution ye 1B where D = diameter of the objective 1222 On the other hand to be visible to the eye p’ = dy where dy = diameter of the pupil Thus to avail of the resolution offered by the telescope we must have 122A / 122K _D Te ree | “Da dy Hence Tn = 2 = San = 125 S49 c A Bt 90-L B a 192 5.150 Let A and B be two points in the field of a microscope which is represented by the lens C D. Let A’, B’ be their image points which are at equal distances from the axis of the Jens CD. Then all paths from A to A’ are equal and the extreme difference of paths from A to B’ is equal to ADB'-ACB' = AD+DB'-(AC+CB’) = AD+DB'-BD-DB' +BC+CB’-AC-CB’ (as BD+DB' = BC+CB') = AD-BD+BC-AC = 2A Boos (90°-a) = 24 Bsinc From the theory of diffraction by circular apertures this distance must be equal to 122% when B’ coincides with the minimum of the diffraction due to A and A’ with the minimum of the diffraction due to B, Thus AB = 22% . 961% 2sina sina Here 2 a1 is the angle subtended by the objective of the microscope at the object. Substituting the values 0-61 x 055 AB - SOs am = 140 pm. Suppose diyq = minimum separation resolved by the microscope w = angle subtended at the eye by this object when the object is at the least distance of distinct vision Ig (= 25 cm). \y! = minimum angular separation resolved by the eye = ds 0 From the previous problem vi angle subtended at the eye by the image T = magnifying power = sisie subtended at the eye by the object when the object is at the least distance of distinct vision Z h). 2 2[Z) sme I 25 Thus Pa = 2( gsm = 2 gGpx024 30 5.151 5.152 193 Path difference = BC-AD = a (cos 60° - cos a) For diffraction maxima a (cos 60° — cosa) = kX, aL since h = 2a, we get cosa = and we get ke-1, cosa= 4+2 = 09, a= 26° k= 0, cosas b= 05,a = 60° k= 1,cosa= 4-2 = O1,a = 84 4 0 5 7 -03,0 = 1075 8. 07,0 = 1344 Other values of k are not allowed as they lead to [cos a|>1. ‘We give here a simple derivation of the condition for diffraction maxima, known as Laue equations. It is easy to see form the above figure that the path difference between waves scattered by nearby scattering centres P, and P, is Daeg eee a(R) a rs. — is the radius vector P,P, . For Here 7” maxima this path difference must be an integer _ multiple of for any two two dunensional lattice with X- rays > incident normally 7%5"= 0. Taking 20 successively - nearest neighbours in the x- &y ~ directions 3 We get the equations A, B 4 acosa = hh boosh = kd Here cos a and cos f are the direction cosines of the ray with respect to the x & y axes of the two dimensional crystal. cosa. = ——4%___ sin( an" 57) = 028735 Vax +4? 194 5.153 so using h = k = 2 we get a= = 0-278 nm 40x2 "28735 ™ ‘Similarly cos Bp = ——AY sin (a 3) = 019612 V(ayy var b= Spm = 0-408 nm cos B Suppose a,6, and y are the angles between the direction to the diffraction maximum and the directions of the array along the periods @, b, and c respectively ( call them x, y, & z axes). Then the value of these angles can be found from the following familiar conditions a(1-cosa) = kA boos = kh and ccosy = ksh where k,, ky, ks are whole numbers (+, -, or 0) (These formulas are, in effect, Laue equations, see any text book on modem physics). Squaring and adding we get on using cos” + cos” B + cosy = 1 ky 7 ? k; 7 2h 2-2e00=|(4) (3) (2) |e at a b c a h 2h/a [aay + (asa he (kay) Knowing a, b, c and the integer ky, ky, k3 we can find a, B,y as well as 0 Thus The unit cell of NaCl is shown below. In an infinite crystal, there are four N a* and four PP CI ions per wait cell, Gach ion middle of the edge is shared by four unit Lake” | | ceils; cach ion on ihe face cenire by iwo unit cells, the ion in the middle of the cell by ‘one cell only and finally cach ion on the corner by eight unit cells.) Thus M_oo3 ay 4 where M = molecular weight of NaCI in gms = 585 gms Na = Avogadro number = 6-023 x 10% Thus fan V =H - 290A The natural facet of the crystal is one of the faces of the unit cell. The interplanar distance d= ja = 2822A 5.155 5.156 195, Thus 2dsna = 2 So d= dsina = 2822Ax YS = 244 pm. 2 When the crystal is rotated, the incident monochromatic beam is diffracted from a given crystal plane of interplanar spacing d whenever in the course-of rotation the value of @ satisfies 2, a 65 . We have the equations 2dsin @, = k,A and 2dsin@, = kd But 1-20, = 4-20,+a or 20; = 20,-a so 0 = 0,42. Z This 2{ sin, cos $+ ens 0, sin | = bh iA % Ke? IL Ke? RON — NA o=3 Hence 2dssin 5 cos = (t-hies 7-292 Ke also 2dsin $ sin 8, - ky dein ” Squaring and adding 2dsin$ = (47 +48 2h kos) h h v2 Hence d= [Hee -thheng| 2sin 5 Substituting a = 60°, k= 2, ky = 3,4 = 174pm we get d= 81pm = 281A (and not 0-281 pm as given in the book.) (Lattice parameters are typically in A’s and not in fractions of a pm.) In a polycrystalline specimen, microcrystals are oriented at various angles with respect to one another. The microcrystals which are oriented at certain special angles with respect to the incident beam produce diffraction maxima that appear as rings. ‘The radial of these rings are given by r=ltan2a where the Bragg’s law gives 2dsina = kd In our case k = 2, d = 155pm, 0 = 178pm soa = sin 228 _ 66° and 7 = 352 om. 155 196 5.4 POLARIZATION OF LIGHT 5.157 Natural light can be considered to be an incoherent mixture ss ~N \ of two plane polarized light of intensity I, / 2 with mutually perpendicular planes of vibration. The screen consisting of the two polaroid half-planes acts as an opaque. = —____» half-screen for one or th¢ other of these light waves, The resulting diffraction pattern has the alterations in intensity (in the illuminated region) characteristic of a straight edge on both sides of the boundary. bou pander! At the boundary the intensity due to either component is {ei 2) fy and the total intensity is — . (Recall that when light of intensity /o is incident on a straight edge, the illuminance in sont of the edge is Ig/ 4). 5.158 '(a) Assume first that there is no polaroid and the amplitude due to the entire hole which extends over ATTEN. the first Fresnel zone is A; 2 Ai Then, we know, as usual, Jo = “J, ‘When the polaroid is introduced as shown above, each j half transmits only the corresponding polarized light. If the full hole were covered by one polaroid the amplitude transmitted will be (A; / V2). ‘Therefore the amplitude transmitted in the present case will be Ay , => through either half. v2 Since these transmitted waves are polarized in mutually perpendicular planes, the total intensity will be Pay at f\ 2a) dae circumference of the circle limiting the first half of the Fresnel zone. {itis however i is ahape; hov makes sense.) From (5.103) and the previous problems we sce that the amplitudes of the waves trans- mitted through the two parts is 5.159 5.160 5.161 197 Lisi) and 2v2 au and the intensity is ~i) 4 “|e lage A? - Fr When the polarizer rotates with angular velocity w its instantaneous principal direction makes angle wt from a reference direction which we choose to be along the direction of vibration of the plane polarized incident light. The transmitted flux at this instant is By cos? wt and the total energy passing through the polarizer per revolution is T J roe0s*wear, Te2x/o 0 =O = =06mJ. o Let Ip = intensity of the incident beam. Then the intensity of the beam transmitted through the first Nicol prism is h= ih and through the 24 prism is — alm 5- (15 leo oo (ay Through the N* prism it will be Iy = Ip cos? p 1 - = Fhocos*4- Yq Hence fraction transmitted 1, = Xan = 4 cos’ = 012 for N= 6. ho 2 and p= 30° When natural light is incident on the first polaroid, the fraction transmitted will be ie (only the component polarized parallel to the principal direction of the polaroid will go). 198 5.162 5.163 The emergent light will be plane polarized and on passing through the second polaroid will be polarized in a different direction (corresponding to the principal direction of the 2" polaroid) and the intensity will have decreased further by t cos? p. In the third polaroid the direction of polarization will again have to change by @ thus only a fraction t cos” p will go through. Finally T= Ix a cos* Thus the intensity will have decreased I, eo . ? . 60.2 times I Pooste for 1 = 081, 9 = 60°. Suppose the partially polarized light consists of natural light of intensity /, and plane polarized light of intensity /, with direction of vibration parallel to, say, x - axis. Then when a polaroid is used to transmit it, the light transmitted will have a maximum intensity th he when the principal direction of the polaroid is parallel tox — axis, and will have a minimum : 1 5 i intensity 51, when the principal direction is 1” t0 x~ axis. Thus Pe Fou —foin #2 Tax * Tain” Th +Tp so ee i,” 1-P ~ 075 3 If, as above, I, = intensity of natural component J, = intensity of plane polarized component then Joa * Hh th and I fe = ththcos*o so fa daa ( 1-3} Zax [12 Ty = 2Igax| 1-[ 1-= ] cosec?p | = == cos to Boal t-(t-q}omre] = Fela a_i I, ‘7 - Then 2 ae accent ees Rh” (1 cotw\si-b 1 nes2e n n 5.164 199 On putting n = 30, p = 60° we get p.—*—__4_o8 1+3x$ Let us represent the natural light as a sum of two mutually perpendicular components, both with intensity J). Suppose that cach polarizer transmits a fraction oy of the light with oscillation plane parallel to the prinicipal direction of the polarizer and a fraction ct, with oscillation plane perpendicular to the principal direction of the polaizer. Then the intensity of light transmitted through the two polarizers is equal to Ay = af lo+az Io when their principal direction are parallel and Ty = 0, Gg Ip + 0% Oy Ig = 2.04, 19 Ig when they are crossed. But Oy = Op nl so ae. +O nei (a) Now the degree of polarization produced by either polarizer when used singly is Pyo= Trax * Trin (assuming, of course, ay > a2 ) " -V2et .V 2 «0: Thus Po att a 7 995 (b) When both polarizer are used with their principal directions parallel, the transmitted light, when analysed, has maximum intensity, Ina, = @2Jy and minimum intensity, Img = 02 Jy 2 OP-aF _ ay-a (a tory ap+ap Ot ara Vat (+ a) so Pm net az+a? y-1 Cale nei n 200 5.165 If the principal direction N of the Nicol is along A or B, the intensity of light transmitted is the same whether the Tight incident is one with oscillation plane N, or one with Np, Tf N makes an angle 8 with A as shown then the fractional difference in intensity transmitted (when the light incident is Ny or Np ) is 2(g9°_ 2_ -~cos7(90° + 2 cx? (o0r- 2-9} ~ co? [o0" + 2-06) {An - Ths oxs?(o0"-§] si? ($+00)-su? (E00) a 2sin 3-200 $6@ ao - +2 — - scot £39 sin? $ If N makes an angle 5 p(<<@) with B then 2 2 2eon£.2.sing/2.A (44) _ £08" (p/2- 8) — cos? (9/240) _ 2 p/h q Lb = 4tang/25 7 08" 9/2 cos? 9/2 eee Al AL Thus ne 7) (7) = cot” p/2 (7), / (7), or @ = 2tan” 7 This gives p = 11-4° for 9 = 100. 5.166 Fresnel equations read 2 2 Gj) 0, - 0 7 oe ie) t= hy tan 1 - 02) tan? (0, +0) 8, = 8, since by Snell’s law * sin? (0, + 02) sin 8, = nsin @, Thus & /1, cannot be zero. However, if 0, + 8 = 90°, /'\, = O and the reflected light is polarized in this case. The condition for this is sin, = nsinO,, = nsin(%0°-0,) or tan 8, = 1 8, is called Brewsta’s angle. The angle between reflected light and refracted light is 90° in this case. 201 5.167 (a) From Fresnel’s equations sin? (0, - 0) at sin? ( ©, + 8) at Brewste’s angle ry =0 I’, = I, sin? (0, -0) - 4.1 ( sin 8, c0s 8; ~c08 8, sin 8s Now tan 0, = 7», sind, = a Viel 1 cos 8, = —— , sin 8, = cos 0, Vel cos 0, = sin 0, r= ry Thus reflection coefficient = p = =~ 2 1 7 =1(2=1) . oo7 nei 2 on pulling n= 15 (b) For the refracted light 2 1 wei rater bie (S) | 1, 4r -4,;_4" 2 (Pail al Nn zl at the Brewster’s angle. Thus the degree of polarization of the refracted light is petits. (41)? - 49? Tyla Pell ean . (-1¥ 2 2 +1¥-(r-1P 1-e On putting p = 9-074 we get P = 0-080. 202 5.168 5.169 3.170 The energy transmitted is, by conservation of energy, the difference between incident energy and the reflected energy. However 90 the intensity is affected by the change of the cross section of the beam by refraction. Let Aj, Ay, Ay be the cross sections of the incident, reflected and transmitted beams. te Then : y NN cos r Are Arcos But at Brewster’s angle r = W-i so A, = Ajtani = nA; 1-p)i Thus fee The amplitude of the incident component whose oscillation vector is perpendicular to the plane of incidence is ‘A, = Agsing and similarly Al] = Agcos @ a? ; -8,; Then 1, = ip BO) 62 sin? (0, +8) 2 sin 0; cos 0, cos 0; sin 02]. » -h\|s : sin | ‘sin 8, cos 8 + cos 6, sin 8, ? 1 e-z Putting x = 1-33 for water we get p = 0:0386 Since natural light is incident at the Brewster’s angle, the reflected light 1 is completely polarized and P, = 1. Similarly the ray 2 is incident on glass air surface at al Brewster’s angle { tan7 n) sc 3 is also completely polarized. Thus P; = 1 Now as in 5.167 (b) P)= rary = 0087 if p = 0-080 203 to "To A3(1-29)To g P-2pg 5.171 (a) In this case from Fresnel’s equations sin? (6, - @,) Tel + sin? (0; + 02) 2 2 we get he (e=3] In = Ply say nr +1) then Ip = (1-P)lo, b= p(1-P)Io ( p is invariant under the substitution n—> + ) 16 n* Ph = 07261. Ge+iy? = (b) Suppose 9’ = coefficient of reflection for the component of light whose electric vector oscillates at right angles to the incidence plane. finally In= (1-p)h = ea From Fresnel’s equations p+ (34 n+l Then in the transmitted beam we have a partially polarized beam which is a superposition of two (|| & 1) components with intensities 1 1 zh&zh(1-p'? p- 1-(1-p'? _ (?+1)*-16n* _ 1-0-726 1+(1-p')?) (n?+1)'+16n' — 1+0-726 Thus ~ 0-158 204 5.172 (a) When natural light is incident on a glass plate at Brewster’s angle, the transmitted light has AY = Jo/2 and ft = 7 aon yl’? = ob /2 where Ip is the incident intensity (see 5.171 a) After passing through the 2° plate we find m ah m 1 Aim = zl and "= (oh Plo Thus after N plates i" = 5h 1g = a" Fy 1eot® Qn Hence. P= —— where = — 1+0°% 1+n* ‘4 3 () af = 0726 for n = 5. Thus P(N = 1)= 0-158, P(N = 2) = 0-310 P(N = 5) = 0663, P(N = 10) = 0922. 5.173 (a) We decompose ihe naiurai light hiv i Ly or wa tensity fj = 5 %o = i, wise | | has its electric vector oscillating parallel to the plane of incidence and 1 has the same 1” to it. By Fresnel’s equations for normal incidence My sin?(0)-0)) 4 (01-0) _ (ni y= dim lim - =p Toro sin2(0,4+0)) — oo | +8 n+l 1 {n-1\ similarly we “(aet] wo iwy Componenis Thus (b) The reflected light at the first surface has the intensity t= plo Then the transmitted light has the intensity zt la\ .. t= (1-p)lo == iG At the second surface where light emerges from glass Io into air, the reflection coefficient is again p because an — 1 p is invariant under the substitution n > = n Thus J5=p(1~p)Jo and /4= (1-9) Io. 5.174 5.175 205 For N lenses the loss in luminous flux is then ae = 1-(1-p)™ = 0.335 for N = 5 Suppose the incident light can be decomposed into waves with intensity }, & I, with oscillations of the electric vectors paraiiei and perpendicuiar 10 the piane of incidence. For normal inciderice we have from Fresnel equations 2 a-) == (tat 1 Bee, tl ned where we have used sin @ = @ for small 0. f= 2 Similarly w(t +1) Then the refracted wave will be 4n! ry = jj ——s and 1," = 1, ——> i hoa : “(n' +1) At the interface with glass 2 1 = 1" ( 2 5 ) , similarly for 1j'” we see that yore + = ifn! = Wn, similarly for || component. LW This shows that the light reflected as a fraction of the incident light is the same on the two surfaces if n’ = Vn. Note:- The statement of the problem given in the book is incorrect. Actual amplitudes are not equal; only the reflectance is equal. Here 0, = 45° 2 2 = 0-4714 “3vz 3 @, = sin” 10-4714 = 281° sin” (0; - 02) ? (01 + 02) Hence yah a 1 sin 16-9° 1 (Se = zlox 00928 5.176 5.177 1 1, (tant169) 1 Ki 1 t75 410-0085 Thus (a) Degree of polarization P of the reflected light 0-0838 * oroos 7 081 (b) By conservation of energy I= Flex 0-907 vo Tif = y40ox 09915 Thus 0-0838 " Teoaz ” 0044 The wave surface of a uniaxial crystal consists of two sheets of which one is a sphere while ‘the other is an ellipsoid of revolution. The optic axis is the line joining the points of contact. To makes the appropriate Huyghen’s construction we must draw the relevant section of the wave surface inside the crystal and determine the directions of the ordinary and extraordinary rays. The result is as shown in Fig. 42 (a, b & c) of the answers Ina uniaxial crystal, an unpolarized beam of light (or even a polarized one) splits up into O (for ordinary) and E (for extraordinary) light waves. The direction of vibration in the O and E waves are most easily specified in terms of the O and E principal planes. The principal plane of the ordinary wave is defined as the plane containing the O ray and the optic axis. Similarly the principal plane of the E wave is the plane containing the E ray and the optic axis. in terms of these pianes the foiiowing is uue : Tae O vibrations are perpendicular to the principal plane of the O ray while the E vibrations are in the principal plane of the E ray. When we apply this definition to the wollaston prism we find the following : (cxaggerated.) 5.178 207 When unpolarized light enters from the left the O and E waves travel in the same direction but with different speeds. The O ray on the left has its vibrations normal to the plane of the paper and it becomes E ray on crossing the diagonal boundary of the two prism similarly the E tay on the left becomes O ray on the right. In this case Snell’s law is applicable only approximately. The two rays are incident on the boundary at an angle @ and in the right prism the ray which we have called O ray on jue right cimeiges at -11658 1 s3.910 [ase x3 = 3391 ile sin™*—sin 6 = sin n where we have used n, = 11658, mo = 1-486 and @ = 30°. Similarly the E ray on the right emerges within the prism at sin“ sin @ = 26:62° This means that the O ray is incident at the boundary between the prism and air at 33-91 - 30° = 391° and will emerge into air with a deviation of sin~* my sin 3-91° = sin~' (1-658 sin 391°) = 6-49° The E ray will emerge with an opposite deviation of in * (n, sin ( 30° - 2662" )) = sin”! ( 1-486 sin 338°) = 5-03° 3 = 6-49" + 5-03" The wave is moving in the direction of 2~ axis (@ Hae £, = Bes (wi-kz)}, £, = Esin(wi-kz) 2 2 aE z Er FP so the .iz of the electric vector moves along a circle. For the right handed coordinate system this represents circular anticlockwise polarization when observed towards the in- coming wave. (b) Ey = Ecos(wt-kz), Ey > Feas(or-42+3) & 1 1 80 = = — cos(wt-kz)- —= sin(wt-kz) EB vz v2 o 5 1G) 1(, & E-yzE 2\° 7g? E} E? EE, or ey te fy Pye 1 208 This is clearly an ellipse. By comparing with the previous case (compare the phase of Ey in the two cases) we sce this represcuts elliptical clockwise polarization when viewed towards the incoming wave. We write the equations as E,+By = aBeu(or-kz+ 3 eos 8 8 ~E, = +2Esin{ wr—k2+ 2 E,+E, E,-E, Thus +[——] «1 x eeu t 2E cost 2E sing Since cos ¢ > sin § , the major axis is in the direction of the straight line y = x. (©) E, = Ecos(wt-kz) E, = Ecos(wt-kz+m) = -Ecos(wt-kz) Thus the top of the electric vector traces the curve E,~-E, which is a straight line (y = -x). It corresponds to plane polarization. 5.179 For quartz n, = 1593} ae 14) for A = 589nm. to its optic the left divides itself into O and E waves which move in the a direction with different speeds and as a result acquire a phase difference. This phase difference is d= 2E (nema where d= thickness of the plate. In general this makes the emergent light elliptically polarized. (a) For emergent light to experience only rotation of polarization plane 8 = (2k+1)x, k= 0,1,2,3 - a For this d = (2k+1)=——— ; 12 (me=m) 589 +589 = (241) Gum = (2k) mm The maximum value of (2k+1) for which this is less than 0:50 is obtained from ‘Then we must take k= Zand d= 15x 58 = 0.4908 mm 5.180 5.181 209 (b) For circular polarization 0 = = modulo 2m ie. 0 = (4k41)F sa Wa (4bs1) 2” (4441) 2589 ( g ( 6 0:50 x 36 Now Sap 7 30°56 The nearest integer less than this which is of the form 4k +1 is 29 for k=7. For this = 0-4749 mm As in the previous problem the quartz plate introduces a phase difference 0 between the O &E components. When 5 = x/2 (modulo x ) the resultant wave is circularly polarized. In this case intensity is independent of the rotation of the rear prism. Now 2x 8 = (ne Mod = 2B pon9 605 x 1073 m Fr 8009 x OS x 10°F =F ain um For X = 0:50pm. 5 = 182. The relevant values of 5 have to be chosen in the form (#+3}=- Fore = 17,16, 15 we get These are the values of A which lie between 0-50 pm and 0-60 um. As in the previous two problems the quartz plate will introduce a phase difference 5. The light on passing through the plate will remain plane polarized only for 5 = 2kx or (2k+1) x. In the latter case the plane of polarization of the light incident on the plate will be rotated by 90° by it so light passing through the analyser (which was originally crossed) will be a maximum. Thus dark bands will be observed only for thase 4 for which b= 2kx 2x Now 0 = 22m, =m) d = 5% x 009 x 15x 1073 m = BEC in um) For dh = 0:55 we get d = 49097 Choosing 8 = 48 x, 46 x, 44m, 42m we get 1 = 05625 um, A= 05870 ym, A= 06136 pm and 2-0-6429 pm. These are the only values between 0:55 wm and 0-66 wm. Thus there are four bands. 210 5.182 5.183 5.184 Here 3- 2R 0.009 x 0-25 m = 452 in um. We check that for L= 486nm 8 = 1055 k= 5294nm 8 = 85 A= O923nm 0 = OS These are the only values of 2 eo Between crossed Nicols, a quartz plate, whose optic axis makes 45° with the principal directions of the Nicols, must introduce a phase difference of (2 k +1) x so as to transmit the incident light ( of that wavelength) with maximum intensity. For in this case the plane of polarization of the light emerging from the polarizer will be rotated by 90° and will go through the analyser undiminished. Thus we write for light of wavelengths 643 nm 2x 0-009 . x d(mm) x 107* 0643 x10" 4") 18xd ~ Deas 7 (2k+1) @) To nearly block light of wavelength 564 nm we require 18nd , 0564 = (2K )x 2 We must have 2k’ > 2k +1. For the smallest value of d we take 2k’ = 2k +2. Thus 0-643 (2k+1) = 0564x(2k+2) so 0-079 x 2k = 0564 x 2 - 0-643 or 2k = 6139 Ifa ray traverses the wedge at a distance x below the joint, @ then the distance that the ray moves in the wedge is 2xtan $ and this cause a phase difference b- ZR (n,m) 2xtan 2 between the E and O wave components of the ray. For a general x the resulting light is elliptically polarized and is not completely quenched by the analyser polaroid. The condition for complete quenching is 3 = 2km— dark fringe 5.185, 211 That for maximum brightness is 8 = (2k+1) — bright fringe. The fringe width is given by Ax= a © 2(n,— My) tan > 2 Hence ( )-—_+_ ne~ 0) = Fax tan 0/2 using tan(@/2) = tan 175° = 0-03055, 2 = 055m and Ax = 1mm, we get At=Io Nil Light emerging from the first polaroid is plane polarized Ne D> opt with amplitude A where N, is the principal direction of the A Ro polaroid and a vibration of amplitude can be resolved into * o two vibration : E wave with vibration along the optic axis of amplitude A cos@ and the wave with vibration perpendicular to the optic axis and having an amplitude A sing. These acquire a phase difference 8 on passing through the plate. The second polaroid transmits the ws}\ N components : 2 A.cos pcos and Asin @ sin Ni What emerges from the second polaroid is a set of two plane polarized waves in the same direction and same plane of polarization but phase difference 8. They interfere and produce a wave of amplitude squared Rs A? [ cos” cos” 9 + si sin’? g + 2.cos @ cos g sing sin g cos 8 J, using —_ cos” (p - g') = (cos @ cos g + sin p sin gy’)? = cos” p cos” gy + sin” @ sin’ g + 2.cos @ cos g sin @ sin we easily find R? = A7[ cot (9! )-sin2 sing sin Now A? = [9/2 and R? = I'so the result is 28 in? = 2 polaroids : Here @-@'=90" or g’=p-90° and Sie eee Special cases :- Crosse 2g! =2p- 180° I-I,= 1 yin? 2 sin? 212 Parallel polaroids : Here p = ! and Teh 2h( 1st 20s? With 8 = 2, » the conditions for the maximum and minimum are casily found to be that shown in the answer, N 5.186 Let the circularly polarized light be resolved into plane wow polarized components of amplitude Ay with a phase } ail 7 E wave Uitterenve F between then. On passing through the crystal the phase difference in the direction N are respectively ‘Ap cos @ and Ag sin They interfere to produce the amplitude squared Moai eute +A} sin? #243 cos osin cos (6+ 5) = Ag (1+sin2@sind) Hence I= Ip(1+sin2psind) Here Jp is the intensity of the light transmitted by the polaroid when there is no crystal plate. 5.187 (a) The light with right circular polarization (viewed against the oncoming light, this means that the light vector is moving clock wise.) becomes plane polarized on passing through a quarter-wave plate. In this case the direction of oscillations of the electric vector of the clectromagnetic wave forms an angle of + 45° with the axis of the crystal OO’ (see Fig (a) below). In the case of left hand circular polarizations, this angle will be — 45° ( Fig (b)). 45%; 454 “of 0 (v) If for any position of the plate the rotation of the polaroid (located behind the plate) does not bring about any variation in the intensity of the transmitted light, the incident light 213 rotating the analyzer polaroid for some position of the quarter wave plate, the incident light is circularly polarized. If it varies but does not drop to zero, it must be a mixture of natural and circularly polarized light. 5.188 The light from P is plane polarized with its electric vector vibrating at 45° with the plane of the paper. At first the sample S is absent. Light from P can he resolved into components vibrating in and perpendicular to the plane of the paper. The former is the E ray in the left half of the Babinet compensator and the latter is the O ray. In the right half the nomenclature is the apposite In the compensator the two components acquire Pp a pahse difference which depends on the relative position of the ray. If the ray is incident at a distance r above the central line through the compensator then the E ray acquires a phase FR (ng (1-2) 4m9(142)) an © x while the O ray acquires l 2x x SE (mo(tn a) tg (14) tan © so the phase difference between the two reays is n,- Me) 2xtan®@ = 6 we get dark fringes when ever 8 = 2kx because then the emergent light is the same as that coming from the polarizer and is quenched by the analyser. {If 8 - (2k+1) 2, we get bright fringes because in this case, the plane of polarizaton of the emergent hight has rotated by 90° and is therefore fully transmitted by the analyscr.} = 2]mp=me [tan © (b) If the fringes are displaced upwards by 5.x, then the path difference introduced by the sample between the O and the F rays must be such as to be exactly cancelled by the compensator. Thus 2ELd(nly- ny) +(my- no) 28xtanO] = 0 or d(n'o-n'y) = 2(mp- m9) bxO using tan@x ©, 214 5.189 Light polarized along the x-direction (ie. one whose electric vector has only an.x component) and propagating along the z-direction can be decomposed into left and right circularly polarized light in, accordance with the formula 1 see . E, = 7 (E418) +5 (Ey-iB,) On passing through a distance / of an active medium these acquire the phases dy = BEng and 8 = 2% yl so we get for the complex amplitude der E = +(e 4k, yee dce, Zz 7 Zz dard, =r [Petia iE, )e782 rer 2 * [Besos 3-Es sin? ] , 8 a - dy. 2 Apart from an over all phase ( dz + ;)/2 (which is irrelevant) this represents a wave whose of ol x zr E(AM)L, An = |ng-ml By definition this equals a / so An= Sh, 7 5895 x 107° mm x 21-72 deg/mm x = x Typ rad) = 0-71x10-* 5.190 Plane polarized light on entering the wedge decomposes into right and left citcularly polarized light which travel with different speeds in P and the emergent light gets its 8 plane of polarization rotated by an angle which depends on the distance travelled. Given that Ax = fringe width Axtan @ = difference in the path length traversed by two rays which form successive bright or dark fringes. 5 2x Thus Sle - my [AxtanO = 2% P Pol BAR. g/Axund = 20-8 ang deg/m m Thus a= 5.191 5.192 215 Let x = distance on the polaroid Pol as measured from a maximum. Then a ray that falls at this distance traverses an extra distance equal to + xtan@ and hence a rotation of taxtnd = 2 By Malus’ law the intensity at this point will be oo i): ~ Ax If Jp= intensity of natural light then dh- intensity of light emerging from the polarizer nicol. Suppose the quartz plate rotates this light by @, then the analyser will tansmit 1 zo cos? (90-9) = Fhosin? @ N, L pol of this intensity. Hence np = in sin? gy ‘ or @ = sin" ¥Zn = No(Anut} But p=ad so das 2 sin“ 1V2q For minimum d we must take the principal. value of inverse sine. Thus using = 17 ang deg/m m. pig = 299mm. For light of wavelength 436 nm ALS? xd = kx 180° = 2kx90° (Light will be completely cut off when the quartz plate rotates the plane of polarization by a multiple of 180°.) Here d = thickness of quartz plate in mm. For natural incident light, half the light will be transmitted when the quartz rotates light by an odd multiple of 90°. Thus 11° xd = (2K +1)x 90° 4s 4 Now Sra 7 13344 5 Thus k= 2and = 1 and d= PL s67mm. AS 216 193 Two effects are involved here : rotation of plane of polarizatin by sugar solution and the effect of that rotation on the scattering of light in the transverse direction. The latter is shown in the figure given below. It is easy to see from the figure that there will be no scattering of light in this transverse direction if the incident light has its electric vector parallel to the line of sight. In such a situation, we expect fringes to occur in the given experiment. From the given data we see that in a distance of 50 cm, the rotation of plane of polarization must be 180°. Thus the specific rotation constant of sugar * 50d m x ( 500 gm/ce ) 72? ang deg/( dm ‘gm/cc) (1dm = 10cm) 5.194 (a) in passing through the Kerr cell the two perpendicular components of the electric field will acquire a phase difference. When this phase difference equals 90° the emergent light will be circularly polarized because the two perpendicular components O & E have the same magnitude since it is given that the direction of electric field E in the capacitor forms an angle of 45° with the principal directions of then icols. In this case the intensity of light that emerges from this system will be independent of the rotation of the analyser prism, Now the phase difference intraduced is given hy 2n 2 = 22 (n,—mg)! In the present case 8 = 5 (tor minimum electric field) - a em = aT mg = BRE? Now n so Enin = Vv qm » = 109/ VBS = 1066 kV/em. (b) If the applied electric field is E = E,sinot,o = 2nv than the Kerr cell introduces a time varying phase difference 0 = 20B| Elsin’ ot Qmx 22% 107" x 10 x (50x 10°)? sin? wt 1 xsin* or 5.195 5.196 5.197 217 ne im ume & 1 I half-cycl == =_—— in one half-cycle ie. in time © = 7/2 zy) this reaches the value 2 k= when ia? 2 4 6 8 10 sinfot= O50 Gr i i’ a 2,4, 6 8 10 i’ i’ i’ 1’ i.e. 11 times. On each of these occasions light will he interrupted. Thus light will be interrupted 2vx 11 = 22x 10° times per second (Light will be interrupted when the Kerr cell (placed between crossed Nicols) introduces a phase difference of 2k x and im no other case.) From problem 189, we know that An= 2h ™ where is the rotation constant. Thus 2a | 2ac 2x” wo On the other hand Opa, = V 2cVH = An= Thus for the magnetic rotations = An = Part of the rotations is due to Faraday effect and part of it is ordinary optical rotation. The latter docs not change sign when magnetic field is reversed. Thus og = al+VIH @ = al-VIH Hence 2VIH = (m,-%) )/u = 0-015 ang min/A or ‘We write P = Pohemca + Pmagrene We look against the transmitted beam and count the positive direction clockwise. The chemical part of the rotation is annulled by reversal of wave vector upon reflection. Thus Peremea = Oe! Since in effect there is a single transmission. 218 5.198 5.199 On the other hand Pag = NAVI To get the signs right recall that dextro rotatory compounds rotate the plane of vibration in a clockwise direction on looking against the oncoming beam. The sense of rotation of light vibration in Faraday effect is defined in terms of the direction of the field, positive rotation being that of a right handed screw advancing in the direction of the field. This is the opposite of the definition ‘of Pchemica for the ecm “case. Finally =(a-VNH)I (Note : If plane polarized light is retlected back & forth through the same active medium in a magnetic field, the Faraday rotation increases with each traveresal.) There must be a Faraday rotation by 45° in the opposite direction so that light could pass through the second polaroid. Thus V1 Hig = 0/4 wd _45x60_ A or Ania = If the direction of magnetic field is changed then the sense of rotation will also change. Light will be completely quenched in the above case. Let r = radius of the disc then its moment of inertia about its axis = im r In time ¢ the disc will acquire an angular momentum ai o when circularly polarized light of intensity / falls on it. By conservation of angular momentum this must equal remr zm ra where «wo = final angular velocity. . mw Equating '= Sar ® c mei But mm7YtR MPR Substituting the values of the various quantities we get = 11-9 hours 219 5.5 DISPERSION AND ABSORPTION OF LIGHT 5.200 In a travelling plane electromagnetic wave the intensity is simply the time averaged magnitude of the Poynting vector :- I+ - = ; 1 on using c= » EV% = HV. Ve Ho (see chapter 4.4 of the book). Now time averaged value of £? is £¢/2 so 1 20 Ie 3e eo or Ey = te? (a) Represent the electric field at any point by E = Eosin ct . Then for the electron we have the equation. mx = eEysinot eky . so x=-—Ssinor mo The ampitude of the forced oscillation is cEy mo? The velocity amplitude is clearly F £80 2 541x107 x 34x 10 = 1:73 cm/sec mo () For the electric force F, = amplitude of the electric force = eZy For the magnetic force (which we have neglected above), it is (evB) = (evuoH) E = evEvye =ev— vero = writing v = -vgcoswt where w= — we see that the magnetic force is apart from a sign evo£o 2e sin2wt 220 Fm Hence 7 = Ratio of amplitudes of the two forces e we. 2. -u 2¢ 7 29x10 This is negligible and justifies the neglect of magnetic field of the electromagnetic wave in calculating v9. 5.201 (a) It tums out that one can neglect the spatial dependence of the electric field as well as the magnetic field. Thus for a typical elegtron mr’ = eEjsinwt = =. Zo . wos so 7*= -——% sin wt (neglecting any nonsinusoidal part). muy The ions, will be practically unaffected. Then Pener=- 2 > oo me)» and D = gE +P = | 1-2-5 |E ema nye? Hence the permittivity e=1- 3° eg mw @ The phase velocity is given by v = 0/K So Thus 5.202. From the previous problem Thus mq = (4:17 v? meq/e) (1-17) = 236x107 cm? 221 5.203 For hard x- rays, the electrons in graphite will behave as if nearly free and the formula of previous problem can be applied. Thus 2 oe ef oe como 2 and — Qeomo on taking square root and neglecting higher order terms. So 1 1 2 1% 2 nw n-Le=- -- Qepmar Baxteyme We calculate ry as follows : There arc 6 x 6-023 x 10 clectrons in 12 gms of graphite of density 1-6 gm/c.c. Thus 6 x 6023 x 107 (12/16) Using the values of other constants and 2 = 50 x 10~? metre we get n-1 = -5-4x10-7 1% = per cc mi +yi+kx = Ey cos or To solve this equation we shall find it convenient to use complex displacements. Consider the equation mi +yitkz = eEye'*! Its solution is eFne” z2=—>y -mo-iyork (we ignore transients.) ane k ‘Writing B = 3h, = m cy -ior 2 2 . we find z= —e / (wp-0?-2i po) Now x = Real part of z eEy cos (mt+ op) . = — = acos(wt+p) V (a9 ~ 2pe where tang = e- e i —__2fo sing = 222 (b) We calculate the power absorbed as Pa = Lekycost(-wasin(at+q))> 2 2Bo -o = (£22) mor (ata? P+ 4 m } (ag-m? P +48 0? This is clearly maximum when () = « because P can be written as Ey) Bm P=|—* ° ™ ! (0g aw | +4p (s+) +8 ey 7 2 m and Pos * ral ) for © = @p. P can also be calculated from P = < yx-i>> Bmw (eE/my 2 = (yo"a@’/2) = (oleate apiar 5.205 Let us write the solutions of the wave cquation in the form Aw Ayet(ort) where k = un and > is the wavelength in the medium. If n' = n+ix, then 2x do (Xo is the wavelength in vacuum) and the equation becomes A = Age®* exp(i(@t,-kx)) Xy and k= iin . In real form, A = Age®* cos(wt-kx) This represents a plane wave whose amplitude diminishes as it propagates to the right (provided x' < 0). when n’ = ix, then similarly ke where x’ A = Aye** cos mt (on putting n = 0 in the above equation). This represents a standing wave whose amplitude diminishes as one goes to the right (it x! <0). The wavelength of the wave is infinite (K’ = 0). ‘Waves of the former type are realized inside metals as well as inside dielectrics when there is total reflection. (penetration of wave). 223 5.206 In the plasma radio waves with wavelengths exceeding Ag are not propagated. We interpret this to mean that the permittivity becomes negative for such waves. Thus . My & on 1 it = RE comer bs 242 mye" do Hence — al 4x egmc 4x egm ; or My = 2S = 1-984 10° per cc ex - 5.207 By definition do_d dy uae = give) wo avk = vee dk 2x 2a v Now kes ts Thus us vad, 1 i - te yt (dv 1 ' Its interpretation is the following : in ( den I (4) i the slope of the v- curve at A=’. V aN) ye Thus as is obvious from the diagram vi=v(n)-2'(2%) is the group velocity for =X! aX), he 5.208 (a) v = a/Vh, @ = constant Then weve = a a(-3en™) =}: ae oY () v = bk = wk, b = constant so ob ond w= 2 ~2bk = av. (©) v = 5, ¢ = constant eo so Thus u ry Bb a 5.209 We have Integrating we find so and writing this as c/Ve(w) we get e(w) = 1-4, o (A can be +ve or negative) The phase veluciiy of iighi in the veiy Of A = 536 nm = io is obtained as =~ = 1-829 x 108 v (do) aie) Gay = 1829 10° m/s ‘To get the group velocity we need to calculate (az) We shall use linear n= Ae interpolation in the two intervals. Thus (Zi) = -S2 - 28% 10°F pernm k= 521-5 (zr) --2 = -18-2x 107% pernm 1h = 561-5 There (dn/d 2) values have been assigned to the mid-points of the two intervals. Interpolating again we get (3) + [289g xtzs |x so™* permm = ~249x 107*pernm. 40 Ih = 534 x an cafe) ef Xian fe ee) lt alae | Finally At h = 534 3x08 [ Feet ue v -5 =p 8 1-640 T6409 * 249 «10 |mve 159 x 10° m/s 5.201 5.212 5.213 225 We write ve - =atbnr so @ = k(a+bh) = 2nb+ak. 2 {sine ke 33) . Suppose a wavetrain at time f = U has the form F(x,0) -f f(kyelt* ak Then at time ¢ it will have the form Flx=f fk) elktiot ay wf senyetteienneenn fp cay elton ea F(x,t) = F(x-at,0) so at time f= the wave train has regained its shape though it has advanced by az. On passing through the first (polarizer) Nicol the intensity of light becomes + Jp because one of the components has been cut off. On passing through the solution the plane of polarization of the light beam will rotate by p= Vln and its intensity will also decrease by a factor e~*', The plane of vibraton of the light wave wil then make an angle 90° - @ with the principal direction of the analyzer Nicol, Thus by Malus’ law the intensity of light coming out of the second Nicol will be Flo: e7*!. cos? (90° - 9) 1 zine *'sin’. (a) The multiple reflections are shown below. Transmis- sion gives a factor (1 - p ) while reflections give fac- tors of o. Thus the transmitted intensity assuming incoheren light is (1+ p) Jo + (1 py" p7lp + (1- py’ plot... = (1-p)fo(1 + p7+p*+p%+...) . 2 1__,i-p (1-0 oxo = high: 226 (b) When there is absorption, we pick up a factor o = e~*“ in each traversal of the plate. Thus we get (1-poht(1-pPorph+(1-plorpth+... =(1-pyoh(i+o'p+o'p'+...) 5.214 We have uae *t(1-py mae%% (1p) where. 9 is the reflectivity; see previous problem, multiple reflection have been ignored. Thus Thin exla-4) ay Inf = 2) L035 cm! or x gig, 7035 em. 5.215 On cach surface we pick up a factor (1 - 9) from reflection and a factor e~*’ due to absorption in cach plate. Thus t= (1 pyr ent! aN Thus = en a2 2 01034 om 5.216 Apart from the factor (1 -p) on each end face of the plate, we shall get a factor due to absorptions. This factor can be calculated by assuming the plate to consist of a large number of very thin slab within each of which the absorption coefficient can be assumed to be constant, Thus we shall get a product like werden (atda yd ox (e+2dz)dx This product is nothing but ~fxunax e. Now x(0) = x1, X(/) = %2 and variation with x is linear so x(x) = n+Fa-m) ' -f [a +7 a-m) Jee fourm)! ee me 227 5.217 The spectral density of the incident beam (i.e. intensity of the components whose wave length 5.218 5.219 2 the inkerval RB Ros) i = a Msdshy The absorption factor for this component is ofr Benno e and the transmission factor due to reflection at the surface is (1 - p )’. Thus the intensity of the transmitted beam is he rf on dhe Mom 4 (tee! valent C-eY Ty (Goa XO.-m) = (1-p Ph = Gan mT co [ahem | At the wavelength Ag, the absorption coefficient vanishes and loss in transmission is entirely due to reflection, This factor is the same at all wavelengths and therefore cancels out in calculating the pass band and we need not worry about it. Now Tp = (transmissivity at A = Ag) = (1-p)* T = transmissivity at 2 = (1-p )?e7* (4 The edges of the passband are ho = 4h and ai ihe cage % Thus Ah (ma}/ m4 or an-2n¥ Lint) or an- 20 c5(Inn} We have to derive the law of decrease of intensity in ai absorbing medium taking in to account the natural geometrical fall-off (inverse sequare law) as well as absorption. Consider a thin spherical shell of thickness dx and internal radius x. Let I(x) and [(x+dx) be the intersities at the inner and outer surfaces of this shell. Then Aux I(x) et = 4n(xtdxVl (x+dx) Except for the factor e~*** this is the usual equation. We rewrite this as Li(x) = 1 (xtdx)(xtdxP (i+yax) 228 5.220 5.221 5.222 5.223 - (+ Sha)P r2ednrxan) or Pay 2is2x7 0 Hence “(21 4x (21) <0 dx so I= Ce** where C is a constant of integration. In our case we apply this equation for as xs b For xs a the usual inverse square iaw gives ® MO = a Hence C- an aa I(b) = per This does not take into account reflections. When we do that we get 1(b) = Pai pyrex” nd The transmission factor is e~"“ and so the intensity will decrease a et 36x13 x01 = = 58-4 timestimes (we have used ¢ =(u/p) xp and used the known value of density of lead). We require Hp, dpy = Har dar w 4 or (222) Pro dry = (2) Pardar \ Pps } (Par J T20 x 11:3 x dpy = 3:48 x 2-7 x 26 dp, = 03mm 229 5.6 OPTICS OF MOVING SOURCES 5.224 5.225 5.226 In the Fizean experiment, light disappears when the wheel rotates to bring a tooth in the position formerly occupied by a gap in the time taken by light to go from the wheel to the mirror and back. Thusdistance travelled = 22 Suppose the m" tooth alter the gap has come in place of the latter, Then time taken 2 i 2zn; = 2m+ 1 cecin the second case = ——1— 2zm Z(m-m) Then c¢ =21z(n-n,) = 3024x108 m/sec ‘When v < = 0D n7 42? 56d? + 434? 232 5.233 As in the previous problem 72-22 ane a c ayy aw so v= ct = 71x 10°K m/s R (#) + 5.233 We go to the frame in which the observer is at rest. In this frame the velocity of the source of light is, by relativistic velocity addition foumula, When this source emits light of proper frequency «, the frequency recorded by observer will be =v/e o=00V Trt w/e = @o w/e Note that w

en Fesin”'p This is exactly what we get from elementary nonrelativistic law of addition of velocities, 5.242 The statement of the problem is not quite properly worked and is in fact misleading. The correct situation is described below. We consider. for simplicity, stars in the x - 2 plane. Then the previous formula is applicable, and we have © cos 0° = £080-B_ _ cos 0-099 1-Bcos0 ~ 1-099 cos 0 ‘The distribution of @' is given in the diagram below The light that appears to come from the forward quadrant’ inthe ~—frame K (0 =-x1t00=-7/2) is compressed into an angle of magnitude + 8-1° in the forward direction while the remaining stars are spread out. The three dimensional distribution can also be found out from the three dimensional generalization of the formula in the previous problems. 243 The field induced by a charged particle moving with velocity V excites the atoms of the medium turning them into sources of light waves. Let us consider two arbitrary points A and B along the path of the particle. The light ‘waves emitted from these points when the particle passes them reach the point P simultancously and reinforce cach other provided théy are in phase which is the case is gencral if the time taken by the light wave to propagate from the point A to the point C is equal to that taken by the particle to fly over the distance AB. Hence we obtain ws 0 = 5 237 where v = © is the phase velocity of light, It is evident that the radiation is possible only if V>v ie. when the velocity of the particle exceeds the phase velocity of light in the mediun. 5.244 We must have oni Va Ve Sa Sexi m/s of Te zg For electrons this means a KE. greater than 2 T= ee = me 1 a . 16 = 0511 Waar using m,c? = 0511 MeV = 0:144MeV Vi. lis) J For protons with m,c? = 938 MeV T, = 938 A = 264McV = 0:264 GeV VJ } Also Typ = 29°6MeV = me* Then mc? = 105-3MeV. This is very nearly the mass of means. 5.245 v Fi so= rom cos 8 = + we get V = vsec® Voy secO _ sec30° _ 2/¥3 4 so = ~secQ = en a 15 af 2 ae 15 ¥ Thus for clectorns r qf 22 T. a Fy 1] 7 0289 Mev » oy Ss ost | Ve | Generally 238 5.7 THERMAL RADIATION. QUANTUM NATURE OF LIGHT 5.246 (a) The mast probable radiation frequency «,, is the frequency for which Ay, = 30°F (0/T)+ FF (o/T) =0 do The maximum frequency is the root other than « = 0 of this equation. It is _ _3LF(o/T) O" ~"F (w/T) OF Wye = Xp T where xp is the solution of the transcendental equation 3F (xp) +X0F’ (4) = 0 (6) The maximum spectral density is the density corresponding to most probable frequency. Itis (4g max = OF (49) 7? a 7? where xq is defined above. (©) The radiosity is M, =Sfor 1(2)40-r'|sferceres aT* ° ’ L° J 5.247 For the first black body b Onh = x b b Then Onde Ft = oT, Hence Tye oe en tate ze Biman 7, +Ar 5.248 From the radiosity we get the temperature of the black body. It is vs “ a "i ra (Me). (29x10) gsr9x a 5-67 x 10 Hence the wavelength corresponding to the maximum emissive capacity of the body is b _ 029 om = 3-4x10-4cem = 3-4um (Note that 3-0 W/em? = 3-0 x 10‘ W/m?) 5.249 The black body temperature of the sun may be taken as To - —2?9__, - 6042 0-48 x 10 229 ‘Thus the radiosity is 45855 x 10% 9x 10% The sun loses 1 % of its mass in 1.97 x 10% x 107? 5-1x 10° kg/sec = 5-1 x 10° kg/sec sec = 1-22 x 10" years. 5.250 For an ideal gas p = nk Twhere n = number density of the particles and k = Ris Boltzman ia constant. In a fully ionized hydrogen plasma, both H ions (protons) and clectrons contribute to pressure but since the mass of electrons is quite small (» m,/1836), only protons contribute to mass density. Thus 2p * ng 2pR 7 Nam n and pe where mj ~ m, is the proton or hydrogen mass. Equating this to thermal radiation pressure 2pR, My Naty 3 + 3epR | 3cpR Then T " FoNmy” oM 4oT* Se: wt ey AL = c where ws = 2N, my = molecular weight of hydrogen = 2 x 107° kg. w Thus a = 189 x 107K oM Joules of energy. As a result its temperature falls by - dT and ndoT‘dt = ~ G4 pcaT where p = density of copper, C = its sp.heat 240 5.252 Thus dt= -CeddT 60 T aT | Cod or p eye LE (nP-1) = 294hours. a” 180 a wy Taking account of cosine low of emission we write for the energy radiated per second by the hole i iy # i as dI(Q) = Acos8dQ where A is an constant, dQ is an element of solid angle around some direciton defined by the symbol Q . Integrating over the whole forward hemisphere we get 2 T= Af coso2nsinodd = ° 2 We find A by cquating this to the quantity o 7/4 g is stefan-Boltzman constant and d 4 is the diameter of th hole. Then Ae joa? T! Now energy reaching 2 from 1 is (cos @ ~ 1) 1 4° @T{-ag (xd7/4), . . where AQ = \*“°'") is the solid angle subtended by the hole of 2 at 1. {We are assuming d<<1so AQ = area of hole / ( distance )° }. This must equal oTind’/4 which is the energy emitted by 2, Thus equating nd? xd fod? YS ae - 0 TA 7 — or -TV aT Substituting we get Th = 0:380kK = 380K. 241 5.253 (a) The total internal energy of the cavity is y= 42rty Hence Ge (37), - = 6 ry = 16x 567 x 10° 3x10° _ 16% 5-67 3 x 10°x 10°* Joule/ °K nI/K = 3024nI/K (b) From first law TdS = dUspav = VdU+UdVesaV (° = 5} = vau+s2av = Meyrare Bertav so ds- a Berav - ‘(se vr | Hence Se oy = ey = 1.008 nI/K. 5.254 We are given u(@,T) = Aw exp(-aw/T) ; du _(3 (a) Then we (o7 7 80 ®, (b) We determine the spectral distribution in wavelength. -W(A,T)ddk = u(o,T)do But vv PRE gg p= BRE LS an o o so dn= -Sao,dw=-Sar o x (we have put a minus sign before d A to subsume just this fact dd is -ve where da is tve.) 242 or de ST ST 5.255 From Planek’s formula aw 1 Ma" G3 Ghar] (@ ina range Aw < giehenET | 243 5.257 We write the required power in terms of the radiosity by considering Only the energy radiated in the given range. Then from the previous problem AP = GH Om. T)An _4en An ee WET But de T = b Ach AR 1 erteo_y Ah so AP= Using the data 2nch | 2nx3x 10° x105 x07* kb sec oe = 4.9643 and AP = 0312 W/cm? 5.258 (a) From the curve of the function y (x) we sce that y = 0-5 when x = 1-41 29. 3700 Thus ow 141 x 22% om = 1-105 pm. (b) At 5000 K n= 222 5 SP x 10°6m = 058 um So the visible range (0-40 to 0-70) tm corresponds to a range (0-69 to 1:31) of x. From the curve y(0-69) = 0-07 y(131) = 0-44 so the fraction is 0-37 (©) The value of x corresponding to 0-76 are x, = 0-76 oe = 0°786 at 3000K 0-29 x = 076 | = 1:31 at 500K 244 The requisite fraction is then P, hy 1-y ee Py qT, 1-y ratio of ratio of the total power fraction of required wavelengths in the radiated power 5.259 We use the formula ¢ = Aw ‘Then the number of photons in the spectral interval (@, +d @ ) is 2 u(@, T)do w’ 1 n(@)don MO Tde . 5 aerT ao using n(a)dor = -HOA)AD we get GNA) = nf 222) 22a, e gel na) "a z he x > = (ney 1 a Won ettheAT_y 8x dh TE CPRR ART _ 5.260 (a) The mean density of the flow of photons at a distance r is Pr n(r)= ¢ "Sener ” so rest Vv a 2m 2hn i 6x 10° 107 9 "Gx Vv Sieg 7 887 metre The statement made in the question is not always correct. However it is correct in certain cases, for example, when light is incident on a perfect reflector or perfect absorber. Consider the former case. If light is incident at an angle © and reflected at the angle 0, then momentum transfered by each photon is If there are n(v)dv photons in frequency interval (v,v+d-v), then total momentum transfered is frm eos ody 0 The mean pressure

is related to the force Fexerted by the beam by nd?

x= = The force F equals momentum transfered per sccond. This is (assuming that photons, not reflected, are absorbed) E E E 2pEe(i-p) = (Usp) e. The first term is the momentum transfered on reflection (see problem (261)); the second-on absorption.

~4 Ls )E ndex Substituting the values we get

= 483 atmosphere. 246 5.263 5.264 5.265 The momentum transfered to the plate is E nn A = E(1-p){sin 9 4 cos 0 3} I (momentum transfered + on absorption ) p{-2c050/'} 8 #6) \ (momentum transtered on reflection ) (14P)cos0j (3) ath E E at = ¢ (1-P)sin Oj ~~ Its magnitude is EV (1-p)'sin20+(1+p )2cos20 = Ev 1+p?+2pcos20 Substitution gives 35 n N.s as the answer. Suppose the mirror has a surtace area A. The incident bean then has a cross section of A cos 0 and the incident energy is [A cos@: Then the momentum transfered per second (= Force ) is from the last problem ~FAS089 1 5 pcos ofr TAE89 (4 - p)sino? The normal pressure is then p = £ 1+p)cos’@ (jis the unit vector 1” to the plane mirror.) Putting in the values . 4 = ORO x18 = 06nNem~? x We consider a strip defined by the angular range (0,0+d0). From the previous problem the normal pressure exerted on this strip is 0 22 0520 C This pressure gives rise to a force whose resultant, by symmetry is in the direction of the incident light. Thus x? ae 0+ cos 0-2"R?sinOd0 = neh 247 Putting in the values Fw x25 10-121 S gg3 WN 3x10 5.266 Consider a ring of radius x on the plate. The normal pressure on this ring is, by problem (264), 2 P © 4x(x+17R?) P wR? Ime Pak y The total force is then fk (hott ee + cos? 0 4 x Gay _ PW f Qe oo i R(14r" 5.267 (a) In the reference frame fixed to the mirror, the frequency of the photon is, by the Doppler shift formula = 1+p vi-p? 3-0 -o——— |. 1-8 (see Eqn. (5.6b) of the book.) In this frame momentum imparted to the mirrot is 2hD _ 2ho/1+B Pr 1-p’ ©) In the K frame, the incident particle carries a momentum of #/c and retums with momentum hol+B ¢ 1-8 (see problem 229). The momentum imparted to the mirror, then, has the magnitude ho | 1+B 1]. 240 A e 1-8 Here 6 als 248 5.268 5.269 When light falls on a small mirror and is reflected by it, the mirror recoils. The energy of recoil is obtained from the incident beam photon and the frequency of reflected photons is less than the frequency of the incident photons. This shift of frequency can however be neglected in calculating quantities related to recoil (to a first approximation.) Thus, the momentum acquired by the mirror as a result of the laser pulse is oo 2E |P-R | Or assuming 7” ~ 0, we get pr = 2k |r| = Hence the kinetic energy of the mirror is HUE 2m” me Suppose the mirror is deflected by an angle 0. Then by conservation of energy 257 final PE. = mgI(1-cos@) = Initial KE. = “—, me +10 262 12sin? = = or mgl2sin’ x = > or sn = (ne) oy 27 \me)Vei . 6 2B “3 Using the data. sin = — ~ = 4377 «10 . 27 107543 x10 V9O8% 1 This gives @ = 0-502 degrees . We shall only consider stars which are not too compact so that the gravitational field at their surface is weak : <<1 OR We shall also clarify the problem by making clear the meaning of the (slightly changed) notation. Suppose the photon is cmitted by some atom whose total relativistic energies (including the rest mass) are E, & E with E, 1 transition. On the surface of the star, the energies have the values 5.270 5.271 249 Thus, from #w = Et, -E'y we get o- (1-2) Here « is the frequency of the photon emitted in the transition 2—> 1 when the atom is on the surface of the star, In shows that the frequency of spectral lines emitted by atoms on the surface of some star is less than the frequency of lines emitted by atoms here on earth (where the gravitational effect is quite small). Finally Ao. pele @o oR The answer given in the book is incorrect in general though it agrees with the above result for WM co. oR The general formula is 2ahe oy 2xhe Thus 5 Now Ang 22ee ( 1- Fa ev n) Hence v= 2ahe \ = 159KV eAR\ a We have as in the above problem 2 xh | On the other hand, from Bragg’s law 2dsina = kA =A since k = 1 when a takes its smallest value. mhe Thus = = edsina = 30-974kV w 31kV. 250 5.272 5.273 5.274 The wavelength of X- rays is the least when all the K.B. of the electrons approaching the anticathode is converted into the energy of X- rays. But the KE. of electron is Tn = ne -1 Vi-vy2 (mc? = rest mass energy of clectrons.= 0511 MeV) Thus or The work function of zine is 74 x 1-602 x 107"? Joule A = 3-74 romane = wavelength for photoelectric effect is given by 2ahe _, Xo or to = ZEAE 2 3316nm The maximum velocity of photoelectrons liberated by light of wavelength A is given by } 5.276 5.277 5.278 251 and wef Qwhe _ do ‘When light of sufficiendy shori waveiengih faiis on the bali, phoioeiecirons are ejecied and the copper ball gains positive change. The charged ball tends to resist further emission of electrons by attracting them, When the copper ball bas enough charge even the most energetic electrons are unable to leave it. We can calculate this final maximum potential of the copper ball. It is obviously equal in magnitude (in volt) to the maximum KE of electrons (in electron So A- = 8:86 - 4:47 = 4:39 volts (Aca is the work function of copper.) ‘We write E = a(1+cosmt) cos mot - 4608 09 1 +5 [608 (p04 + C08 («+0 1] tis obvious that light has three frequencies and the maximum K.E. of photo electrons ejected is h(@ +) - Api where A,; = 2:39 eV. Substituting we get 0-37eV. Suppose N photons fall on the photocell per sec, Then the power incident is This will give rise to a photocurrent of w2the.y which means that N electrons have been emitted. Thus the number of photoelectrons produced by each photon is i er ‘A simple application of Einstein’s equation 1 2mhe 5M Vaax = AV htvg = =F ~ Ag 2 252 5.279 gives incorrect result in this case because the photoelectrons emitted by the Cesium electrode are retarded by the small electric field that exists between the cesium electrode and the Copper electrode even in the absence of external emf. This small electric field is caused by the contact potential difference whose magnitude equals the difference of work functions LCA Aeg) volts Its physical origin is explained below. The maximum velocity of the photoelectrons reaching the copper electrode is then 1 1 2mhe 7m Vn = yMVO- (Aw Ace) = “APE Ay Here vo is the maximum velocity of the photoelectrons immediately after emission. Putting the values we get, on using A,, = 4-47eV, A = 0-22nm, Vm = 641 x 10°m/s The origin of contact potential difference is the following. Inside the metals free electrons can be thought of as a Fermi gas which occupy encrgy levels upto a maximum called the Fermi energy Ep . The work function A measures the depth of the Fermi level. Out side - 4 SrAr-Az i ve i | ee | ma Inside metal When two metals 1 & 2 are in contact, electrons flow from one to the other till their Fermi levels are the same. This requires the appearance of contact potential difference of Ay~Ap between the two metals externally. The maximum K_E. of the photoelectrons emitted by the Zn cathode is On calculating this comes out to be 0-993 eV ~ 10eV Since an external decelerating voltage of 1:5 V is required to cancel this current, we infer that a contact potential difference of 15-10 = 0-5 V exists in the circuit whose polarity is opposite of the decelerating voltage. 253 5.280 The unit of his Joule-sec. Since m cis the rest mass energy, has the dimension of time me 5.281 5.282 and multiplying by c we get a quantity * a = mc ‘Whose dimension is length. ‘Ihis quantity 1s called reduced compton wavelength. (The name compton wavelength is traditionally reserved for 2 al ‘We consider the collision in the rest frame of the initial electron. Then the reaction is y+ e (rest) —> ¢ (moving ) Energy momentum conservation gives hasmee mel 1-97 ho _ mocB € ae where w is the angular frequency of the photon. me = met ome VER Vi-8 This gives B = 0 which implies to = 0. Bui a zero energy pioion means no pivion. (a) Compton scattering is the scattering of light by frec electrons, (The free electrons are the electrons whose binding is much smaller than the typical energy transfer to the electrons). For this reason ihe increase in waveiengih A } is independent of ihe naiure of the scattered substance. (b) This is because the effective number of free electrons increases in both cases. With in- creasing angle of scattering, the cnergy transfered to clectrons increases. With diminishing atomic number of the substance the binding energy of the electrons decreases. (c) The presence of a non-displaced component in the scattered radiation is due to scattering from strongy bound (inner) electrons as well as nuclei. For scattering by these the atom essentially recoils as a whole and there is very little energy transfer. 254 5.283 5.284 5.285 Let Ap = wavelength of the incident radiation. Then wavelength of the radiation scattened at 0, = 60° = Ay = Ag+ 2mA,(1-cos 0, ) where A, = #. and similarly dy = ot 2K, (1 - cos 0) From the data 6, = 60°, 6) = 120° and Many Thus (m-1) ho = 20%, [1 ~ 008 8. ~m1 (1-008 8) ] = 2x4, [1-n+n 008 04 ~ cos 8] Hence do moan, [ROS] n-1 a? in? oan »[= was ne 0/2 The expression Ao given in the book contains misprints. ] = 121 pm. The wave lengths of the photon has increased by a fraction 1 so its final wavelength is Apa (240m ‘ ho and its energy is len The KEE. of the compton electron is the energy lost by the photon and is a = hol 1+ Tey (a) From the Compton formula N = 2m%,(1- 00590) +2 2mc _ 2nc A Sr Xe taa, Whee 2m hem oe Thus w= Substituting the values. we get! = 2:24 x 10” rad/sec (b) The kinetic energy of the scattered electron (in the frame in which the initial electron was stationary) is simply T=ho-ho’ 255 . Qnhe Qnhe Nhe tak, 4whnck. Qahe/d "Xika2ad,) " 14er/2a, ~ 95KV 5.286 The wave length of the incident photon is Then the wavelength of the final photon is 2mc_ A + 2m. (i- vos 8} and the energy of the final photon is 2ake ho ho! = pe __, ___4o __ FEL 42 nd,(1-c080) 14+—>9(1-cos 0) o mc - — te ett }asrcor2) SE 9 PP Then from Compton formula P 1 so = P Hence si = SF -5] - me -p' 2pp' or sin? = me(e-P') » 2 2pp Substituting from the data ale J me lep- ; -2[Vie aa Zu Tsin” 0/2 4 thy = 0677 MeV 5.289 5.290 257 We see from the previous problem that the electron gains the maximum K.E. when the photon is scattered backwards 8 = 180°. Then mesh ff Z 1+ ame 1 Hence y= aac. aah a[Vicda ame | Substituting the valucs we get Ao = 3695 pm. Refer to the diagram. Energy momentum conservation gives ho’ kh Aw! A 0 = peasy P) Ao" sin0 = psing gy hotme = ho’ +E fw 0 where EE? = c*p’+m°c*. we see hus! im o' sin® qrsin8 in = O-@' cos 0 1 4 eso Asin d sin @ “N=heosO8” AR, 20 qt Pains where Ade N-d= 2wd,(1- 0050) = 4xersin? 2 a. H tng= 22 ence - aR, Ey mh, af Bh An afte, But sinQ = 2 and, -at - sak of _4xh af 4xh mcAR aman Thus tang = 142k 2h = 313° men Ag 258 5.291 By head on collision we understand that the electron moves on in the direction of the incident photon after the collision and the photon is scaltered backwards. Then, let us write ho = yme* ho! = ame (E,p) = (emc?,umc)of the electron. Then by energy momentum conservation (cancelling factors of mc? and mc ) itnsore y=p-o e=wi+y So eliminating o & & Len = -nepeV wel or (142y-p) = Vat ‘Squaring (142n)?-2n(14+2) #1 4nt4y? - 26(1424) or _ 20+ E 1+2y Thus the momentum of the Compton eiectron is wume = 2UCL+n)me po yme tel Now in a magnetic field p=Bep me Thus pe2n(ien)/ a+amFe. Substituting the values p = 3-412cm. This is ihe inverse of usuai compion scaiicring. When we write down the energy-momentum conservation equation for this process we find that they are the same for the inverse process as they are for the usual process. If follows that the formula for compton shift is applicable \. : except that the energy (frequency) of the photon is \ increased on scattering and the wavelength is shifted downward, With this understanding, we write Ad = 2n7(1-c0s0) —_—— me - 4n(*) sin?’ - 121 pm Voc? ~ wert X PART SIX ATOMIC AND NUCLEAR PHYSICS In this chapter the formulas in the book are given in the CGS units. Since most students are familar only with MKS units, we shall do the problems in MKS units. However, where needed, we shall slso write the formulas in the Gaussian units. 6.1 SCATTERING OF PARTICLES. RUTHERFORD-BOHR ATOM 6.1 The Thomson model consists of a uniformly charged nucleus in which the electrons are at rest at certain equilibrium points (the plum in the pudding model). For the hydrogen nucleus the charge on the nucleus is +e while the charge on the electron is -e. The electron by symmetry must be at the centre of the nuclear charge where the potential (from problem (3.38a)) is 1_\3e © Fey J BR Po where R is the radius of the nucleur charge distribution. The potential energy of the electron is - eq and since the electron is at rest, this is also the total energy. To ionize such an electron will require an energy of E = eG . 1 _)3e From this we find 8 (ane) 3 In Gaussian system the factor = is missing. Fue Putting the values we get R = 0-159 nm. Light is emitted when the electron vibrates. If we displace the electron slightly inside the nucleus by giving it a push r in some radial direction and an energy 5 E of oscillation then since the potential at a distance r in the nucleus is 1 Soo oir)= (ae) (3-292) . the total energy of the nucleus becomes or se gmt hala” ‘This is the energy of a harmonic oscillator whose frequency is: w= (z=) —— Txeo|mRk 260 6.2 63 The vibrating electron emits radiation of frequency w whose wavelength is a = BRE. BREW mR? (42009)! In Gaussian units the factor (4x ey)” is missing. Putting the values we get 4 = 0-237um. Equation (6.1a) of the book reads in MKS units Nh an 6/2 = (#2)/ 207 91% ) cot 6/2 = be (#4) 2T For & particle q = 2e, for gold q = 79 (In Gaussian units there is no factor ( > = \.) (4xe0)") Substituting we get b = 0-731pm. (@) In the Pb case we shall ignore the recoil of the nucleus both because Pb is quite heavy (Ap, = 208 = 52x Az.) a8 well as hecause Ph in not free. Then for a head on collision, at the distance of closest approach, the KLE. of the a — particle must become zero (because a - particle will turn back at this point). Then 2z e? {450} Fain =T (No (4x9) in Gaussian units.). Thus putting the values Taig = 0591 pm. 0) Here we have to take account of the fact that part of the energy is spent in the recoil of Li nucleus. Suppose x; = coordinate of the a - particle from some arbitrary point on the line joining it to the Li nucleus, x2 = coordinate of the Li nucleus with respect to the same point. Then we have the energy momentum equations 2x32 —2x3@ ip (Axe9)|x1- 22] 1 2.1 * Lite hme m,X, + mak_ = V2m,T Here my = mass of Het auckeus, ni, = mass of Li dm t+ Ima (V2 mT —mi,) + 622 6.4 261 We complete the square on the right hand side and rewrite the above 7 as Im mp my +m 6e * (4x8) [x -%1 For the least distance of apporach, the second term on the right must be greatest which implies that the first term must vanish. 6c m; Tous Ininstlae* TaneyF(!*a] m Using ™ = $ ana other values we get [x12 /min = 034 pm. (in Gaussian units the factor 4 €9 is absent). We shall ignore the recoil of Hg nucleus. (a) Let A be the point of closest approach to the centre C,AC = fui . At A the motion is instantaneously circular because the radial velocity vanishes. Then if vg is the. speed of the particle at A, the following equa- tions hold 1. AR? == se neee==ee 1) T= 20+ Cane) ain © mMVoTmin = V2mTb Q mya 4% 2 @ Prin (4m 8) Pan c (This is Newton’s law. Here p = Pig is the radius of curvature of the path at A and p is minimum atA by symmeny.) Finally we have Eqn. (6.1 a) in the form Awe >= Cane) 2T™ @ are? a ee From (2) and (3) a oy he 30 or Pun ™ (4ieg) 27 cots with 2 = 2, % = 80 we get Poin = 731 pm 262 (b) From (2) and (4) we write . _ 4% 2 wi0/2 ‘min (aneo)VimTF % ” = dvi V2mT votan0/2 sovng trove nt y= VEE (se 8nd) 8 ZZ 2 DZ "~ (4me)2T 8. 8 sec > - tan > Substituting in (1) Then a 2 22? 8 84 tan Tanah TT 3 (03443) Hane aaa; £) _ 0557 GaaegpaT (1 e005) = 0557 om 6.5 By momentum conservation Ps B= P+ PB i (proton) (Au) (proton) (Au) / Thus the momentum transfered w the gold nucleus is clearly AP = P,-F, = pp" Although the momentum transfered to the Au nucleus is n not small, the energy associated with this recoil is quite J 0 small and its effect back on the motion of the proton can be neglected to a first approximation, Then APeVinT(h ~> Here ? is the unit vector in the direction of the incident proton and j is normal to it on the side on which it is scattered. Thus |AP| ~ 2V2mT sin 2 Or using tan 8/2 = 7q—E5S pz for the proton we get [api ~2V amr / jis ae) ze 6.6 The proton moving by the electron first accelerates and then decelerates and it not easy to calculate the energy lost by the proton so energy conservation does not do the trick. Rather 263 we must directly calculate the momentum acquire by the electron. By symmetry that momentum is along OA and its magnitude is P, = faa where F, is the component along OA of the force on electron. Thus ” a c Ferd 450 a wae vt_aA __@b f dx 4meqv 2 v2 ! ov J (8 +27) \b Evaluate the integral by substituting ! xe a 1) 2 Then ie (4m 89) vb" 4 Then nw et 2m, (4ne)) Tm, In Gaussian units there is no factor (4 n ey )”. Substituting the values we get T, = 382¢eV. Sce the diagram on the next page. In the region where potential is nonzero, the kinetic energy of the particle is, by energy conservation, T + Upand the momentum of the particle has the magnitude V 2 m (T+ Ug) . On the boundary the force is radial, so the tangential component of the momentum does not change : V2mT sina = V2m(T+Up) sing so sing = V ma man! U, where n = et . We also have 8 = 2(a-9) Therefore sin} = sin(a-@) = sin. cos p~ cos asin p 264 68 a = V # -sin?a - cosa 7 ( “) = sina| cos p- or : 2 nsin 0/2 ee or Bee cosa) = n?=sin?a sin O or w sin? ® coPa+2nsin® cotasi = nos?! 2 2 2 8 ncos 71 or cota = ~ 8 2 8 nsin > Hence sina. = Vv 2 8 len — 2ncos 7 Finally, the impact parameter is a) nRsin> V Ler? 20s 9 It is implied that the ball is toc heavy to recoil. b= Rsina = (@) The trajectory of the particle is symmetrical about the radius vector through the point of impact. It is clear from the diagram that x 0-229 of g= g. Also b= (Rerysing = (R+r)e0s 2. (b) With 6 defined above, the fraction of particles scattered between @ and Q +d 0 (or the probability of the same) is ap = 2nbdbl - 1 ingag n(Rtry 2 (c) This is 2 ° P Sf fsmouo 2 f acon oy =! 265 6.9 From the formula (6.1 b) of the book dN. Ze dQ N "| (ame)2T sint 2 We have put q, = 2¢, q = Z ehere. Alson = no. of Pt nuclei in the foil per unit area . Nat _ Ma et (A) a ae mass of 4 the foil 7 of nuclei per unit mass Using the values Ap, = 195, p = 215% 10°kg/m? Na = 6023 x 107/kilo mole we get n= 604i x 10” per m” a5, 5 Also dQ =~ 107?sr Substituting we get aN 3:36 x 1075 6.10 A scattered flux density of J (perticles per unit arca per sccond) equals fs = 77J particles scattered per unit time per steradian in the given direction. Let n= concentration of the gold nuclei in the foil. Then Nae Mau and the number of Au nuclei per unit area of the foil is nd where d = thickness of the foil Then from Eqn. (6.1 b) (note that n> nd_ here) n= Ze 48 =dN= nal anerae| cosec! 5 Here J is the number of a - particles falling on the foil per second 4rrs 4 Hence d= — 7 sin 0/2 nt( 22) (4x8) using Z = 79, Ag, = 197, p = 193x 10° kg/m” N, = 6023 x 10 /kilomole and other data from the problem we get d=147pm 266 6.11 From the formula (6.1 b) of the book, we find But since the foils have the same mass thickness (= pd), we have Tes Ay Tas An see the problem (6.9). Hence A, 2p, = Zu-V — Substituting Z4, = 47, Agg = 108, Ap, = 195 and 1) = 1°52 we get Zp, = 7786 = 78 6.12 (a) From Eqn. (6.1 b) we get 2 pan, Zé 2xsinOdd aN ene ( Geeg)2T} sin*O/2 Maw d0=2 -# 373 dian Also Z,, = 79, Aq, = 197. Putting the values we get dN = 163 x 108 (b) This number is cos Sa (00) = toe( RA “(adda f sin? 2 The integral is Thus where n is the concentration of nuclei in the foil. (n = p.Ni/A,,) Substitution gives 613 6.14 615 267 The requisite probability can be written easily by analogy with (b) of the previous problem. Itis x 2 pa ND). ng Zé js cos 0/2d0 0 2 I (4ne)2mv sin? 2 ‘The integral is unity. Thus 2 Pannd ee (4x9) mv Substitution gives using ne PagNa 105 x 10? x 6.023 «10% = 006 Ady 108 Because of the cosec dependence of the scattering, the number of particles (or fraction) scattered through @ For U nucleus Z = 92 and we get on putting the values Ao = 737b = 0-737kb. (1b = 1 bam = 10 m’). 6.17 (a) From the previous formula 2 2 8, Ao= (aden) cot (4m 8)2T on pw Ze gg af x we *~ Aneg 2 Y Ao Substituting the values with Z = 79 we get (Q) = 90°) T = 0:903 MeV (b) The differential scattering cross section is da 4 qa" C cosec* 2 2 80 where A0(8>G) = 4xC cot > ‘Thus from the given data a“ C = =— b = 39-79 b/st 6.18 6.19 269 So 4g ® = 60°) = 39:79 x 16 b/sr = 0-637 kb/sr. The formula in MKS units is dE _be dt 6nc For an electron performing (linear) harmonic vibrations Wis in some definite directions with W, = - wx say. reas dE woe w' 5 ames dt 6nxe If the radiation loss is small (i. if @ is not too large), then the motion of the electron is always close to simple harmonic with slowly decreasing amplitude. Then we can write Eni mod and xX = acoswt and average the above equation ignoring the variation of @ in any cycle. Thus we get the : . 1 equation, on using = xo dE Moo 1 _welw™ dt 6nc 2° 6xme since E = im w” @ for a harmonic oscillator. This equation integrates to E=E,e"7 where T = 6nmc/E ow wy. It is then seen that energy decreases 1 times in - 6mmc, +47 ns ig = Tiny = ying = 14-7 as, ew’ Moving around the nucleus, the electron radiates and its energy decreases. This means that the electron gets nearer the nucleus. By the statement of the problem we can assume that the electron is always moving in a circular orbit and the radial acceleration by Newton’s law is 2 we (Amey)mr directed inwards. Thus dE wee i SL dt 6mc (Ane) mr 270 6.20 On the other hand in a circular orbit 2 —_—e =~ Gne)ar so é a Ho e* se are (4ne)2r 4 (4ne)6nemr 4 or ee dt (4n6))3xcmr Integrating toe 4m egcm? and the radius falls to zero in 4encmn fo = see. = 13-1ps. Hoe In a circular orbit we have the following formula mv Ze TF" GxeoF mvr=nh Ze Then ve _ (4ne)0h wh(4neo) a me . 12 Zé The energy Eis Ey = 5mv TE 2 _( 22.) _m__(zé 48} 2h | 4x8 and the circular frequency of this orbit is ©, -t-(# mje 2 zey m é 22 #a-"( te) [2 7” | axe, On the other hand the frequency « of the light emitted when the electron makes a transition n+1—nis ay sg (2s) ed 4meo) 24 | n? (n+1)? 271 Thus the inequality ©, >O> O41 will result if 11/4 1), w 2 (n+iy) (ntl) Or multiplying by n? (+1)? we have to prove 2 2 fasir >h(aneiy> n+. This can be written as 1 n+l n+2+ 1 onstonsi-2+ n = This is obvious because -i+—t><-$ since m= 1 net <2 For large n so +1 and we may say 2-—>1 One ®, We have the following equation (we ignore reduced mass effects) mv? me skr myvr=nh so mv=Vmkr and and The energy levels are Zz 6.22 The basic equations have been derived in the problem (6.20). We rewrite them here and determine the the required values. w ©) 4" ceme)’ Thus 7 = 528pm, for H atom Ze=1forH,Z=2 for He r= 26-4 pm , for He* ion 22 (4xeq)h v1 = 2-191 x 10° m/s for H atom = 4382 x 10° m/s for He* ion My _ m(Zzey ~ (Amey 20 T = 13-65 eV for H atom T = 546eV tor He’ ion In both cases E,= T because E,= -E and E= -T (Recall that for coulomb force V=-2T) (©) The ionization potential @; is given by em, = F, so @; = 13°65 volts for H atom @; = 546 volts for He* ion 13-65 The energy levels are E, = - “5 eV for Ht atom 5 46 eV for He ion n and E,=- 1 = 4% 10-23 = 409 volts for He* ion The wavelength of the resonance line (in! = 2—>n = 1) is given by 2ahe, 8, Es = 10:23 eV for H atom so. = 121-2 nm for H atom + 121-2 = For He* ion A= [7 7 05am. 6.23 6.25 273 This has been calculated before in problem (6.20). It is m(Zet/4ne9)* ee = 2.08 x 10% rad/sec T and forms a current loop of area x7”. This is equivalent to magnetic moment, exr evr welnP = 2 while the Balmer line of wavelingth 410-2 nm is due to the transition 6 —> 2. The line whose wave number corresponds to the difference in wave numbers of these two lines is due to the transition 6 — 4, That line belongs to the Brackett series. The wavelength of this line is ye bo hie eb e eevee) MoM = 2627 pm 275 6.28 The energies are They correspond to wavelengths 654-2nm, 4846nm and 433 nm ‘The n tine of the Balmer series has the energy 1 F{ 4 (ns2y ) For n = 19, we get the wavelength 366-7450 nm For n = 20 we get the wavelength 366: 4470 nm To resolve these lines we require a resolving power of a _ 3666 Rm 5x" p28 = 1:23 10° 6.29 For the Balmer series 1.2 ho, -#a(a-2)}; nz3, where #R = Ey = 13°65 eV. Thus 2nhe 11 ss na(}-4) n we 2ahe_ 2xhe 1 1 or anhe_ 2nhe yp( 4 -—t Dao dn (3 Gif] ana oe eee for n>>1 w(n+1/ Rn Thus AEP 82 = 2M 7 dn when xen or = oA” WRK” 7,R On the other hand for just resolution in a diffraction grating a zr I i . T an = kG ghh= xa asind = x sin@ 3 ‘ men Hence sin® = TR Substitution gives 0 = 59-4°, 276 6.30 6.31 6.32 If all wavelengths are four times shorter but otherwise similar to the hydrogen atom spectrum then the energy levels of the given atom must be four times greater. 4E, This means E,=- at w E, compared to E, = -— for hydrogen atom. Therefore the spectrum is that of He* ion 7 (Z = 2). Because of cascading all possible transitions are scen. Thus we look for the number of ways in which we can select upper and lower levels. The number of ways we can do this is Fa(m-1) where the factor 5 takes account of the fact that the photon emission always arises from upper > I upper — # These are the Lyman lines ho -&»(i-3) n= 23,4... For n= 2 we get h = 121-10m For n= 3 we get = 10220m For n= 4 we get h = 969nm For n= 5 we get } = 9464nm For n= 6 we get A = 93-45 nm Thus at the level of accuracy of our calculation, there are four lines 121-1nm, 102-2nm, 969nm and 9464nm. If the wavelengths are 41, Ao then the total energy of the excited start must be 2nch ,2ach M Er) E, = Ey+ 4E, But £, = -4£y and E, = -—s" where we are ignoring reduced mass effects. 7 4E, Then AE y ~ A BEER , BCT 4 2 Substituting the values we get WB Which we take to mean n = 5. (The result is sensitive to the values of the various quantities and smnaii differences yet anu! bevause differeuve of wu lange quantities is involved ; nv - E, eH ~ _meh(i 1)" Ey- i v2 ae) 6.34 For the longest wavelength (first) line of the Balmer series we have on using the generalized Balmer formula 2p(1_ 4 w+ 22(4-4) vm |} 2nc 81c the result x - —2me_ z Maman ap(y-1) 32R 4 176 xe Then AR = Ai pam 9s . 1 Ba 1tymen “5572 R pu HRC et 80 R= = 2-07 x i0" sec WSZ AR 6.35 From the formula of the previous problem = 2-V Ran Substitution of AA = 59-3nm and & and the previous problem gives Z = 3 This identifies the ion as Li’* 6.36 We start from the generalized Balmer formula 1a =R715- eee Here m= n+ijne2,...0 The interval between extreme lines of this series (series n) is 1 1 1 Ao = RZ|=-—; |-R2| =-——, | - rk? 1y w= Re (5-2) 2-1) = Rahn Hence n=Z 1 do Then the angular frequency of the first line of this series (eves n)is Pe (1st i Oy -a2 (5 277 278 6.37 6.38 6.39 Then the wavelength will be 2ne Me 1 Oe Substitution (with the value of R from problem 6.34 which is also the correct value determined directly) gives Dy = 0-468 pm. For the third line of of Balmer series o = RZ Hence a or Ze Substitution gives Z = 2. Hence the binding energy of the electron in the ground state of this ‘ion is By = 4By = 4x 1305 = 5450 The ion is He*. To remove one electron requires 24-6 eV. The ion that is left is He’ which in its ground start has a binding energy of 4), = 4K. The complete binding energy of both electrons is then E = Ey+4hR Substitution gives E = 79-1eV By conservation of energy 1.49 2mhe ymvee > ~E, where E, = 4%R is the binding energy of the electron in the ground state of He*. (Recoil of He** nucleus is neglected). Then Substitution gives v = 225 «10° m/s 279 6.40 Photon can be emitted in H -H collision only if one of the H is excited to ann = 2 state 6.41 which then dexcites ton = 1 state by emitting a photon, Let v, and v, be the velocities of the two Hydrogen atoms after the collision and M their masses. Then, energy momentum conservation Mv,+Mv, = V2MT in the frame of the ry H atom) 1 3 gMvi+ 5 Mvi+ Gar -T 3 GAR = *R (: - *) is the excitation energy of the m = 2 state fram the ground state 2 sufete[V _ =| a =T Eliminating v2 M 1 27. 271 3 or Sul ai- aut |3an er uf vt +ire3ar=7 t z 4 . (3 wi 2 For minimum T, the square on the left should vanish. Thus T = 3ar = 20-4eV In the rest frame of the original excited nucleus we have the equations O = py + Pr Sak =| Bl +pi/2M (392 is the energy available in n = 2 —> = 1 transition corresponding to the first Lyman line.) 3nKM Then 2 Pt 2M cpy- =0 or (put+Mcy? = E+3nRM v2 p= -Mc+V 2 s3aRM - ~Mesme(1+325) . (We could have written this directly by noting that pj/2.M < mvV,+MV, = ‘arr > v= Vi-Ve eM or 2 — = m_ — Vo =V- 2 m+M* 1 lmM > ¢ d we get Eas M)V +> 5 eee , qimt MV +o MY ~amer In the frame V = 0, this reduces to the energy of a particle of mass _ mM. 8 neM wu is called the reduced mass. 4 4 Then E,- "5S and R- PE 20 an 6.47 283 Since fie ~m(1-77) 1+2 M M these values differ by 37(« 054%) from the values obtained without considering nuclear motion. (M = 1837m) The difference between the binding cnergics is AE, = E,(D)-£,(H) m é os: m on led ~ me (im 2H | 2M For the first line of the Lyman series =A Substitution gives AE, = 3-7 meV. ‘2mhe _ 1_1)_ 3. d aa(t 4) hR az nw BRE 8xhc 3k ” 3, Hence (where ; is the wavelength of the first line of Lyman series without considering nuclear motion). Substitution gives (sce 6.21 for 4) using 4y = 121 nm Ad = 33pm 284 6.48 (a) In the mesonic system, the reduced mass of the system is related to the masses of the meson (1m) and proton (my) by = eee 196-04 Lom Then, * 2 separation between the particles in the ground state = ae 1 ft 186 m = 6-284 pm é Ey (meson) = uw = 186 x 13:65 eV = 254keV 8whe _ di (Hydrogen) 1 ~ FE, (meson) 186 0-65 nm (on using Ay (Hydrogen ) = 121 nm). (6) In the positronium ‘ E, ( positronium ) = oe 7 dec = 68eV Ay (positronium ) = 2, (Hydrogen ) = 0-243 nm. SCHRODINGER EQUATION 6.49 The kinetic energy is nonrelativistic in all three cascs. Now 2xh | 20h P 2mT using T = 1602 x 10717 Joules, we get de = 1226 pm dp = 2:86 pm dy = — = 0-185 pm. (where we have used a mass number of 238 for the U nucleus). he 2xh 2nh 6.50 From i = = V2mT Anh? It? weiné "ame * ae \ mi) Thus h-7, = 2% ree (kd ™ \(% Pals Substitution gives AT = 451 eV = 0-451 keV. 6.51 We shall use My ~ 2M,. The CM is moving with velocity y= V2M,T 2 un To 2 Tr ‘with respect to the Lab frame. In the CM frame the velocity of neutron is -yeV2t 2h V2 M, OM, M, 3 2ah 3ah MiV'n V2M,T and ed Substitution gives 2’, = 86 pm Since the momenta are equal in the CM frame the de Broglie wavelengths will also be equal. If we da not assume M, « 2M, we shall get 25h (14M,/M,) 2M,T ue 286 6.52 If pz, py are the momenta of the two particles then their momenta in the CM frame will be + (pi -P)/2 as the particle are identical. Hence their de Broglie wavelength will be 2xh | _Amh 1j> = zl Pipl Vpe Ke (because p; 1 p>) = 2h i i ¥v Man ewes AM 6.53 In thermodynamic equilibrium, Maxwell’s velocity distribution law holds : AN(v) = @(v)dv = Aveo BY2ET gy ®(¥v) is maximum when '(v) =o The difines the most probable velocity. — The de Broglie wavelength of H molecules with the most probable velocity is 2ah 2ah ™Vpr V2mkT Substituting the appropriate value especially m = my, = 2my,, T = 300K, we get A= 126 pm 6.54 To find the most probable de Broglie wavelength of a gas in thermodynamic equilibrium we & 5 It is given by w(A)dd = -B(v)dv (where ~ sign takes account of the fact that A decreaes as v increases). Now 2xh 2mh ove he dy ~ 28h ay met Thus W(A) = tavern rer( dv) an] 6.55 287 where This is maximum when 4 WA) 0 yA] 584 $ or ye = Va/2 = xh /VmkT Using the result of the previous problem it is 126 dor = = 89-1 pm or pe Pm P For a relativistic particle T+mc* = total enemy = Squaring 2xhe VIT(T+2mc) 2nh V 2mr(1+—25) (72 mej Hence Ae If we use nonrclativistic formula, Daw = dwanh | _T wr” Ame so ai x T If T/2mc?<<1, we can wit (143 m bi Thus T s 2 Ame B) se the error is tess than A For clectron the error is not more than 1 % it 268 6.56 T s 4x 0511 x 01 MeV ss 20-4keV For a proton, the error is not more than 1 % if T < 4x 938x001 McV he. T 2 375 MeV. The de Broglie wavelength is = 2A VE mv and the Compton wavelength is 2xh Myc The two are equal if B = V 1-?, where B-5 de or pet vz The corresponding kinetic energy is a 2 T= me = (V2-1) me? Vi-p? Here mg is th rest mass of the particle (here an electron). For reiativistic eiectrons, the formuia for the short waveiength iimit of X- rays wiii be Qahe _ me( 4-1}. Vi inie ne B sh ie 2h ? or (rem) = Pam? or (er) (ere) =P 2xh medsn or p= SRV 147 ime Hence Matha]! Vie h Ds ene or Av, > For an electron this means an uncertainty in velocity of 116 m/s if Ax = 1078m = 1pm For a proton Av, = 63 cm/s For a ball Av, = 1x 107” cm/s 202 6.67 As in the previous problem Av & 1-16 x 10° m/s ml The actual velocity v; has been calculated in problem 6.21. It is vy, = 2-21 x 10° m/s Thus Av _ v, (They are of the same order of magnitude) 668 Ax = d/2n = 22h 1 LBL Pp Pp 2a my Thus ave ey Thus A v is of the same order as v. 6.69 Ini eh . , uncertainty Av 5 “>. With this incertainty the wave train will spread out to a distance n/ long in time p= nt/ ~ Ut see. = 86x10" sec. _ 107 sec 6.70 Clearly Ax <1 so Apj : Now p, = Ap, and so poe Im * ImE 2 Thus Tain = Py = 095 eV 2m 6.71 The momentum the electron is Ap, = V2mT Uncertainty in its momentum is Ap, = h/Ax =/I Ape hss Ps IV2mT Substitution gives AY AP 2 97541075 = 1074 =: P 6.72 6.73 6.74 293 By uncertainty principle, the uncertainty in momentum * ap >t For the ground state, we expect Ap _ p so nw E_—, 2m? The force excerted on the wall can be obtained most simply from 2 re-20 Lh at mr? We write na th PAP ae ~y i.e. all four quantities are of the same order of magnitude. Then AVE k Ew phat bee = ei Vn mix) +h Thus we get an So situation (E = minimum) when h xey- VX Vmk and then E-& 41Vt =ho Quantum mechanics gives Ey = ho/2 Hence we write r Ar, p_Ap h/Ar noe Then E= -= o 2mr 2 4 1 (t_mé) me an = 15 “Im\r a nh Hence "5 = 7 = 53 pm for the equilibrium state. and then 294 6.75 6.76 Suppose the width of the slit (its extension along the y- axis) is 6. Then each electron has an uncertainty Ay _ 6. This translates to an uncertainty Ap, _%/d. We must therefore have Py > hd. For the image, brodening has two sources. We write A(5 ) = +A’) where A’ is the width caused by the spreading of electrons due to their transverse momentum, We have t th , eo iz MoE” mud nh mvé For large 8, A(5) _ & and quantum effect is unimportant. For small 8, quantum effects are large. But A(8) is minimum when 3-V th my as we see by completing the square. Substitution gives 3 = 1025x1075 m ~ 0-01 mm Thus (3) = 8+ The Schrodinger equation in one dimension for a free particle is indy Wa x dt mop Then xO) Lexp (x) zai E must be real and positive if — (x) i to be bounded everywhere. Then ap (x,t) = Const exp(i(V2mEx-£7)) \ i This particular solution describes plane waves. 208 6.77 We look for the solution of Schrodinger eqn. with _# éy 2m dv The boundary condition of impenetrable walls means w(x) = 0 forx =O andx =] (as p(x) = 0 forx <0 and x >/,) =Ey,0sxs1 a) The solution of (1) is als) oe V2ME y(z) og Ee Then (0) = 0=>B=0 v() = 0 = Asin 22} 2 9 A #050 Hence Bete i 2mi? Thus the ground state wave function is w(x) = Asin We evaluate A by nomalization t « 1 = 2 f sin? 2 dx -a1 f sn?oae -ald 0 Thus a-¥2 Finally, the probability P for the particle to lie in z sxs i is 2 3 2A L 21) 27 int ZX paP(ssxs 3!) fs 7 a¥ 1 3 nf 23 ~2f wtoao = 1 f (1-on20)20 x nu Ww 3 296 (2) = Boos 2mEX BREE 4 sig S2MEX Then the boundary condition v(= 2] =0 BeoeV2ME! psig V2mE! gives cos “55, * Asin — There are two cases. V¥2mEt x (1) A= 0, “SE = nest gives even solution. Here V2mE = (ane1) ew nd E, = (2ne1 P24, a (2n+ rT E(x) = VF cos (amet) n= 0,1,2,3,... This solution is even under x—* - x. Q) Bx0, Y2mE1 297 = 005 (nn!) dx 1 “if [ooscn—) sin(n+n’) 1 | sin(nn')mat vl, ! (n=) (nen) If n= 7, this is zero as n and n’ are integers. 6.80 We have found that we nba aml" Let N(£) = number of states upto £. This number is n. The number of states upto E+dEisN(E%dE) = N(E)+dN(E). Then dN(E) = 1 and aN(E) 1 qi “BE where AE = difference in energies between the n™ & (n+1)" level . (upto rw = Batt ea . a (neglecting 1 5x7 = 493 682 The wave function for the ground state is u(x, y) = Asin sin 4% we find A by normalization teas fay ab PRY. 42 9b Thus ‘Then the requisite probability is rrfete S sin? BE sin? 4 =2 2 Tas sin? = on doing the y integral a 4 a 299 “a sin 2% = 2 fafs 1 cos 22) 2] a 2" 3 as a a|3° 2x/a 1_v3 = 1-3 0196 = 196%. 6.83 We proceed axactly as in (6.81). The wave function is chosen in the form (%y,z) =A sink, xsin ky sin kyz. (The origin is at one comer of the box and the axes of coordinates are along the edges.) The boundary conditions are that y = 0 for x=0x=ay=0yraz=07250 This gives nx mn nx ky = —, k= —,& = — 1 a 2 a 3 a The energy eigenvalues are mi E(m, Mm, my) = (ni tn +m) 2ma The first level is (1, 1, 1). The second has (1, 1, 2), (1, 2, 1) & (2, 1, 1). The third level is (1, 2, 2) or (2, 1, 2) ot (2, 2, 1). Its energy is ow 2mm The fourth energy level is (1, 1, 3) or (1, 3, 1) or (3, 1, 1) ue Its is Ex . enerpy 1 2ma (b) Thus # A= E,-E3* ee (©) The fifth level is (2, 2, 2). The sixth level is (1, 2, 3), (1, 3, 2), (2, 1, 3), (2 3, 1), B, 1, 2), G, 2, 1) Its energy is TP 9? ma and its degree of degeneracy is 6 (six). -300 6.84 ‘We can for definiteness assume that the discontinuity occurs at the point x = 0. Now the Schrodinger equation is 2 EEStor) - ev We integrate this equation around x = 0 i.e, from x =—e, to x= +e, where ¢,, €2 are small positive numbers. Then +4 oy v & -- Gade =f (E-0(2)y(eax “, =, a a 2 or (ae elie = 28 f E-U0s)ee V2) Since the potential and the energy Fare finite and 1 (1) is hounded by assumption, the integral on the right exists and —> 0 as €;, €—>0 Thus (2) -(2) as tj, & 70 Ss So (a) is continuous at x = 0 (the point where U(x) has a finite jump discontinuity.) (a) Starting from the Schrodinger equation in the regions I & IT fy 2mE yg vind 1 ao is @) dy _2mE(U-E) og vin ( re = v Q where Uy > E> 6, we easily derive ihe solutions in 7 & if W(x) = Asin kx +B cos kx @ Wy (x) = Ce%4+De“ Oy 301 2mE 2m(Ug-E) where P- poe =e w wv The boundary conditions are W(o)=0 (5) {dw\ . and YW & (a) are continuous at x = /, and Y must vanish at x = + %, Then ay = Asin kx and W, = De™™* so Asinkl = De“! kAcoskl = -aDe~*! From this we get tank! = -£ « or snkl=2kl/VEP+C? ws nr/ V2 oe = 2 kIV/2mUgl” (6) Plotting the left and right sides of this equation we can find the points at which the straight lines cross the sine curve. The roots of the equation corresponding to the eigen values of energy £; and found from the inter section points (k/);, for which tan (k/);< 0 (ie. 24 & 4" and other even quadrants). It is seen that bound states do not always exist. For the first bound state to appear (refer to the line (b) above) Xu (EDs mn = 5 302 2 686 UyI? = (5*) Kt (b) Substituting, we get (P Up)imin = re 8m as the condition for the appearance of the first bound state. The second bound state will appear when &d is in the fourth quadrant. The magnitude of the slope of the straight line must then be less than 2 sf 3x Corresponding to (Ka min = =" = 3)F = (2x 2-1) Sis For n bound states, it is casy to convince one self that the slope of the appropriate straight line (upper or lower) must be less than (Dyan = Qn = 1) 5 2 Then (PUdde, win = Qa ek +4 i 7 Do not forget to note that for large n both + and - signs in the Eq. (6) contribute to soluiions. 2 m 2 42 2.(3,) % er (i) tm 3 Ala an It is easy to check that the condition of the boud state is satisfied. Also 2m 2 V 2% 3 al= VF (Up-E)! -ViPP -4e Then from tie previous probiem ana e v2 D=-Ae™'sinkl =A By normalization r T=A? Sotecacef ° 1 eM gy 303 as =A? Lf (1-cor2kxyaceif 4e7 dy ° ofS eo) «4 VF (os) The probability of the particle to be located in the region x > I is ay Ps fv dxe it +3 -1 4 oe cee G2 3k a = (+32) Je dy = px ssB, = 149%, 6.87 The Schrodinger equation is Vey 27 (E-U(r))W =0 when a depends on r only, and fx 2m U(r))x=0 a? The solution is y= Asinkr, retry Be« 2mE w and %=0r>% (For r = fanr tre =e are -S fre dxa-7 In MKS units we should read (7/4 €q) for e. 307 6.93 We find A by normalization as above. We get A= Then the electronic charge density is pa elw]? =~ 6 Sw pl 2 The potential w (7 due to this charge density is which we write as Yj" + Y, = 0, <0 pu 2mE | and Wy" +02 Vy = 0 x>0 2m as e (E-U)>0 It is convenient to look for solutions in the form yy set Re x <0 Wy = Ac! + Be x20 In region (x <0), the amplitude of e'** is written as unity by convention. In II we expect only a transmitted wave to the right, B = 0 then. So Wy, = Ae’ x>0 The boundary conditions follow from the continuity of W & ae atx = 0. 14+R=A iK(1-R) #iaA 1-R_«@ kro tor & "Riya 308 The reflection coefficient is the absolute square of R : 2 k-a re lRP = lire (b) In this case E< Uy, a? = - <0. Then W, is unchanged in form but Wy = Ae **+Be*?* we must have B = U since otherwise w (x) will become unbounded as x—> © . Finally W, = Ae Inside the barrier, the particle then has a probability density equal to | vo]? = lale-?** This decreases to 4 of its value in 2 28 2V2m(W-E) 6.95 The formu a D = exp -2f V2m(V(x)-E) dx Here V(x,) = V(x,) = E and V(x)>E in the region x2 >x> x. (@) For the problem, the integral is trivial D ~ exp le Vim) | (b) We can without loss of generality take x = 0 at the point the potential begins to climb. Then 0 x<0 U(x) = Up7 0 2P) in a Li atom 2mhe aR UR A” Gra” Grae For the short wave cut-off wave-length of the same series 2xhe AR Ia” (24a,)° From these two equations we get on subtraction Var | 2xhe(y-h 3 409 = dye ~V Baw Ry Teean? 4%" h-% Thus in the ground state, the binding energy of the electron is 2 Ey- ao aa -nn/ (V Rina -1} = sseev + QncAh 6.100 6.101 6.102 The encrgy of the 3 S state is EQS) =-—*2 _ . _ 203ev C2 G20my . ‘The energy of a 2 S state is EQS) = - —**__ . - s39ev (2-0-417 The energy of a 2 P state is E(2P)~-—*R_. _3ssev (2-04) We sce that E(2S)2P and 2P—>25. Direct 35 > 25 transition is forbidden by selection rules. The wavelengths are determined by E,)-E, = AE = 2ahe Substitution gives d = 0816 pm(3S—>2P) and 2 = 0674 m(2P—>25) The splitting of the Na lines is due to the fine structure splitting of 3 p lines (The 3 s state is nearly single except for possible hyperfine effects.) The splitting of the 3 p level then equals the energy difference ag = 2%he _Qwhe _2ahe(M-M) . Awhear ey Me v Here AA = wavelength difference & 4 = average wavelength. Substitution gives AE = 20 meV The sharp series arise from the transitions ns —> mp. The s lines are unsplit so the splitting is duc entircly to the p level. The frequency difference between sequent lines is ae and is the same for all lines of the sharp series. It is 1 (2uhe 2xhe 2xcAr nh A hy, Ady Evaluation gives 1-645 x 10“ rad/s 312 6.103 We shall ignore hyperfine interaction. The state with principal quantum number n = 3 has orbital angular momentum quantum number 1 = 0,1,2 6.104 6.105 ingular momentum is obtained by ifL«0 JoL- 5 and b+ i 2 ‘We then get the final designations 351, 3P1, 3 Psa, 3Dan, 3Dsr- 2 2 > oo ‘The rule is that if J = L'+S” then J takes the values |L-S| to L+S in step of 1. Thus : (@) The values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (b) The values are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6 (©) The values are 4, 3, 3, 2, For the state 4p, L = 1,5 = 3 (since 2s+1 = 4). For the state Sd, L =2,s=2 The possible values of J are se ak 2°2°2 J:4,3,2,1,0 for Sd The value of the magnitude of angular momentum istVJ(J+1) . Substitution gives the values 4P: J for 4p aud aVE.7 5 2 5D:0,4V2,2V6,nVI2, AVI 6.106 6.107 6.108 6.109 313 (@) For the Na atoms the valence electron has principal quantem number n = 4, and the possible values of orbital angular momentum are = 0, 1, 2, 3 50 Inax = 3. The state is 7F, maximum value of J is Z Thus the state with maximum angular momentum will be Bia 1 nV63 For this state Moy = VW 2.2 BY 8 2. 2 (©) For the atom with electronic configuration 1 s* 2 p 3 d.. There are two inequivalent valence electrons. The total orbital angular moments will be 1, 2, 3 so we pick [ = 3. The total spin angular momentum will be s = 0,1 so we pick up s = 1. Finally J will be 2, 3, 4 so we pick up 4. Thus maximum angular momentum state is 5p, For this state May =HV4xS = 2nV5. For the f state L = 3, For the d state L = 2. Now if the state has spin s the possible angular momentum are |Z-S| wiles The number of J angular momentiim values is 2$+1 if L> Sand 2L +1 if L S = 3 corresponding to aoe nV 1S MON 99 = 3 Maximum orbital angular momentum —> L-3 " a2 hv 15 corresponding to My - AV 55 - S Maximum total angular momentum = J = 2 : a corresponding to M = AVe so In vector model L=J-S or in magnitude squared L(L+1)¥ =S(J+1)W4S(S+i1)w-27S” stk | T(J +1) +S(S+1)-L(L+1) Th J,S)= ms cos (€7, 8) 2VF(F+1) VS(S4+1) Substitution gives . with the addition j, = 5 to jg = 5 or > The latter gives us J=0,1,2,3; 1,2,3,4 All these values are reached above. Selection rules are AS=0 ALwzl AJ =0,2£1(no 0-0). Thus 2D. > Py» is allowed 3p, — 25,,. not allowed 35, —> 3p, is not allowed (AL = 2) {Fiz —> “Ds is allowed For a3 d state of a Li atom, $ = $ because there is only one electron and L = 2. The total degeneracy is B= (2L+1)(2S+1) = 5x2 = 10. The states are 7D, and "Ds and we check that 2 g- 446 = (2341+ (2501) \ 7 N v The state with greatest possible total angular momentum are For a ?P state Jadera Pic, 2p, Its degeneracy is 4. For a °D state Its degeneracy is 2x3+1 = 7 = 142 =3 ie. 3D; 4 For a *F state 3430 fie, Zz Zz Its degeneracy is 2x21 = 10. 316 6.117 The degeneracy is 2J +1. So we must have J = 3, From L = 3S, we see that S must be 8 S=0 thn L=0 Sz2,L 6 and then J» 3, Thus the state is 3 Fs consistent 6.118 The order of filling is K,L, M shells, then 4s”, 3d then 4p*. The electronic configuration of the element will be 18°2s?2p'3s°3 p°4s°3.d4p* (There must be three 4p electrons) The number of electrons is Z = 33 and the clement is As. (The 3d subshell must be filled before 4p fills up.) 6.119 (a) ) when the partially filled shell contains three p clectrons, the total spin S must cqual Ss i or 3. The state S = Sas maximum spin and is totally symmetric under ex- change of spin lables. By Pauli’s exclusion principle this implies that the angular part of the wavefunction must be totally anti symmetric. Since the angular part of the wave function a a P electron is vector rn 7; the total wavefunction of three p clectrons is the totally This combination is a scalar and hence has L = 0. The spectral term of the ground state is then 3 iy since Jn3: 2 We can think of four p electrons as consisting of a full p shell with two p holes. The state of maximum spin S is then S = 1. By Pauli’s principle the orbital angular momen- tum part must be antisymmetric and can only have the form Axi where 7], 7 are the coordinates of holes. The result is harder to sce if we do not use the concept of holes. Four p electrons can have S = 0, 1, 2 but the S = 2 state is totally symmetric. The corresponding angular wavefunction must be totally antisymmetric, But this is impossible : there is no quantity which is amtisymmetric in four vectors. Thus the maximum allowed Sis S = 1. We can construct such a state by coupling the spins of electrons 1 & 2 to S = 1 and of electrons 3 & 4 to S = 1 and then coupling the resultant spin states to S = 1. Such a state is symmetric under the exchange of spins of 1 & 2nd 3 and 4 but antisymmetric under the simultaneous exchange of (1, 2) & (3, 4). the con- 317 jugate angular wavefunction must be antisymmetric under the exchange of (1, 2) and ‘ ge of (3, 4) by P simultancous exchange of (1, 2) and GB 4). (This is because two exchanges of electrons are involved.) The required angular wavefunction then has the form (Fo)x (BF) and is a vector, L = 1. Thus, using also the fact that the shell is more than half full, we find the spectral term °P, (J =L+5). 6.120 (a) The maximum spin angular momentum of three electrons can be S = 3 « This state is totally symmetric and hence the conjugate angular wavefunction must be antisymmetric By Pauli’s cxclusion principle the totally antisymmetric state must have different magnetic quantum numbers. It is easy to see that for d electrons the maximum value of the magnetic quantum number for orbital angular momentum |M,,| = 3 (from 2 + 1 + 0). Higher values violate Pauli’s principle. Thus the state of highest orbital angular momentum con- sistent with Pauli’s principle is L = 3. The state of the atom is then 4F, where J = L-S by Hund’s rule. Thus we get 4 Fin The magnitude of the angular momentum is aV22 bv 222 (b) Seven d clectrons mean three holes, Then S = 3 and L=3 as before, But JaL+S= by Hund’s rule for more than half filled shell. Thus the state is “Fon Total angular momentum has the magnitude Yo _ shy AVeD Vu. 6.121 (@) *F) : The maximum value of spin is $ = 1 here. This means there are 2 electrons. L = 3.0 5 and p electrons are ruled out. Thus the simplest possibility is d electrons. This is the correct choice for if we were considering f electrons, the maximum value of L allowed by Pauli principle will be L = 5 (maximum value of the magnitude of magnetic quantum number will be 3+2 = 5.) Thus the atom has two d electrons in the unfilled shell. 0) Psp Here L= 1,5 = 4 and re} 318 6.122 6.123 6.124 © @ 0) Since J = L +5, Hund’s rule implies the shell is more than half full. This means one electron less than a full shell. On the basis of hole picture it is easy to see that we have p electrons. Thus the atom has 5 p electrons. “So Here S = 5, L = 0. We either have five electrons or five holes. The angular part is antisymmetric. For five d electrons, the maximum value of the quantum number consistent with Pauli exclusion principle is (2+1+0-1-2) = 0 so L = 0. For f or g electrons L > 0 whether the shell has five electrons or five holes. Thus the atom has five d electrons. If S = 1 is the maximum spin then there must be two electrons (If there are two holes then the shell will be more than half full.). This means that there are 6 electrons in the full shell so it is a p shell. By Paul’s principle the only antisymmetric combination of two electrons has L = 1 AlsoJ = L -S as the shell is less than half full. Thus the term is 3Pp Ss 2 means either 3 electrons or 3 holes. As the shell is more than half full the former possibility is ruled out. Thus we must have seven d clectrons. Then as in problem 6.120 we get the term “F,,2 With three electrons S = 3 and the spin part is totally symmetric. It is given that the basic term hasL = 3501 = 3 is the state of highest orbital angular momentum. This is not possible with p electron so we must have d electrons for which L = 3 for 3 electrons. For three fg electrons L > 3. Thus we have 3 d electrons. Then as in (6.120) the ground state is “p. We have Sd electrons in the only unfilled shell. Then S = x. Maximum value of L consistent with Pauli’s principle is L = 0. Then J = $ So by Lande’s formula ups S(7 7 3)*5(3)-° gis ~~ a)? 2(3) Thus w= eVTT+T) bn = 2p = 2035 a. The ground state is “Ss. 6.125 By Boltzmann formula 6.128 Na _ 8 .-auxKr Mh Here AE = energy difference between n = 1 and n = 2 states = 136(1-}ev= 10-22eV 81 = 2 and gy = 8 (counting 2s & 2P states.) Thus Ny -19, = Nae den 022 « 1602 10 "138 x 107 3000 2 9.7, 49717 M N, Explicitly nn a ge ORT, AE, -ar(1-3 =) i 2 for the nth excited state because the degeneracy of the state with principal quantum number + 2 nis 2n?. We have NL 8 tear gy -tesonar No 8 80 Here g = degeneracy ofthe 3P sate = 6, g> = degeneracy of the 35 state = 2 and 2xhe A = wavelength of the 3P—>35 tine { = energy difference between 3P & 35 : \ levels. Substitution gives « In time ¢ the atom travels a distance vt so ¢ = —. Thus the number of = ——— = 1:29 107° second. vinn As a result of the lighting by the mercury lamp a number of atoms are pumped to the excited state, In equilibrium the number of such atoms is N. Since the mean life time of the atom is T, the number decaying per unit time st — , Since a photon of energy 2 CRMC vesults from tae a . This must equal P. Thus each decay, the total radiated power will be 2xhe | Pth 1 0 wea px/ 2ahe * Fen 7 87X10 320 6.129 6.130 613k The number of excited atoms per unit volume of the gas in 2P state is Nw note 2eheaer & Here g, = degeneracy of the 2p state = 6, g, = degencacy of the 2s state = 2 and 2 = wavelength of the resonant line 2p — 2's. The rate of decay of these atoms is x per Sec. per unit volume. Since cach such atom emits light of wavelength A, we must have L2whe | & ,-2ehoaer _ p ti. 8s Thus = L2mhe, Bp .-2enentr 65-4 10795 = 65-4n5 (a) We know that Px = Ay Pig = Bp Uae Mea An no Pe eM TW] enerr ay mie Pat 1 7 pe 7 GhokT_; PH Perry For the transition 2P* 15 ho = 2%R and Pit a, octet Pz we get substitution gives 7x 107 ® (b) The two rates become equal when o*”*T 2 or T = (ho/kin2) = 1-71 10°K Because of the resonant nature of the processes we can ignore nonresonant processes. We also ignore spontancous emission since it does not contribute to the absorption coefficient and is a small term if the beam is intense enough. Suppose / is the intensity of the beam at some point. The decrease in the value of this intensity on passing through the layer of the substance of thickness dx is equal to -dI = XIdx = (NB -MaBa) (Zh de Here N, = No. of atoms in lower level “ N= No of atoms in the upper level per unit volume. By, Bo are Einstein coetficients and /, = energy density in the beam, c = velocity of light. 6.132 6.133 A [actor # @ arises because each transition result in a loss or gain of energy Aw Hence x= By By 1-222) eM 4a a But 81. Bi = By 80 ho 81. No res Moa (1-BR Ny, By Boltzman factor Tee MR When @ >>kT we can put N, = No the total number of atoms per unit volume. Then rem(i-e™") where x9 = TON Bn is the absorption coefficient for T—> 0. A short lived state of mean life T has an uncertainty in energy of AE wt which is transmitted to the photon it emits as natural broadening. Then 1 x Anas =F so Alig = Imex’ The Déppler broadening on the other hand arises from the thermal motion of radiating atoms. The effect is non-relativistic and the maximum broadening can be written as Adve og . 2% » c Addon _ 4% Vt Bat x Tous ‘Substitution gives using v,, = zat = 157m/s, Aa Dopp, 4. 3 7 1210 Note :- Our formula is an order of magnitude estimate. From Moseley’s law 3 2 Og, = FR(Z-1) or wee tt Ke" SR(Z-1)° De (Cu) 125)? (Bre mecrey * (a) -(& Thus 322 6.134 6.135 6.136 Substitution gives Dx, (Cu) = 153-9 pm @) From Moseley’s law Om = 3R (Z-o) or dy = BEE Bee “ox,” SR (2-0) We shall take o = 1. For Aluminium (Z = 13) Ie (ALY = 843-2 pm and for cobalt (Z = 27) dx, (Co) = 179-6 pm (6) This difference is nearly equal to the energy of the K, line which by Moseley’s law is equal to (Z = 23 for vanadium) AE = hag = 3513622222 = 494 keV We calculate the Z values corresponding to the given wavelengths using Moseley’s law. See problem (134). Substitution gives that Z = 23 corresponding to 2 = 250 pm and Z = 27 corresponding tod = 179 pm There are thus three elements in a row between those whose wavelengths of K, lines are equal to 250 pm and 179 pm. From Moseley’s law de (NE) - BE 1 Ra (NED R (g-1)7 where Z = 28 for Ni . Substitution gives Dx, (Ni) = 1665 pm Now the short wave cut of off the continuous spectrum must be more energetic (smaller wavelength) otherwise K,, lines will not emerge. Then since AX = Ax, — Ao = 84pm we get do = 825 pm This corresponds to a voltage of Substitution gives V = 15-0kV 6.137 6.138 6.139 6.140 323 Since the short wavelength cut off of the continuous spectrum is do = 050 nm the voltage applied must be. V = ame = 248kV since this is greater than the excitation potential of the K series of the characteristic spectrum (which is only 1:56 k V ) the latter will be observed. Suppose dy ~ wavelength of the characteristic X-ray line. Then using the formula for short wavelength limit of continuous radiation Hence hy = SE Using also Moseley’s law, we get of 8xe nat a Zalt gra 7 it? = 29. 3aR The difference in frequencies of the K and L Continium absorption edges is equal, according to the Bobr 4" ~~ picture, to the frequency of the K, line (see the diagram below). Thus by Moseley’s formule 3 Aw = ZR(z-1P edge vf the or Ze=it 3R The metal is titanium. 22 From the diagram above we see that the binding energy E, of a K electron is the sum of the energy of a K,, line and the energy corresponding to the L edge of absorption spectrum +2nRr(z1P For vanadium Z = 23 and the energy of K,, line of vanadium has been calculated in problem 134 (b), Using 2RHe Osi keV for dy = 240m we get 324 6.141 By Moseley’s law to = PARE Bg, = 3aR(Z-1) where ~ Ey is the energy of the K electron and ~E; of the L electron, Also the energy of the line corresponding to the short wave cut off of the K series is Ey = 2uhe | _2mhe _ K" X-AK” 2ne -AR @ a ho TO. 7] wan @ Ime Ime ho he Hence E, = 2 _-no= 1-248 2me Qne @Ar Substitution gives for titanium (Z = 22) @ = 685 x10" s~! and hence E, = 0-47keV 6.142 The energy of the K, radiation of Zn is ho = Ger(z-1yt where Z = atomic number of Zinc = 30. The binding energy of the K electrons in iron is obtained from the wavelength of K absorption edge as Ex = 2xhC/Aq Hence by Einstein equation 3 2 2nhe T= GAR(Z-1) =F Substitution gives T = 1463kcV This corresponds to a velocity of the photo electrons of v = 227% 10° m/s J(J+1)+S8(S4+1)-L(L+1) From the Lande formula 27(T+1) 6.143 git (a) For S states L = 0. This implies J = S. Then, if S#0 g=2 (For singlet states g is not defined if L = 0) 925 o) For singlet states, J = L =i+2 J+1)-L(L+1 =1 8g 25(J+1) 6.144 (a) ‘°F, Here seS,n-3,7-4 (©) °F, Here $=2,L=3,J=2 6+6-12 gris el @ Py Here $=2,L—1,J=1 246-2 5 2x2 2 ge-lt (©) 3Po. For states with J = 0, L =S the g gactor is indeterminate. 6.145 (a) For the *F stateS=0,L=3=J eo 143x434 - 2x3x4 Hence w= V3x4 py = 2V3 ny @) For the Dy state S= 4,2 -2,7=3 1 3-14 18224 4 aS 30 75 dh eceeee 2 Hence w= 3V1D/4 tp = SV Boe 326 6.146 6.147 6.148 (©) We have 4 y+2 41 +2-6 3 25(J+1) or Sa(re1) = 3(741)-4 or J(J#1) = 127-3 4 8° Hence b 5VT2 oe = oe. The expression for the projection of the magnetic moment is Me = Bm; iy where my is the projection of Jon the Z-axis. Maximum value of the my is J. Thus gland Since J = 2, we get g = 2, Now J(J+1)+S(S+1)-L(L+1) 2 * 2I(+1) o,-@eSGe1)-6 2x6 214 S(S+1) 12 Hence S(S+1)=12 of S=3 Thus Ms =2V3x4 = 2V3h The angle betwecn the angular momentum vector and the field direction is the least when the angular mommentum projection is maximum i.e. Jh. Thus Th = VI(T+1) hos 30° a hal Tri "2 Hence J=3 3x441x2-2x3 84 Then gn sg 5 4 8 and b= SV3x4 py = oy. 3 eva For a state with n = 3, / = 2. Thus the state with maximum angular momentum is 2 Ds 6.149 6.150 6.151 327 Then 6/5, 7 4/2 Hence wes 2%2 ben 3 Bp To get the greatest possible angular momentum we must have S = Sy, = 1 Lely = 1+2=3andJ=L+S5=4 Then grit and w= SVG oy = Ey Since » = 0 we must have cither J= 0 or g = 0. But J = 0 is incompatible with L = 2and $= 3. Hence g = 0. Thus V(r41) 4305-203 O=1+——“S5 Fray or -3y(y+1) = Bo =~ 2 = wt a Ne wale From M=AVJ+1 =V2h we find J = 1. From the zero value of the magnetic moment we find g=0 on Le Ix2L(L+1 +2x3 9 2x1x2 rL(L+1)+8 ie 4 =0 Hence L = 3. The state is 328 6.152 6.153 If M is the total angular momentum vector of the atom then there is a magnetic moment ie ohn associated with it; here g is the Lande factor. In a magnetic field of induction B, an energy i = -gygit- Brn is associated with it. This interaction term corresponds to a presession of the anguiar momentum vector because if leads to an equation of motion of the angular momentum vector of the form aM = OxM s_ sMeB where Qe * Using Gaussian unit expression of tg pg = 0-927 x 107” erg/gauss, B = 10° gauss A = 1-054 x 1077’ erg sec and for the 7P3/ state 525: 3 3 x24kx5-1x2 gois222 2 iyi. : a5 3 2 2x5x and Q = 117x 10" rad/s oo 2 The same formula is valid in MKS units also But pg = 0-927 x 1072 Am’, B= 107! 7 and = 1-054 x 107 Joule sce. The answer is the same. The force on an atom with magnetic moment j°in a magnetic field of induction B is given by > es Fe(pv)B In the present case, the maximum force arise when pis along the axis or close to it. aB Then Fa = (We max 5g Here (iy mee = Rad. The Lande factor g is for *Py/» 1 1 and i= 80 (Hz )max = 5 He The magnetic field is given by R | tn? an Fry 6.154 6.155 329 zune (P42 y?" Ho 3a 7 “sans P 1 EI Substitution gives (using data in MKS units) a “75, Fe Gixid TN The magnetic field at a distance r from a long current carrying wire is mostly tangential and given by Hol _ Ho 27 Be" Oar ane” The force on a magnetic dipole of moment jt'duc to this magnetic field is also tangential has a magnitude nd (HV) By This force is nonvanishing only when the component of ji'along ‘hon zero. Then F=p, 5, vo 21 a hae Now the maximum value of py, = # Hg. Thus the force is Mo 20 Fear 0 Gq gf 297X10*N In the homogeneous magnetic field the atom experinces a force aB Frelusz Depending on the sign of J, this can be either upward or downward. Suppose the latter is true. The atom then traverses first along a parabola inside the field and, once outside, in a straight line. ‘Ihe total distance between extreme lines on the screen will be e | hy ht ale) +t-31/ mv Here my is the mass of the vanadium atom. (The first term is the displacement within the field and the second term is the displacement due to the transverse velocity acquired in the magnetic field). te--lpy—---b —-4| b= resup28|2 32 | ‘Thus using 1 myv? = T 2 330 we get For vanadium atom in the ground state ‘F,,. . 3x5 3x5 at 4 3%4 50-48 8 3x5 ax3% J-= 3 using other data, and substituting gots ob 13 we get oz 7 14510" G/em This value differs from the answer given in the book by almost a factor of 10°. For neutral atoms in stern Gerlach experiments, the value T = 22 MeV is much too large. A more appropriate value will be T = 22 meV i.e. 10° times smaller. Then one gets the right answer. 6.156 (a) The term 3Pp docs not split in weak magnetic field as it has zero total angular momentum, (b) The term “Fs,. will split into 2x 341 = 6 sublevels. The shift in each sublevel is given 2 by AE = -gu,Mz,B where M, = -J(J-1), ..., J and g is the Landi factor Sx7 1x3 goo a 73*4 38-48 6 2 pees 7 4 (©) In this case for the *D,,2 term 1x3 3x5 era -2x3 ge 2x3 4 6.157 (a) For the ‘D, term 2x3+0-2x3 ents Taxa ot and AE = - upM)B My = ~ 2,-1,0,+1,+2. Thus the splitting is BE = 4B ‘Substitution gives 8E = 579 eV 331 = 35 4x541x2-3%4 10 _ 5 (©) For the *F, term g = 14 ~° 52S elt: and a= -Supem, where M, = -4 to +4. Thus 6.158 (a) () @ ) bE = SupBx8 = 10 npB(= 2gT up) Substitution gives &E = 1447 neV The term ‘P, splits into 3 lines with M, = + 1, 0 in accordance with the formula AE = -R Un BM, 1x2+0-1x2 where gris The term ‘Sp does not split in weak magnetic field. Thus the transitions between *p, & 'Sq will result in 3 lines normal Zeeman triplet. The term 7Ds,7 will split ot in 6 terms in accordance with the formula AE = -gygMz Taser wp SXT#1K3=4x2x3 6 & 2x5%7 5 Ther term *P3/. will also split into 4 lines in accordance with the above formula with 3x541x3-4x1%2 92 2gk Mz=*>,% 7d g= 1+ 2x3%5 = Par It is seen that the Z eeman splitting is auomalous as g factors are different. 3D, > *Py The term 3D, splits into 3 levels (g = 5/2) The term °Py does not split. Thus the Zeeman spectrum is normal. For the 51; term 5x6+2x3-6x7 2x5x6 36-42 1-2-9 BiB L 1-> es 60 10 «10 gait =1 332 6.159 6.160 6.161 6.162 np AXS#2x3-5e6 |, 26-30 9 § 2x 4x5 4%; 7 10 We see that the splitting in the two levels given by AE = ~ gn B Mz is the same though the number of levels is different (11 and 9), It is then easy to sce that only the lines with following energies occur Khao, hwy * ugB. The Z ceman pattern is normal For a singlet temS=0,L=J,g= Then the total splitting is SE = 2S ugB Substitution gives J =3( = 8E/2p,B) The term is 1F,. As the spectral line is caused by transition between singlet terms, the Zeeman effect will be normal (since g = 1 for both terms). The energy difference between extreme components of the line will be 2 4g B .This must equal ,(2he\ _ 2xhcAr Be) 2 2 Bp BA Thus Adm B= = 35pm. From the previous problem, if the components are 4, 2 + AX, then A 2mhe AR” ypBr F tution * < R = * of the instrument. ‘or resolution 7 = R = 7 of the instrume Qahe 2ahe : aahe oR B Thus mBE<® © BRR Hence the minimum megnetic induction is 2ahe Bain = RR 7 ARG = O4T The 3Pp term does not split, The *D, term splits into 3 lines corresponding to the shift. AE = -g ug BM, with Mz = £ 1,0. The interval between neighbouring components is then given by BAe - stp? Hence Basse Bip 333 Now for the 3D, term en pg AXDHLK2-2x3 7 2x1x2 Substitution gives B = 3.00 kG. = 0.3 T. 6.163 (a) For the ?P3,> term and the energy of the ?P3,> sublevels will be 4 E (Mz) = Fy~ tp BMz 3 where Mz = 2 5, 2 ;- Thus, between neighbouring sublevels. 4 SEC Psa) = FMB For the P;/2 tenns and the separation between the two sublevels into which the 7P,, term will split is BE(Py2) - $58 The ratio of the two splittings is 2: 1. (0) The interval between neighbouring Zeeman sublevels of the Pp, term is Sup. The energy separation between D; and D, lines is 2 + © AD (this is the natural separation of the ?P them) . 4, po 2RRCAR Thus rs = p= SthcOR 2ugh Substitution gives B= 5-46kG 334 6.164 For the *Py,z level g = 4/3 (sce above) and the energies of sublevels are BE’ = E'9~ tug BMy where M‘, = 3, * # for the four sublevels For the 75; level, g = 2 (since L = 0) and 2 E = Ey-2 up B Mz 1 eee where a= 25 Pemnitted transitions must have AM, =0, #1 Thus only the following transitions occur = . 2 2 | Nw = + HpB/h = 3:96 x 10" rad/s -3/2 + -1/2 ar 1 7} A@= 2 tHpB/h = 132% 10 md/s ALi a) i B 2 Aaa 2 3 PEO. 66x 10" rad/s These six lines are shown below 8 2ugB 1 ane essere eteveree peers ceesere eee 5 MgB ni 335 6.165 The difference arises because of different selection rules in the two cases. In (1) the line is emitted perpendicular to the field. The selection rules are then AM =0,#1 In (2) the light is emitted along the direction of the field. Then the selection rules are AMz=21 AM; = 0 is forbidden. (@) In the transition 7Px)—> Sy This has been considered above. In (1) we get all the six lines shown in the problem above In (2) the line corresponding to i- 3 and ~ i ~- i is forbidden. Then we get four lines (o) 3p, %s, 3 2x3+1x2-1x2 3 For the >P, level, g = 1+ Ixd03 “3 So the energies of the sublevels are 7 » 3 E(Mz) = Bo-FUsBM, where Mz-+2,21,0 For the 35; line, g = 2 and the energies of the sublevels are E (hz) = Eo-2upB iz where Mz = = 1, 0. The lines are AM; = My-Mz=+1 ; -2-%-1,-1>0and0>1 AM, =0-1--1,070,1>1 AM, = 1, 2-1, 1-40, 0-1 All energy differences are unequal because the two g values are unequal. There are then nine lines if viewed along (1) and Six lines if viewed along (2). 6.166 For the two levels. E'y = Ey-8'w'sM'sB Ey = Ey- 8 hpMgB and hence the shift of the component is the value of do- MPT g as 6Mi] subject to the selection rule AM, = 0, + 1. For *D; 336 272 271 172 1-1 170 3x441x2-2x3 84 8-14 Dax wltogn3 For °P,, 14 2X3H1x2-1x2 3 8 2x2%3 2 veBl4a,, 3 Thus sony 3M 5 me| For the different transition we have the following table M2 8'-Mz8 B Me o-1 -3 yp 1 0 -tupB 0-0 1/6 ig B 07-1 3/2 pB -5/3 igB -170 -4/3 gB = 1/6 ig B 1-1 1/6 uy B 4/3 WB -17-2> 5/3 ugB -27-17 - 7/6 Wg B -2—-2-> 1/3 yg B -3—-2-> Hg B There are 15 lines in all. The lines farthest out are 1 —» 2 and -1—»-2. The splitting between them is the total splitting. It is Aw = QueBrh Substitution gives Aw = 7:8 x 10'° rad/sec. 6.4 MOLECULES AND CRYSTALS 6.167 6.168 6.169 6.170 In the first excited rotational level J = 1 Ey = 1x2% «Lye? sical so iy = 1257 = 51" classically Thus w-vz4 Now pasmee MS mF. Zt whére m is the mass of the mole cub and 7; is the distance of the atom from the axis. oe 4vV2h md Thus = 156 x 10" rad/s The axis of rotation passes through the centre of mass of the HC] molecule. The distances of the two atoms from the centre of mass arc met my dy = ——d, dq = ——d apt ee Thus J = moment of inertia about the axis 4 my Mer = zm dir+ mei der = moma? The energy difference ‘between two neighbouring levels whose quantum numbers arc T&I-1is wv Th UT 2J= 7" 786 meV Hence J = 3 and the levels have quantum numbers 2 & 3. The angular momentum is V27E = M Now Ie ad (1m = mass of Oz molecule) = 1-9584 x 107” gmc? So M = 3-68x10 ”ergsec. = 349% (This corresponds to J = 3) we From Ey = 7 (J +1) and the selection rule AJ = 1 or J—*J~—1 for a pure rotational spectrum we get o(4s-1) = 7 nh ‘Thus transition lines are equispaced in frequency Aw = T: 338 6171 6.172 6.173 In the case of CH molecule Doig 40 2 T= Ag 7 193x107" gm om m.my 2 Also _— Mm. +My so d = 1417x107'cm = 111-7pm If the vibrational frequency is wp the excitation energy of the first vibrational level will be 7 wp. Thu: cic ait J iviaiivuai icveis coniaiicd in ihe band bciween ihe gruund siaic and ite first vibrational excitation, then T+" 2r hig = where as stated in the problem we have ignored any coupling between the two. For HF molecule Tm CHE Pw 1336 x 1074 gm cm? iat mp Tm Hae1 - 21% _ ae74 Thea Fst} = SG . s974 For J = 14, J(J+1) = 210. For J = 13,J(J+1) = 182. Thus there lie 13 levels between the ground state and the first vibrational excitation. 21a a Wwe get 21a * We proceed as above. Calculating = 1118 1 2 Taking the square root we get J ~ 33. Now this must equal J(J+1) « (r+ From the formula # 5 I(J+ a7 aE we get J(J+1) = 21E/h* Hence whiting 6.174 339 we find ‘The quantity a is A. For lange E it is an _4/_T dE” Y OWE For an iodine molecule Thus for J = 10 aN —— aE" “Vv , ant -Bea(s41) THN Substitution gives on = 1:04 x 10° levels per eV For the first rotational level vt Ena = 255 = 7 and for the first vibrational level Ey =ho Io Evo Thus ee cee Esk Here @ = frequency of vibration. Now Tepe Pmt, m, +m, 340 6.175 6.176 (a) For Hz molecule I = 4-58 x 10~"! gm cm? and & = 36 gm (b) For HI molecule, T= 424710“ gm cm? and E = 1 (© For f, molecule I = 757 107* gm om? and & = 2872 2 The energy of the molecule in the first rotational level will be © me ratio of the number of molecules at the first excited vibrational level to the number of molecules at the first excited rotational level is -RevkT (Qy+1 Je PIs yarer 2 1 -hokTy .-WkT fe Me-2ever where B=-t/21 For the hydrogen molecule I = i my = 4:58 x 107“! gm cm? Substitution gives 3-04 x 10-* By definition 2D gts E,e7EAT ap > e ope oe Dd exp (-£,/k7) Bk in Penis ~t an de Bag 6.177 6.178 341 Thus for one gm mole of diatomic gas o Nes 2 ar where R = Nk is the gas constant. ho I ho >, in the present case 22 ~ 27088 and Cy,, = OS6R In the rotation vibration band the main transition is due to change in vibrational quantum number v —> v— 1. Together with this rotational quantum number may change. The “Zeroeth line” 0-0 is forbidden in this case so the neighbouring lines arise due to 1—*0 or 0-1 in the rotational quantum number, Now # Ew E, +77 I(I+1) +e Thus to = hoy Be (2 2) Hence son Re 2h so d= pao Substitution gives d = 0-128 nm. If Ap = wavclength of the red satellite and Ay = wavelength of the violet satellite 2nke | 2xhe then se. SS _-te dp do 2ahe _ 2xhe and 2whe _ 22%¢ tho Ww do Substitution gives De = 4243 nm Dy = 3868 om The two formulas can be combined to give 2nc o *" Tae- 7 hyo Fo 17 do one 342 6.179 6.180 6.181 As in the previous problem 11 we (g-dy) 4 @ = xe) —-— | = ——— = 1368 x 10" rad/s. ) haw dy The force constant x is defined by x= po” where 4 = reduced mass of the 5, molecule. Substitution gives x = 501N/cm The violet satellite arises from the transition 1 —> 0 in the vibrational state of the scattering molecule while the red satellite arises from the transition 0 —> 1. The intensities of these two transitions are in the ratio of initial populations of the two states i.e. in the ratio _-hehkt Thus en FORT 0.067 If the temperature is doubled, the rato increases to 0-259, an increase of 3-9 times. (@) C0,(0-C-0) The molecule has 9 degrees of freedom 3 for each atom. This means that it can have up to nine frequencies. 3 degrees of freedom correspond to rigid translation, the frequency associated with this is zero as the potential energy of the system can not change under igid translation. The PE. will not change under rotations about axes passing through the C-atom and perpendicular to the O - C - O line. Thus there can be at most four non zero frequencies. We must look for modes different from the above. — See One mode is O—O—041 => <_ <_ Another mode is O—_G—: Wo ‘These are the only collinear modes. A third mode is doubly degenerate: (3: o—_@—0 y (vibration in & 1 to the plane of paper). (©) CyHy(H-C-C-H) There are 4x 3-3-2 = 7 different vibrations. There are three collinear modes. 343 ‘Two other doubly degenerate frequencies are 4 ws together with their counterparts in the plane ” to the paper. 6.182 Suppose the string is stretched along the x axis from x = 0 to x = | with the end points fixed. Suppose y(x,1) is the transverse displacement of the clement at x at time t. Then y (x,t) obeys #y «v #y ar ax ‘We look for a stationary wave solution of this equation yet) = Asin 2rsin (ents) v where A & 6 are constants. In this from y = 0 at x = 0. The further condition yoo axel implies at =Nx, N>0 or N my Nis the number of modes of frequency < @. Thus dN- | de nv 344 6.183 6.184 Let (x, y,t) be the displacement of the element at (x,y) at time t. Then it obeys the equation ee (HE. ve ar? ax ‘oy where B= 0 atr=0,x=0,y=0 and yal. ‘We look for a solution in the form § = Asin ky xsin kyysin(@t+8) Then wo =v (+8) nn , ma ee we write this as lo Wan = (3") nV Here n,m>0. Each pair (n,m) determines a mode. The total mumber of modes whose frequency is < w is the area of the quadrant of a circle of radius ie ie. Lo’ we3() Le s Then aN = 0do - —j0do. 2nv 2nv where S = 1? is the arca of the membrane. For transverse vibrations of a 3-dimensional continuum (in the form of a cube say) we have the equation = SEL PT awe =o Here &'= E(x, y,z,¢). We look for solutions in the form & = A’sin ky x, sin ky, sin yz, sin(wr+6) This requires w” = v?(K+iG+K) From the = condition that = 0 for x= 0,x= 1,y= 0,y= 1,2= 0, 2= 1, we get = nx “poke Tr where m,; mz, my are nonzero positive integers. 2 le ntan? « (12 We then get manen = (-*) 345 Each triplet (7,, #2, 3) determines a possible mode and the number of such modes whose frequency < @ is the volume of the all positive octant of a sphere of radius io . Considering also the fact that the subsidiary condition div = 0 implies two independent values of A’ for each choice of the wave vector (k1, kp, ks) we find 3 3 N(o) = 1-42 (L0) .2 - Vor 33 \ayy sev 2 Thus an = V™ do. wv 6.185 To determine the Debye temperature we cut off the high frequency modes in such a way as to get the total number of modes correctly. (a) Ina linear crystal with 71 atoms, the number of modes of transverse vibrations in any given plane cannot exceed ro, Then = L 1 role ZS dom hoo 0 The cut off frequency Wp is related to the Debye temperature ® by Hoy = kO Thus o- (i) TMV (©) In a square lattice, the number of modes of transverse oscillations cannot exceed 7S. Thus &% or (©) In a cubic crystal, the maximum number of transverse waves must he 2 ng V (two for each atom). Thus ° Voo Vv 2 2mVezGz] odo= . " zeal aw Thus 0 = Ej) (x m9) 346 6.186 6.187 We proceed as in the previous example. The total number of modes must be 3 19 v (total transverse and one longitudinal per atom). On the other hand the number of transverse modes per unit frequency interval is given by Vor dN = vt while the number of longitudinal modes ner unit frequency tnterval is given by Vo? 20 yi The total number per unit frequency interval is do ante do If the high frequency cut off is at wy = oe the total number of modes will be 3 V (2 ~.1\(k9 3mV = 44+5)(S = se (atal(a) Here mp is the number of iron atoms per unit volume. Thus h 2 2 O= 18 > z= m/ (G a] For iron M (p = density, M = atomic weight of iron N, = Avogadro number). N, mo Ny | Mt OA ig = 8:389 x 10 per cc Subsiiiuiing the daia we gei © = 4691K We apply the same formula but assume vy » v,. Then e = By (6x m) or v-ko/ [A(6x?m)”?] For Al N, PAA = 6023 x 10” per c.c ny = 6.188 347 Thus v= 299k ‘The tabulated values are yO 632 km/s and vy, = 31km/s. In the Debye approximation the number of modes per unit frequency interval is given by dN= sa o0sos te nV a But x = XImv Thus an = du, 0s ws KMv : ho The energy per mode is < E> - phot aay Then the total interval cnergy of the chain is — Pf Us Jf trode xvJ 2 ° amy o/r ho L xdx i Lf xdaae0e (nngv)? ta anf 3 7 ltok: tammy t 0 e/t at + 10k ATE) We put Ing k = R for 1 mole of the chain. o/r 1i(L xdx Then U=RO)-+ J " 4 (3) e-1 Hence the molar heat capacity is by differentiation e/r (20) a(t) f x4x (aT) ~ r \Q) J #1 when T>>O,C,=R. 348 6.189 If the chain has N atoms, we can assume atom number 0 and N +1 held ficed. Then the displacement of the »" atom has the form 4, = A(sin™=-na)sinws vey Here k = = . Allowed frequencies then have the fo . ka © = Ogax sin In our form only +ve k values are allowed. The number of modes in a wave number range dk is an Edk Ldky oo ada But do~ ace dw_a Hence Tad So dn = 2k the number of atoms in the chain. oRS Mew 6.190 Molar zero point energy is ZrO. The zero point energy per gm of copper is 57— eu is the atomic weight of the copper. Substitution gives 48-6 J/gm.. 6.191 (a) By Duiong and Pet's iaw, the ciassicai heat capacity is 3% = 24:94 5/K - moi. Thus c = = 06014 Ca From the graph we see that this value of & corresponds to Z = 0:29 Ca 65 Hence O« td” 224K 349 () 22:4 3/mole-K conesponds to = 224 — = 0.898, From the graph this comesponds to r ae Z m= 065. This gives © = 22 = 385K Then 80 K corresponds to z = 0-208 The corresponding value of < is 0-42. Hence C = 10-5 J/mole-K . ch (© We calculate © from the datum that = 0.75 at T= 125K. ct The x-coordinate corresponding to 0-75 is 0-40. Hence @ = 13. 315K 04 Now kO = hon, So pax = 4-09 x 10" rad/sec 6.192 We use the formula (6.44) er 4 3 1 T xdx U=9RO|-+ 3) ses oO r ° , o 1 Xdxl(Ty (7) fC Pax aoe 14 lg -(2) 8 ¢-1{\e) “le e-1 {*o jee MF oe In the limit 7 << , the third term in £ bracket is exponentially small together with its derivatives. Then we can drop the last term U- amet ff moo OL LFS a Now from the table in the book 6.193 6.195 _ at (ry 5 \e Note :- Call the 3" term in the bracket above - U3, Then ‘ T) Yo -wn uss (§} S mas ew ae O/T xe 2sin > Thus cy The maximum value of is a finite +ve quantity Co for 0s x <=, Thus 4 U3s 200(6} ear aU, we see that U5 is exponentially small as T—> 0. So is aT . At low temperatures C « T°. This is also a test of the “lowness” of the temperature We see that 1B Cy T _ 30 &) = 14982 = 15 =F = 5p Thus T? law is obeyed and 7, , T, can we regarded low. 6.194 The total zero point energy of 1 mole of the solid is eR ©. Dividing this by the number of mades 3N we get the average zero point energy per mode. It is 3 Bho In the Debye model dN, = Aw’, 0is | Fae Fie ~ fran] fan 0 ° Fux oe 32 wy 2 232 3 «fe az / E aE ~ 5 Bee | 5 Eb 5 Ena 0 0 6.198 The fraction is Fue Fu a ~ferae/ fer = 1-277 = 0-646 or 646% 1 0 Fem 6.199 We calculate the concentration 7 of electron in the Na metal from wv 3 Fu ™ Ep * 35 Bx ny we get from Ep = 3:07eV tay 2 n = 2-447 x 10” perc.c. From this we get the number of electrons per one Na atom as where p = density of Na, M = molar weight in gm of Na, Ny = Avogadro number we get 353 6.200 The mean KE. of electrons in a Fermi gas is 5p This must equal 247. Thus 2Ep T° 3k , N, n= li = ad = 8-442 x 10” per c.c. Then Ex = 701eV and T = 3-25x10°K 6.201 We write the expression for the number of electrons as v2 an «V2 m™ purge wh Hence if AZ is the spacing between neighbouring levels near the Fermi level we must have 2. get EAE (2. on the RHS is to take care of both spins f electrons). Thus V2 03 AE- Vm? EY? But E}? - pan en wm 2a 2 So ag- 22h mV(30'n) Substituting the data we get AE = 1-79x 1077 eV 6.202 (a) From Vent PB mi dn(E) = 5 EM dE we get on using E = mv’, dn(E) = dn(v) V2 mi? 1 wh V2 This holds for Ovp- 354 (b) Mean velocity is “ Tr. 3 = nV so p= 2ncE> = nx Er = ink, - Learn” Substituting the values we get 4-92 x 10° atmos 6.205 From Richardson’s equation TeaTie**? where A is the work function in eV. When T increases by AT, J increases to (1 +) /. Then 2 T+A F 14m = (7487) T / \ Expanding and neglecting higher powers of af we get Thus Substituting we get 6.206 outside _ inside Vo The potential energy inside the metal is - Ug for the electron and it related to the work function A by Uy = EptA If T is the KE. of electrons outside the metal, its K.E. inside the metal will be (E + Uy). On entering the metal electron connot experience any tangential force so the tangential component of momentum is unchanged. Then Vimi sina = Vim(i + Up) sinB Hence sin Via Yo Ly by definition of refractive index. sin B In sodium with one free electron per Na atom 2:54 x 1U™ per c.c. Ep = 315 0V A = 2-27eV (trom table) Uy = 542eV n= 102 n 356 6.207 6.208 6.209 In a pure (intrinsic) semiconductor the conductivity is related to the temperature by the following formula very closely : = opener where At is the energy gap between the top of valence band and the bottom of conduction band; it is also the minimum energy required for the formation of electron-hole pair. The conductivity increases with temperature and we have Hence. Substitution gives At = 0333€V = Eni The photoelectric threshold determines the band gap Ae by _ 2xhe ay On ihe vier band ihe iemperaiure cveificieni of resisiance iy defined by (p id resis ee par af = ar where o is the conductivity. But Ae a = oO" FT Then a Spee 7 OOK At high temperatures (small values of T~*) most of the conductivity is infrinsic i.e. it is due to the transition of electrons from the upper levels of the valance band into the lower levels of conduction vands. For this we can apply approximately the formula E, o = opexp (za) E, . fe or Ing = In 0-5 f From this we get the band gap Aino Fe~ - 2k GT) 6.210 357 The slope must be calculated at small ‘. Evaluation gives - Hence Ey = 1-21eV At low temperatures (high values of : the conductance is mostly due to impurities. If Eo is the ionization energy of donor levels then we can write the approximate formula (valid at low temperature) feat Ey o' = 0'o exp [- 395 So Eq = -2k7 Alng! “t] The slope must be calculated at low tempenfes. Evaluation gives the slope ~AlNe 24x 100K 3 Then Eo _ 0057 eV We write the conductivity of the sample as. o = 0; +0, where 9; = intrinsic conductivity and o, is the photo conductivity. At r= 0, assuming saturation we have IH t-ts0, of o,=+- Pi-===P== = seer Time t after light source is switched off we have because of recombination of electron and holes in the sample 7d 0 = 0,+0,, where T = mean lifetime of electrons and holes. Thus ad Po ms P 1 11 or nae P2 PL p}* i 1 or w/t Pi P | P2( P= Prd a 1(P~ 2) p je2(e- pr) Hence T=i/m ? pi (p- eee Substitution gives T = 987ms _ 0-01 sec 358 6.211 6.212 ‘We shall ignore minority carriers. Drifting holes experience a sideways force in the magnetic field and react by setting up a Hall electric field E, to counterbalance it. Thus vB B= VA WB- Bo Af the concentration of carriers is n then d= nev, Je H eVy jghB lence n 5° oy . . Vv Also using jn OE, = E,/o = 5 we get ~ VAR 8 eplVy, Substituting the data (note that in MKS units B = 50kG = 05T) p = 25x 107? ohm-m we get n = 499x107 m-> = 499 x 10" per cm? % Vat Val Also the mobility is My nev Substitution gives Up = 0-05 m?/V -s =, —> yt @ le Ex te Vx If an electric field E, is present in a sample containing equal amounts of both clectrons and holes, the two drift in opposite directions. In the presence of a magnetic field B, = B they set up Hall voltages in opposite directions. 6.213 359 The net Hall electric field is given by Ey = (vp - vy) B = (up up) E,B Substitution gives | uj - u| = 0-2 m?/volt - sec = = Ey Ve # Vx @B ‘When the sample contains unequal number of carriers of both types whose mobilities are different, static equilibrium (ic. no transverse movement of cither electron or holes) is impossible in a magnetic ficld. The transverse electric field acts differently on clectrons and holes. If the £, that is set up is as shown, the net Lorentz force per unit charge (effective transverse electric field) on electrons is and on holes Ey+vgB (we are assuming B = B,). There is then a transverse drift of electrons and holes and the net transverse current must vanish in equilibrium. Using mobility Uj Ne (Ey - ws E,B)+Nyeus (Ey +usE,B) = 0 Neug? -N up? = Be Nee Nuh On the other hand Je = (Neuo + Nyy) eE, Thus, the Hall coefficient is y= 2h 1 Netiy- Nau * EB” ¢ (Neg + Nyy) ‘We see that Ry = 0 when 360 6.5 RADIOACTIVITY 6.214 6.215 6.216 6.217 (a) The probability of survival (Le. not decaying) in time ¢ is e~™'. Hence the probability of decay is 1-e"*! (b) The probability that the particle decays in time dt around time ¢ is the difference ee OM ee Ma De Mat Therefore the mean life time is cr a rf. ., if cr T= ]the"'dt he dt==> | xe *dx e*dxe= focve) Pore sfioe | >I We calculate 2. first h a = BE ~ 9.722107? per day va Hence fraction decaying in a month = 1-e* = 0-253 Here Np « SEE x 6003 x10” = 251 10% Also a = 2 ~ 0.04621 per hour Tin So the number of B rays emitted in one hour is No(1-e7*) = 1:13 x 10% T£ No is the number of radionuclei present initially, then Ny = No(t-e7**) nM, = No(l-e7**) where 1 = 2-66 and f = 3%). Then nel ev er or n-ne =1-e 7 Substituting the values 1-66 = 266e7**-e* Put e~** = x. Then -266.x +166 = 0 (7 - 1)x- 166 (x-1) = 0 6.218 6.219 6.220 6.221 or (x-1) 07 +x- 1-66) = 0 Now xalso?+x-166 = 0 ~14V144x1-66 = 2 Negative sign has to be rejected as x>0. This gives =2_ 15.9 sec in 0-882 If the half-life is T days a de ey = 55 7, m25 Hence "Wad Tin 2 or 7 = Re = 5:30 days ‘The activity is proportional to the number of parent nuclei (assuming that the daughter is not radioactive). In half its half-life period, the number of parent nucli decreases by a factor gy 1 fe 650 i i So activity decreases to 460 patles per minute 2 IE the decay constant (in (hour)"') is 2, then the activity after one hour will decrease by @ factor e~*. Hence 096 = e* or 2 = 1411 x 1075s"? = 00408 per hour The mean life time is 245 hour Here Ny = 1x 6093 x 108 b= ag : = 2531 x10" The activity is A = 124x104 dis/sec. Then n= A» 490x107" per sec. No Hence the half life is r,-™. 4-49 10° years : 362 6.222 6.223, 6.224 6.225 In old wooden atoms the number of C™ nuclei steadily decreases because of radioactive decay. Ga balance starts getting disrupted as soon as the tree is felled.) 2, If T,/2 is the half life of c™ then ¢ "Bs = 5 Hence t=Thy ins 58 = 4105 years » 4-1 x 10° years ‘What this implies is that inthe time since the ore was formed, + on U®® nuclei have remained undecayed. ‘Thus nee? Ten"? Ms mith or t-7, 37 1n2 Substituting 7, = 45x 10° years, 4 = 28 z we get t = 1-98 x 10° years. The specific activity of Na™ is Ng _ Ngln2 0 at “MT 3-22 x 10” dis/(gm.sec) 2 Here M= molar weight of N24 = 24gm, Nz is Avogadro number & 7, is the half-life of z Na”. Similarly the specific activity of U™ is 6.023 x 10 x In 2 235 x 10° x 365 x 86400 = 0-793 x 10° dis/(gm-s) Let V = volume of blood in the body of the human being, Then the total activity of the blood of the decay od Me™ and tekin: of the decay and taking is A! V. Asoum: c te the of this radionuclide, we get Val = Ae™* Now a= M2 perhour, 1 = Shour 15 -m273 _ 20x 10° - (ere 27 co = 5-95 litre Thus v-4e 6.226 6.227 363 ‘We see that Specific activity of the sample 1 wit 585 = Sraar ‘Activity of M gm of Co in the sample} Here M and M’ are the masses of Co™ and Co™ in the sample. Now activity of M gm of co® M og, 23 In2 Fy 6023 «10? x = 1-168 x 107M dis/sec Thus from the problem M = 22x 102 MF 22x10 1168 x 10% M = 188x10~? ie, 0-188 % or ar M+M Suppose N, Np are the initial number of component nuclei whose decay constants are Aa, he (im (hour)”*) Then the activity at any instant is A=ANe MN +hyNQe ‘The activity so defined is in units dis/hour. We assume that data In A given is of its natural logarithm, The daughter nuclei are assumed nonradioactive. We see from the data that at large t the change in In A per hour of elapsed time is constant and equal to - 0-07. Thus » Ay = 0-07 per hour ‘We can then see that the best fit to data is obtained by A(t) = St-1 e794 10.0079! e cA) 2 OE, = 7, 10, 14, 20 very nearly. This fixes the second term. The first term is then obtained by aioe out the constant value 10-0 from each value of A()e°"”' in the data for small t vs we get 2, = 0:66 per hour T, = 1-05 hour T, = 9-9 hours 10-0 at } half-lives Ratio te 2 ye 054 : ‘1 The answer given in the book is misleading. 364 6.228 Production of the nucleus is governed by the equation aN g-AN t Ly decay supply ‘We sce that N will approach a constant valuc . . This can also be proved dircctly. Multiply by e*’ and write AN OM ReMN @ get Then five) = ge or Nev! = Ee*'s const Att = 0 when the production is starteed, N = 0 0 = £ + constant Hence ne £a-e*') Now the activity is A=2N = g(t-e7*) From the problem This gives As = 0-463 =— = = 95 di 2 rey 0693 ays Aigebraicaiiy pe - in {i -4) in2""(' g) 6.229 (a) Suppose N, and Np are the number of two radionuclides Ay, A at time rt. Then aN, aoe AN, (1) aN, MM MMe @) From (1) M, = Nyen™* where Njq is the initial number of nuclides A, at time ¢ = 0 From (2) (4M, , .\ ae -0,-4)¢ (a rhatije = Ne"? or (ze) = const ——* ae en Oat ™=m* since No=0 at=0 Mo Constant Nz = 2° hk Thus - pe Bierte-h') () The activity of nuclide Az is X22 . This is maximum when N; is maximum. That hap- a, ens when 4 Pp a This requires dy ewe = eT In (Ay : 1 = BO 6.230 (a) This case can be obtained from the previous one on putting de =M-e where € is very small and letting ¢ —> 0 at the end. Then N° DaMio cert ay "Mt = yte™ Ng or dropping the subscript 1 as the two values are equal Ny = Nyhte*! (>) This is maximum when dN 1 qn tas 6.231 Here we have the equations aN, @7ohM a aN; a = Ny-A,N2 and ze =m From problem 229 Ny = New’ DiM0 (mat enh Ny = Me ) aN: Mb mht phe Then AN, Pe (es! e-®") dt May 366 or since Ng = 0 initially da eNo dine So My (eee mecae a re = vy[ eee) M-m 6.232 We have the chain 7B pao spe a oo A A2 Ag of the previous problem initially 10-3 2B 18 310 x 6-023 x 10% = 2:87 x 10° Ny = A month after preparation N, = 454x108 Np = 2:52:10" problem, Then Ap = ALN, = 0-725 x 10" dis/sec Ag = Nz = 1-46 x 10" dis/sec 6.233 (a) Ra has Z = 88, A = 226 After 5 a emission and 4 B (electron) emission A = 206 Z = 88+4-5x2 = 82 The product is *? pp (b) We require -AZ=10=2n-m -AA = 32 =nx4 Here n = no, of o emissions m = no. of B emissions Thus n=8,m=6 367 6.234 The momentum of the aparticle is V2M,T . This is also the recoil momentum of the daughter nuclear in opposite direction. The recoil velocity of the daughter nucleus is V2MAT | 2 M, "196 YM, = 3:39x 10° m/s M The energy of the daughter nucleus is 77° 7 and this represents a fraction fe Mo/Ma _ _Ma__ 4k any 14 Me” Maem, ~ 200 ~ 507 EG of total energy. Here M, is the mass of the daughter nucleus. 6.235 The number of nuclei initially present is 10-* 23 18 310 * 6023 x 10° = 2:87x 10 In the mean life time of these nuclei the number decaying is the fraction 1 -— 420632 Thus the energy released is 287 x 10"8 x 0-632 x 5-3 x 1602 x 10" J = 1:54MI 6.256 We uc a Excited state T 0.80Mey rmastatesPe™ 4x 1672x10-* = 1:83 x 10° cm/sec Thus R = 602cm (b) Over the whole path the number of ion pairs is 7x.10° 3g — 7 206 x 10° Over the first half of the path :- We write the formula for the mean path as Ro E22 where E is the initial energy. Thus if the energy of the a-particle after traversing the first half of the path is Ey then RoE}? = ARES? o Ey,= 24, Hence number of ion pairs formed in the first half of the path length is Ey-Ey a Saey 7-2 ) x 2:06 x 10° = 0-76 x 10° 2h Ase +O Q = (M,-M,-m,)c? = [(M,+Zm,)-(M, +Zm,+m,)] <7 = Qf, ~My)? since M, , Mg are the masses of the atoms. The binding cncrgy of the clectrons in ignored. In X capiure ext aX 74 +2 Q = My- My) P+ mc? = (ME +Zm,c2) = (My 2 +(Z=1) m,2) = 2 (M,-M) In B* decay XA, +e +O Then Q = (M,-M,-mc = [M,+Zm,]c? -[M, +(Z-1)m,]c?-2m,c7 = (My-Mg-2m,) 2 6.239 The reaction is Be” > BY 46° +9, For maximum K.E. of electrons we can put the energy of V, to be zero. The atomic masses are Be = 10-016711 amu B™ ~ 10016114 amu So the KE. of electrons is (see previous problem) 597 x 10° § amu x c? = 0-56 MeV 6.240 6.241 369 The momentum of electrons with this K.E. is 0-941 Mey and the recoil energy of the daughter is 094 0941" eyo a72ev 2xMe ~ 2x10 938 The masses are Na™ — 24-000903 amu an a Me Na™ = 24-000903 amu and Mg™ = The reaction is Na™ > Mg* 40° +¥, The maximum KE. of electrons is 0-00593 x 93 MeV = 5:52 MeV Average KE. according to the problem is then a = 1:84MeV The initial number of Na” is 107? x 6-023 x 107 24 ~ 25110" ‘The fraction decaying in a day is 1-2) 45 = 067 Hence the heat produced in a day is 0-67 x 2:51 x 10° x 1:84 x 1602 x 107 Joul = 4°95 MJ We assume that the parent nucleus is at rest. Then since the daughter nucleus does not recoil, we have — Pr -P ie. positron & v mometum are equal and opposite. On the other hand Vecip’+mict +p = Q = total energy released. (Here we have used the fact that energy of the neutrino is c|p,| = cp) Now Q = [( Mass of C! nucteus) - (Mass of B'nucteus) ] c? = [ Mass of Cll atom - Mass of B# atom -m, ] c~ = 0-00213 oom = (0-:00213 x 931 - 0-511) MeV = 1-47McV Then cp? + (0511)? = (1-47 -cp)? = (1-47)? -294 cp + cep? Thus cp = 0-646 McV =cnergy of neutrino Also K.E. of electron = 1-47 - 0-646 - 0511 = 0-313 MeV 6.242 6.243 6.244 The KE. of the positron is maximum when the energy of neutrino is zero. Since the recoil energy of the nucleus is quite small, it can be calculated by successive approximation. The reaction is NB CBee ty. The maximum cnergy available to the positron (including its rest energy) is ¢ (Mass of N@ nucleus - Mass of C” nucleus) = c? (Mass of N” atom - Mass of C” atom - m,) = 0:00239 c? - m, c? = (0-00239 v 931 - 0-511) MeV = 1-71 MeV ‘The momentum corresponding to this energy is 1-636 MeV/c. The recoil energy of the nucleus is then 2 Ce =o B= Fe Spee 7 M1 eV = Olt kev on using Mc? = 13x 931MeV The process is ej + Be’ > Li'+v The energy available in the process is @ = c° (Mass of Be” atom - Mass of Li’ atom) = 0:00092 x 931 MeV = 0-86 MeV . So in the rest frame of the Be’ atom, most of The momentum of a K electron is negligibl k, co whese m: The momentum of the recoiling nucleus is equal and opposite. The velocity of recoil is 086 MeV/e _ |, _ 086 Mee Fx oaT 7 396% 10% cm/s In internal conversion, the total energy is used to knock out K electrons. The KE. of these electrons is energy available-B.E. of K electrons = (87-26) = 61 keV ‘The total energy including rest mass of electrons is 0-511 + 0-061 = 0:572 MeV The momentum corresponding to this total energy is V (0572)? - (0-511)? /c = 0257 MeV/c. 2 wi 2p _ 0257 The velocity is then Pn ext = 0-449 6.245 6.246 6.247 6.248 371 With recoil neglected, the y-quantrum will have 129 keV energy. To a first approximation, its momentrum will be 129 keV/c and the energy of recoil will be (0-129)? . -8 Tx 191x931 MY = 4:18 x 107" MeV 129 - 82x 10° ® MeV In the next approximation we therefore write E, o Therefore Fy 3463x1077 Ey For maximum (resonant) absorption, the absorbing nucleus must be moving with enough speed phuion and have just right cuesgy (€ = 129 keV ) available for transition to the excited state. recoil Fr-6Ex V enerau= dFy gu 2 e Me the velocity of the nucleus is Since 8 Ey ~ 2 and momentum of the photon is - , these condition can be satisfied if e e Me "pga 7 28mvs = 0218km/s Because of the gravitational shift the frequency of the gamma ray at the location of the absorber is increased by 4 gh ooo 7 For this to be compensated by the Doppler shift (assuming that resonant absorption is possible in the absence of gravitational field) we must have get G v= 4. 06s um/s The natural life time is r= 2B ~ 47x10" ev Thus the condition 5,2 T implies &t2 T= * ¢ 2 or hz £ ~ 464 mete reg (h here is height of the place, not planck’s constant.) 372 6.6 NUCLEAR REACTIONS 6.249 Jnitial momentum of the o particle is V2mT, ¥ (where 7 is a unit vector in the incident direction). Final momenta are respectively p7, and py, . Conservation of momentum reads Bu+Pi = V2mT, 7 Squaring Pat Ph +2 Pa Py:c0s © = 2mT, (ay where @ is the angle between px and py; . Also by energy conservation (m & M are respectively the masses of @ particle and Li’ .) So M spectively P é Pat GP: = 2mT a Q) Subsiraciing (2) from (i) we see trai ‘Thus if m (\-BJpuseo. Since pa, py; are both positive number (being magnitudes of vectors) we must have Fi he M(B) we Hence the recoil energy of the L; nucleus is 2M (M— my + amM ‘As we pointed out above © x 60°. If we take © = 120°, we get 6McV sec’ @ recoil energy of Li 6.280 (a) Ina head on collision V2mT = pst Px r- Pi, Ph 2M 2m Where p, and p, are the momenta of deuteron and neutron after the collision. Squaring Pit Pa+ZPaPn = 2m 373 pie i py = 2mT or since py# 0 in a head on collisions 1 m Pn = ~9|1-yg|Pa- Going back to energy conservation 2 M. fife s(-a) | -7 So Pa 4mM 2M ~ (m+My This is the energy lost by neutron. So the fraction of energy lost is = AmM_ 8 (m+my 9 (b) In this case neutron is scattered by 90°. Then we have froma the diagram Ba =p, j+V2mT t Then by energy conservation pit2mT pe Tr 2M *2m~ 2 Pay, ™) f(y ™) or am ( i (1 iy o | Pe Mam, 2m" M+m" The energy lost by neutron in then _ 2m 2m” M+m ot fraction’ of energy lost is = 2% = 2 M+m "3 6.251 From conservation of momentum V2MT 1 = pi+D, or pp=2MT + py-2V2MT 9400s 0 From energy conservation Pi, Pp TOM‘ 2m 374 6.252 6.253 (M = mass of denteron, m = mass of proton) So Be 2mT-T pi: Hence vali te -2V2MT p,cos0+2(M-m)T =0 For real roots 4M Teo? 0-4x20M-mr(1+ 2 0 2 ox e(t al Hence sin? 0s ie. Os sin For deuteron-proton scaltering Opa: = 30°. This problem has a misprint. Actually the radius R of a nucleus is given by R=13 VA fm where fm = 10m. Then the number of nucleous per unit volume is - a (13)°3 x 10°? m=? = 1-09 x 10® per cc The corresponding mass density is (1-09 x 10*® x mass of a nucleon) per cc = 1:82 x 10" kg/ce (a) The particle x must carry two nucleons and a unit of positive charge. The reaction is BY (d,a) Be (>) The particle x must contain a proton in addition to the constituents of O'?, Thus the reaction is oO" d,n)F* (©) The particle x must carry nucleon number 4 and two units of +ve charge. Thus the particle musi de x = a and the reaciion is Na® (p a) Ne® (@) The particle x must carry mass number 37 and have one unit less of positive charge. Thus x = Cl” and the reaction is cl" (p,n)Ar" 378 6.254 From the hasic formula Ey = Zmy+(A-Z)m,- We define Ag = my- Lamu A, = m,-1 amu A = M-Aamu Then clearly E, = ZAy+(A-Z)A,-A 6.255 The mass number of the given nucleus must be ‘Thus the nucleus is Be*. Then the binding energy is By = 4% 000867 + 4+ x 000785 - 0-0053i amu = 0-06069 amu = 565 MeV On using 1 amu = 931 McV. 6.256 (a) Total binding energy of the O" nucleus is Ey = 8 x -00867 + 8 x 00783 +.0-00509 amu = 0:13709 amu = 127-6 MeV So B.E. per nucleon is 7-98 Mev/nucleon (0) B.E. of neutron in B “nucleus = BE. of BU-BE. of BY (since on removing 2 neutron from RY we get R ) = A,— Ap, + 4s, = 00867 - 00930 + 01294 = 001231 amu = 11-46 MeV BE, of ( an a-particle in B"") = BE. of B'- BE. of Li’ - BE. of a (since on removing an a from B" we get Li’ ) =A +A + Ae = 0.00931 amu = 867MeV (6) This energy is B.E. of O° + 4(B.E. of a particles) O44 pa = Ag+ 4A, = 4x 0-00260 + 0-00509 = 0-01549 amu = 14-42 MeV 376 6.257 BE. of a neutron in B™ - B.E. of a proton in B! = (A, - Ap" + Ag%) - (A, - Ap" + Bp") = A, Ap + Ap!?- Api? = 0:00867 - 0-00783 +0-01294 — 0:01354 = 0-00024 amu = 0-223 MeV The difference in binding energy is essentially due to the coulomb repulsion between the proton and the residual nucleus Be’ which together constitute B'', 6.258 Required energy is simply the difference in total binding energies- = BE. of Ne”-2(BE. of He*)-BE. of C? = Weye-8 eq — 12 (e is binding energy per unit nucleon.) Substitution gives 11-88 MeV. 6.259 (a) We have for Li® 41-3 MeV = 0-044361 amu = 34, +54,-A Hence A = 3 x 0-00783 + 5 x 0-00867 - 0-09436 = 0-02248 amu (b) For c? 10 x 6-04 = 60-4MeV = 006488 amu = 6Ay+44,-4 Hence A = 6 x 0-00783 + 4 x 0-00867 - 0-06488 = 0-01678 amu Hence the mass of C"° is 10-01678 amu 6.260 Suppose M,, Mz, M3, My are the rest masses of the nuclei A; , Ap, Ag and A, perticipating in the reaction A, +A, 43 +Ag+Q Here @Q is the energy released. Then by conservation of energy. Q = 2 Wy +M,-My-M,) Now Myc? = c?(Z,my+(A,-Z) m,) -E, etc. and Z,+2Z, = Z;+Z,(conservation of change) A, +Az = Az +Ag (conservation of heavy particles) Hence Q = (Es +E,) -(E, +E) 6.261 (a) the energy liberated in the fission of 1 kg of U** is 1000 Fag «6023 x 10” x 200 MeV = 8-21 x 10° KI The mass of coal with equivalent calorific value is 82110 | 30000 “8 ~ 274 x 10° ke 274 x 20° kg 6.262 6.263 6.264 6.265 377 (b) The required mass’is 30 x 10° x 4-1 x 10° Se = 149 200 x 1-602 x 10° x 6-023 x 107 * joo0 ‘s The reaction is (in effect). +H’ He +9 Then Q = 2Ay - And +O = 002820 - 000260 = 0:02560 amu = 23-8 MeV sre! 4 Hence ihe energy reieased in i gm of fie‘ is sma, 238 x 16-02 x 107 Joule = 5-75 x 10° kI This energy can be derived from . 8 S15 x10 ig = 19x 10' kg of Coal. 30000 The energy released in the reaction LiS +H? —> 2 He! is Ayp+ Aye = 2 Ane = 001513 + 0-01410 - 2 x 0-00 260 amu = 002403 amu = 22:37 MeV (This result for change in B.E. is correct because the contribution of A, & Ay cancels out by conservation law for protons & neutrons.) Energy per nucleon is then BIg Lil+p—>2He is, 2xBE. of He'-BE. of Li’ = 8e,-78;; = 8x 706 -7x 5-60 © 17:3MeV The reaction is N'* {a .p) 0” It is given that (in the Lab frame where N"* is at rest) 7, = 40 MeV. The momentum of incident @ particle is V2m,T, i = V2n, mT, i 378 The momentum of outgoing proton is ¥2m,T, (cos 0 t+ sin @ 3) = V27, mT, (cos 8 t+ sin 6 }) where 1) = “, Na = =. J t a ity ity and mo is the mass of O'”. The momentum of 0” is oV (V2 nm Te - V2M, mp T, cos 0 ji ~ — V2 mg Np Tp sin Oj By energy conservation (conservation of energy including rest mass energy and kinetic energy) Myc? +Mg co +Tq = M,C +T,+Myc? 2 +[ 7, Vip, cos 0) +n, T,sin® 0+ ny 7, sin? 0 Hence by definition of the Q of reaction O = Myc +M-M, 0 -My ce = 7, +a Tat Np Tp 2V tip Na Ta Tp * 005 0 - Ty = (1 +n,) Z, + Tall - Na) -2V iy Na Ta Tp 008 0 = - 1:19 MeV 6.266 (a) The reaction is Li’ (p,n) Be’ and the energy of reaction is Q = (My? + M7) 0? + (M, -M,) c = (ui, ~ Ane’) C+ Ay Ay = [0-01601 + 0-00783 - 0-01693 - 0-00867] amu x c” = -164MeV (b) The reaction is Be° (n, y) Be”. Mass of y is taken zero. Then = (Ane + Ay- Ape®) c = (0-01219 + 0-00867 - 0-01354 y! amu : ce = 631 MeV 2 6.267 379 (©) The reaction is Li’ (a, 2) B™, The energy is Q = (by? + Ba by ~ Ay!) 7 = (001601 + 0-00260 - 0-00867 - 01294 ) amu x c = -2-79McV (d) The reaction is O' (d, a) N"*. The energy of reaction is Q = (Ao" + Ay Ba AN) c = (~ 0-00509 + 0-01410 - 0-00260 - 0:00307) amu x c? = 3-11 MeV The reaction is B! (na) Li’. The energy of the reaction is Q = (Api? +A,- Ay Ay)? = (0:01294 + 0:00867 - 0-00260 - 0:01601) amu x ¢ = 2-79MeV Since the incident neutron is very slow and B"® is stationary, thc final total momentum must also be zero. So the reaction products must emerge in opposite directions. If their speeds are, repectively, vq and vz; 2 then 4Vq afacd: Lig ay x 1-672 x 9 tat Tea) E2672 So bwin) ameitaia or Vq = 927 x 105 m/s Then Vii = 53x 10° m/s of this reaction (Li” (p , n) Be” ) was caicuiated in probiem 266 (a). if is ~ i-64 MeV. ‘We have by conservation of momentum and energy p, = Pape (Since initial Li and final neutron are both at rest) 2 2 Pe Pe 4 1.64 2m," 2m," . Pe Then o2(1- Te) = 1.64 2m, |" ~ mae Be _7 Hence T, = =& = =x164MeV = 191 MeV 2m, ~ 6 b Bot Th ae }. The momenturm of C’? is 380 6.270 V2m,T t-V2m,T, } Then by energy conservation An (V2mn nd ) VemeT i ZmgT+2MmyTn T+Q- +m Le Be? (m, is the mass of C!?) tas 7, o MTtD~ maT ” Me + My o+(t-Ze}r __ (tig mg) T+ me _ m+ mM, m, The @Q value of the reaction Li’ (p , a) He’ is O-tayes yt @ = hy? + by 2 bye = (0:01601 +.0-00783 - 0:00520) amu x c” = 0-01864 amu x c? = 17:35 MeV Since the direction of He* nuclei is symmetrical, their momenta must also be equal. Let T be the KE, of each He‘. Then Po 2V2 MieT cos (p, is the momentum of proton). Also Zz h4Q=2T=7,+0 2m, 8 sec Hence 7, +9 = 2-4 ame 5¢2 8 “Tin 2 Hence cos 2 ae Tp 2 Zaye T, +O Substitution gives 0 = 17053° Also T- 4@,+0) = 918 MeV. 6.271 6.272, 6.273 6.274 6.275 381 Energy required is minimum when the reaction products all move in the direction of the incident particle with the same velocity (so that the combination is at rest in the centre of mass frame). We then have V2mT, = (m+M)v (Total mass is constant in the nonrelativistic limit). tetol- Geape? - 2 Ta-12] - 5 ara = oe M or Ta 712! Hence a= [145 ile! The result of the previous problem applics and we find that energy required to split a deuteron M, is Te (1+ if}e = s9mev Since the reaction Li’ (pn) Be” (Q = - 1-65 MeV) is initiated, the incident proton energy must be My) (ing J «16s = 189MeV since the reaction Be’ (p ,n) B° (Q = - 1-85 MeV) is not initiated, Ts (tee) 8 = 2:06McV Thus 189McV s 7, < 2:06 McV ve We have 4.0 = iz) lel i or O = -75*4McV = -367 MeV The Q of the reaction Li’ (p,n) Be’ was calculated in problem 266 (a). It is - 1-64MeV Hence, the threshold K.E. of protons for initiating this reaction is T= (1+Ze}101 = 34164 = 187Mev my 7 For the reaction Li’ (p ,d) Li® we find Q = (Ay; + Ay - Ay- Ay) 7 = (0-01601 + 0-00783 - 0:01410 - 0:01513) amu x c? ~ - 502 MeV The threshold proton energy for initiating this reaction is Ts (iz ma} = 5:73 MeV 382 6276 6.277 6.278 The Q of Li’ (a, n) B® was calculated in problem 266 (c). It is Q = 2-79 MeV Then the threshold energy of c-particle is Ma S\o79 - 4: Ta-(teZe)101 - (19) 20 438MeV The velocity of B"° in this case is simply the volocity of centre of mass :- This is because both B" and n are at rest in the CM frame at theshold, Substituting the values of various quantities we get v = 5-27 x 10° m/s The momentum of incident neutron is V2m,T 1%, that of a particle is V2m, Tq } and of Be’? is -V2maTq j+V2m,T i By conservation of energy Beq T, we get ‘s Ms) p—To_] Mis the mass of C? nucleus. 1 MM or Ta" Gemg| O°MOT- Seem, = 221 MeV The formula of problem 6.271 does not apply here because the photon is always reletivistic. E, At threshold, the encrgy of the photon E, implies a momentum °-". The velocity of centre of mass with respect to the rest frame of initial H’ is z (m,+m,)¢ Since both n & p are at rest in CM frame at threshold, we write 6.279 6.280 383 2 =——"_+ 2(m, + m,) c by conservation of energy. Since the first term is a small correction, we have 2 Ey yaks t oem) e in + y £, Thus SEL 2 Es” ane m)e ” 2X2xS5 ar nearly 0-06 % . = 59x10-* The reaction is p+d—He* Excitation energy of He? is just the energy available in centre of mass. The velocity of the centre of mass is emt if 2% m,+mg = 3 my In the CM frame, the kinetic energy available is (mz ~ 2m,) 1, (22% | .1,,, (127 | . 27 mf my | *27™(3 ¥ im, 3 The total energy available is then Q + > where O = c*(A,+As- An) = cx (0-00783 + 0-01410 - 0.01603) amu = 5-49MeV Finally E = 6-49 MeV. The reaction is d+C® +N * +nan¥ Maxima of yields determine the energy levels of N1°*. As in the previous problem the excitation energy is Bee = Ztix where Ex = available kinetic energy. This is found is as in the previous problem. The velocity of the centre of mass is V2mgT, a V2 mz+m, ~ mg+m. my 384 ce a So Eg = bmg(1-—™~) 2% 41 mq, (—e_) 2% | te _, 2 ima+ mz) mg *2™\img+m,| mg” mam, Q is the Q value for the ground state of N° : We have Q = C7 x (Ag+ Ac? Ay) = c? x (0-01410 + 0-00335 - 0-00011) amu = 16:14 MeV The excitation energies then are 17-49 MeV and 17-70 MeV. 6.281 We have the relation 1 saad toe n Here + = attenuation factor n= no. of Cd nuclei per unit volume @ = effective cross section d= thickness of the plate ON, Now ne (p = density, M = Molar weight of Cd, Ny = Avogadro number.) M. Thus ope Inn = 253kb 6.282 Here 7 where 1 refers to O' and 2 to D nuclei et mod Using m = 2n, n, = n = concentration of O nuclei in heavy water we get 1 _ .-Qo,t0)nd a Now using the data for heavy water ne tix 6033 x 10% a = 3313 x 10” per cc Thus substituting the values hy n= 204 =F. 385 6.283 In traversing a distance d the fraction which is cither scattered or absorbed is clearly 12 M@to)e by the usual definition of the attenuation factor. Of this, the fraction scattered is (by definition of scattering and absorption cross scction) we fr—e-me,teya} Ss _ ee a+ N, In iron n= PAs © 33910" perce Substitution gives w = 0-352 6.284 (a) Assuming of vourse, that each reaction produces a radio nuclide of the same type, the decay constant 0: of the radionuclide is k/w. Hence T = 22 - “ina Beak: (b) number of bombarding particles is : a 6.285 (a) 0) e = charge on proton). Then the number of Be’ produced is : P If A = decay constant of Be? = m2 , then the activity is A = Hey 2 eAT 3 Hence w Tind 1-98 x 10 Suppose No = no. of Au?” nuclei in the foil. Then the number of Au?” nuclei trans- formed in time t is No-J-o-t For this to equal 1.No , we must have t= 1/0) = 323 years 198 Rate of formation of the Au’®* nuclei is No -J- 0 per sec and £ deca: R the bor of Au) sg: to of decay is Xn, where x is the number of Au Thus dt ong J-o-2n The maximum number of Au! is clearly Nod: Tax = because if n is smaller, #59 and n will increase further and if n is larger a. 0 and 1 will decrease. (Actually raa, is approached steadily as 1 > «) Substitution gives using No = 3-057 10", Magy = 1-01 x 10> 386 6.286 6.287 6.288 6.289 6.290 Rate of formation of the radionuclide is nJ-o per unit area per-sec. Rate of decay is AN. Thus x = mJig LN per unit area per second Then (sean) om mise o See) = ntoe™ Hence Ne* = Const+ = age ew ee . FO Th - tye en N % (1-e7*") We apply the formula of the previous problem except that have N = no. of radio nuclide and no. of host nuclei originally. ne YT) gen Te T = who (1-e 1827) eet ‘Thus T= AeBUT Ing (t—e YT) = 5-92 x 10° part/em?s No. of nuclei in the first gencration = No. of nuclei initially = No in the second generation = No x multiplication factor =.No*k No in the the 3rd generation = Ny-k-k = Nok? No in the nth generation = No k"~' Substitution gives 1-25 x 10° neutrons No. of fissions per unit time is clearly P/E. Hence no. of neutrons produced per unit time to xs. Substitution gives 7-80 x 108 neutrons/sec (a) This number is k"~! where n = no. of generations in time t = /T Substitution gives 388. (b) We write or Tyet 387 6.7 ELEMENTARY PARTICLES 6.291 6.292 6.293 The formula is Vc2p? + mich — moc? Gev -3 Thus T= 53MeV for p = 01092 = 53x10"? Gev T = 0-433GeV for p = 19S T = 9106GeV for p = 10 Sk Here we have used myc” = 0-938 GeV Energy of pions is (1 +1) moc? so myc Gtnme = Vi-p° Hence 1 =-1+y or B= meen vi-p? Here B = X of pion. Hence time dilation factor is 1+m and the distance traversed by the pion in its lifetime will be Bt sca Vn @en) = 15-0 metres 1-8? on substituting the values of various quantities, (Note. The factor w= can be looked at 1-6 as a time dilation effect in the laboratory frame or as length contraction factor brought to the other side in the proper frame of the pion). From the previous problem | = ct) Vn (n +2) T , . where = Ty, mis the rest mas of pions substitution gives fg eae Vn 24m) I mc VI(T+2m,c?) where we have used y = = 0-716 100 1396 388 6.294 6.295 6.296 Here n = 2; ~ 1 so the life time of the pion in the laboratory frame is me = (1+) = 2% The Jaw of radioactive decay implies that the flux decrease by the factor. Jol cue pln, ven Vem Jo 1 = Th 0-221 T(T+2m Energy-momentum conservation implies O= PtP mc = B,+E, or myc? -£, Rut F, = lm | = cla. Thus miet-amed! oF and lee | a 2my, 2m Substitution gives T,, = 19:55 MeV The reaction is wet ee +% The neutrinocs are massless. The positron will carry largest momentum if both ncutriones (ve & ¥,) move in the same direction in the rest frame of the nuon. Then the final product is effectively a two body system and we get from problem (295) 2 Gj 2 2m, Substitution gives (Te aux = 52:35 MeV By conservation of energy-momentum Mc = E,+Ey O=p, +h Then mac! = Ei-pic? = (Mc?-E,)- cp, = Mh 2M cE, + mec This is a quadratic equation in M E M-2-£M+m2-m2 =0 ¢ ? 4 T and solving or using E, = m, : (u-%) ~ e - nbem 3 A Ve Fe mbm é T Vio T T M = m,+5+V mit Sl2m+5 e e e 2 2) Substitution gives MeV M = 1115-4 z From the table of masses we identify the particle as a particle 390 6.299 See the diagram. By conservation of energy Vinich+c?pt = cpt Vere’ + prc +e pe or (Vmke +P -cny Yo tet Pphe cp 7 mich-2ep,Vmicee pe = mic* Hence the energy of the neutrino is mc’ - mec 2(myc+T) on writing Vm ct+ cp? = m,c7+T Substitution gives E, = 21-93McV E=cpy= 6.300 B= Pyb , | ie 3 By energy conservation Vink ch +c? pk = Waidch +c2p2 + Vmict +c ph +c? pe 2 or (Vin c+ et -Vinict +c? py ) = mc +c pat c Ds or mach +2 pk+ mich pt -2Vndcd +o pk Vm 2+ 2 pt = move phee eh 6.301 6.302 391 or using the KB. of 2&1 and m, = Here by conservation of momentum 2 Ex 9 Px = 2x TEx COs > a 6 or cp, = 2,008 > 2 Thus Ecos? ® = Bm 2 eee or oe 2 and Ty = myc (coe s- ‘) substitution gives T, = m,c’ = 135 MeV for @ = 60°. 2 ctl, | ie Also Be : = m,c*in this case (@ = 60°) With particle masses standing for the names of the particles, the reaction is m+M—>my+m+ On RS. let the energy momenta be (E,, cp;), (Ep, ¢ pp) etc. On the left the enemy momenivn of ihe pariicie m is (EZ, cp’) and ihai of ihe oiher pariicie is (6 c?, 7), waere, ofcourse, the usual relations EB -op =m’ c‘etc hold. From the conservation of energy momentum we see that a2 +MY ep = (2E- Cen) Left hand side is mch+M ch +2MCE We evaluate the R.HLS. in the frame where 2p; = 0 (CM frame of the decay product). ‘Then RAS. = (ZEY = Emery 392 6.303 6.304 6.305 because all energies are +ve. Therefore we have the result (my -m-M , “7 or since E = mc? +T, we see that T = Ty where 2. E (S mi +My Ty = Em nM 2 By momentum conservation. e Etm.c ont 2 2 or cos fa 2 E+m,c? T+2m,.c7 é Substitution gives @ =98-8° The formula of problem 3.02 gives when the projectile is a photon (@) Fory+e e+e set Qme-me 2 2 En ye = Amc? = 2:04MeV (b) For yep pt 5, wt +2m,)-M2 , 4m,M,+4m2 » of ) 2. 3008 Mev i eo ee? 2 2 |g + | c? = 320-8 Me 2M, 2M, @) For p+p—p+ptp+p 2 ay? 16 m, - 4 m7 T2T, = Fe = 6m,c? = 563 GeV ‘p (0) For p+p—>p+p+x® - (2m, + mye)? 4m 2p T2T 2, mm c? = 0-280 GeV 6.306 6.307 6.308 6.309 393 (a) Here T= Substitution gives Ty = 0-904 GeV (ge + mp)? — (ge +, ®) Tye ed Substitution gives Ty, = 0-77 GeV. From the Gell-Mann Nishijima formula y Q-&r, we get oakst or Y=-1 2°2 Also Y = B+S=» S = ~2, Thus the particle is =° 0. (1) The process n—> p +e" +, cannot occur as there are 2 more leptons (e”, v,) on the right comopared to zero on the left. (2) The process x* —> p.* +e” + e* is forbidden because this corresponds to a change of lepton number by, (0 on the left - 1 on the right) (3) The process (4), 6), (6) are allowed (except that one must distinguish between muon neutrinoes and electron neutrinoes). The correct names would be (4) pte atv, ©) wt eteveeh © K>w+y,. @ w+prreK 0 o-1 1 so AS = 0. allowed (2) w+pmseK 0 o-1 1 so AS = -2. forbidden (Q) w+p7>K +K tn 0 o--i1 0 so AS = 0, allowed. 304 (4) n+p A°+d* 0 0 -1 -1 so AS = -2. forbidden (5) wn 4K 4K 0 o~m-21 -1 so. AS = -2. forbidden, © K+prO+K Ke ~1 0 -3 +11 so AS = 0. allowed. 6.310 (1) SAP a” is forbidden by energy conservation. The mass difference (The process 1 —> 2 +3 will be allowed only if my > mz +3.) Q) w+poKek is disaiiowed by conservation of baryon number. Q) K+n > O+K+k is forbidden by conservation of charge (4) n+p>Et+A° is forbidden by strangeness conservation. Poe eet is forbidden by conservation of muon number (or lepton number). © wre tver¥, is forbidden by the separate conservation of muon number as well as lepton number. verere

You might also like